Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Study Text
In this February 2010 edition A user-friendly format for easy navigation Regular fast forward summaries emphasising the key points in each chapter Assessment focus points showing you what the assessor will want you to do Questions and quick quizzes to test your understanding Question bank containing objective test questions with answers A full index
BPP Learning Media's i-Pass product also supports this paper. FOR ASSESSMENTS IN 2010 and 2011
First edition June 2006 Third edition February 2010 ISBN 9780 7517 8071 0 (previous edition 9780 7517 5282 3) e-ISBN 9780 7517 8399 5 British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library Published by BPP Learning Media Ltd BPP House, Aldine Place London W12 8AA www.bpp.com/learningmedia Printed in the United Kingdom A note about copyright Dear Customer What does the little mean and why does it matter? Your market-leading BPP books, course materials and e-learning materials do not write and update themselves. People write them: on their own behalf or as employees of an organisation that invests in this activity. Copyright law protects their livelihoods. It does so by creating rights over the use of the content. Breach of copyright is a form of theft as well as being a criminal offence in some jurisdictions, it is potentially a serious breach of professional ethics. With current technology, things might seem a bit hazy but, basically, without the express permission of BPP Learning Media: Photocopying our materials is a breach of copyright Scanning, ripcasting or conversion of our digital materials into different file formats, uploading them to facebook or emailing them to your friends is a breach of copyright
Your learning materials, published by BPP Learning Media Ltd, are printed on paper sourced from sustainable, managed forests.
All our rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of BPP Learning Media Ltd. We are grateful to the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants for permission to reproduce past examination questions. The suggested solutions in the exam answer bank have been prepared by BPP Learning Media Ltd. BPP Learning Media Ltd 2010
You can, of course, sell your books, in the form in which you have bought them once you have finished with them. (Is this fair to your fellow students? We update for a reason.) But the e-products are sold on a single user licence basis: we do not supply unlock codes to people who have bought them second-hand. And what about outside the UK? BPP Learning Media strives to make our materials available at prices students can afford by local printing arrangements, pricing policies and partnerships which are clearly listed on our website. A tiny minority ignore this and indulge in criminal activity by illegally photocopying our material or supporting organisations that do. If they act illegally and unethically in one area, can you really trust them?
ii
Contents
Page
Introduction
The BPP Learning Media Study Text The BPP Learning Media Effective Study Package Help yourself study for your CIMA assessment Learning outcomes and syllabus The assessment Tackling multiple choice questions Tackling objective test questions International terminology
Appendix Present value tables.......................................................................................................................................................419 Question bank .................................................................................................................................................................................423 Answer bank ....................................................................................................................................................................................443 Index ...............................................................................................................................................................................................455 Review form and free prize draw
iii
To allow you to study in the way that best suits your learning style and the time you have available, by following your personal Study Plan (see page (vii))
You may be studying at home on your own until the date of the exam, or you may be attending a full-time course. You may like to (and have time to) read every word, or you may prefer to (or only have time to) skim-read and devote the remainder of your time to question practice. Wherever you fall in the spectrum, you will find the BPP Learning Media Study Text meets your needs in designing and following your personal Study Plan.
To tie in with the other components of the BPP Learning Media Effective Study Package to ensure you have the best possible chance of passing the exam (see page (v))
iv
Introduction
Learning to Learn Accountancy Read this invaluable book as you begin your studies and refer to it as you work through the various elements of the BPP Learning Media Effective Study Package. It will help you to acquire knowledge, practise and revise, efficiently and effectively.
Study Text Use the Study Text to acquire knowledge, understanding, skills and the ability to apply techniques.
Throughout
i-Pass i-Pass, our computer-based testing package, provides objective test questions in a variety of formats and is ideal for self-assessment.
Practice & Revision Kit Try the numerous assessment-format questions, for which there are full worked solutions where relevant prepared by BPP Learning Media's own authors. Then attempt the two mock assessments.
From three months before the assessment until the last minute
Passcards Work through these short, memorable notes which are focused on what is most likely to come up in the assessment you will be sitting.
Introduction
To absorb the information (and to practise your written communication skills), it helps to put it into your own words. Take notes. Answer the questions in each chapter. You will practise your written communication skills, which become increasingly important as you progress through your CIMA assessments. Draw mindmaps. Try 'teaching' a subject to a colleague or friend. Try colour coding with a highlighter pen. Write key points on cards.
The BPP Learning Media Study Text uses bold to highlight key points.
vi
Introduction
The right review Review, review, review It is a fact that regularly reviewing a topic in summary form can fix it in your memory. Because review is so important, the BPP Learning Media Study Text helps you to do so in many ways. Chapter roundups summarise the 'fast forward' key points in each chapter. Use them to recap each study session. The Quick quiz is another review technique you can use to ensure that you have grasped the essentials. Go through the Examples in each chapter a second or third time.
Step 1
How do you learn? First you need to be aware of your style of learning. The BPP Learning Media Learning to Learn Accountancy book commits a chapter to this self-discovery. What types of intelligence do you display when learning? You might be advised to brush up on certain study skills before launching into this Study Text. BPP Learning Media's Learning to Learn Accountancy book helps you to identify what intelligences you show more strongly and then details how you can tailor your study process to your preferences. It also includes handy hints on how to develop intelligences you exhibit less strongly, but which might be needed as you study accountancy. Are you a theorist or are you more practical? If you would rather get to grips with a theory before trying to apply it in practice, you should follow the study sequence on page (viii). If the reverse is true (you like to know why you are learning theory before you do so), you might be advised to flick through Study Text chapters and look at examples, case studies and questions (Steps 8, 9 and 10 in the suggested study sequence) before reading through the detailed theory.
Step 2
How much time do you have? Work out the time you have available per week, given the following. The standard you have set yourself The time you need to set aside later for work on the Practice & Revision Kit and Passcards The other exam(s) you are sitting Very importantly, practical matters such as work, travel, exercise, sleep and social life Hours Note your time available in box A. A
Introduction
vii
Step 3
Allocate your time Take the time you have available per week for this Study Text shown in box A, multiply it by the number of weeks available and insert the result in box B. B Divide the figure in box B by the number of chapters in this text and insert the result in box C. C
Remember that this is only a rough guide. Some of the chapters in this book are longer and more complicated than others, and you will find some subjects easier to understand than others.
Step 4
Implement Set about studying each chapter in the time shown in box C, following the key study steps in the order suggested by your particular learning style. This is your personal Study Plan. You should try and combine it with the study sequence outlined below. You may want to modify the sequence a little (as has been suggested above) to adapt it to your personal style. BPP Learning Media's Learning to Learn Accountancy gives further guidance on developing a study plan, and deciding where and when to study.
Take brief notes, if you wish. Avoid the temptation to copy out too much. Remember that being able to put something into your own words is a sign of being able to understand it. If you find you cannot explain something you have read, read it again before you make the notes.
viii
Introduction
Key study steps Step 7 Examples Step 8 Questions Step 9 Answers Step 10 Chapter roundup Step 11 Quick quiz Step 12 Question(s) in the question bank
Activity Follow each through to its solution very carefully. Make a very good attempt at each one. Check yours against ours, and make sure you understand any discrepancies. Work through it carefully, to make sure you have grasped the significance of all the fast forward points. When you are happy that you have covered the chapter, use the Quick quiz to check how much you have remembered of the topics covered and to practise questions in a variety of formats. Either at this point, or later when you are thinking about revising, make a full attempt at the Question(s) suggested at the very end of the chapter. You can find these at the end of the Study Text, along with the Answers so you can see how you did.
Introduction
ix
Moving on...
However you study, when you are ready to embark on the practice and revision phase of the BPP Learning Media Effective Study Package, you should still refer back to this Study Text, both as a source of reference (you should find the index particularly helpful for this) and as a way to review (the Fast forwards, Assessment focus points, Chapter roundups and Quick quizzes help you here). And remember to keep careful hold of this Study Text you will find it invaluable in your work.
More advice on Study Skills can be found in BPP Learning Media's Learning to Learn Accountancy book.
Introduction
Aims
This syllabus aims to test students' ability to: Distinguish the differing goals of organisations and identify how these differing goals affect the decisions made by managers Illustrate how market economies function and identify the reasons for, and impacts of, government involvement in economic activities Identify the role of financial institutions and markets in the provision of short and long term finance to individuals, businesses and governmental organisations Identify how macroeconomic variables and government economic policies affect the organisation.
Assessment
The assessment is computer-based, lasting 120 minutes (2 hours) and comprising 75 compulsory questions.
Further reading
Although this Study Text is designed to provide all the information you need to tackle the C4 assessment, if you want to read more widely around the subject of business economics we recommend you look at: Sloman, J. (2007) Economics and the Business Environment, (2nd ed.), Pearson
Introduction
xi
Indicative syllabus content (1) (2) The forms of ownership of organisations, by which we mean public, private and mutual, and their goals Graphical treatment of short run cost and revenue behaviour as output increases (revenue and cost curves) and identification of point of short-run profit maximisation, using graphical techniques, and from data. Long run cost behaviour and the impact of economies and diseconomies of scale Concept of returns to shareholder investment in the short run (ROCE and EPS) and long run (NPV of free cash flows) leading to need for firms to provide rates of return to shareholders at least equal to the firm's cost of capital. Calculation of impact on the value of shares of a change to a company's forecast cash flows or required rate. (Note: Calculations required will be either perpetual annuity valuations with constant annual free cash flows, or NPV calculations with variable cash flows over three years.) Types of not-for-profit organisations (NPOs) and the status of economic considerations as constraints rather than primary objectives in the long run. Role of stakeholders in setting goals and influencing decisions in NPOs and potential ways of resolving differing stakeholder demands. The principal-agent problem, its likely effect on decision-making in profit seeking and NPO organisations, and the concepts of scrutiny and corporate governance.
(3) (4)
3 2
(5)
2 2 2
xii
Introduction
Indicative syllabus content (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) The price mechanism: determinants of supply and demand and their interaction to form and change equilibrium price. The price elasticity of demand and its effect on firms' revenues and pricing decisions. The price elasticity of supply and its impact on prices, supply and buyers' expenditure. Business integration: mergers, vertical integration and conglomerates. Calculation of market concentration and its impact on efficiency, innovation and competitive behaviour. Impact of monopolies and collusive practices on prices and output and role of competition policy in regulating this. Factors causing instability of prices in primary goods markets (ie periodic and short run inelasticity of supply, the cobweb or hog cycle) and the implications of this for producer incomes, industry stability and supply and government policies to combat this (eg deficiency payments, set-aside, subsidies) Impact of minimum price (minimum wages) and maximum price policies in goods and factor markets. Positive and negative externalities in goods markets and government policies to deal with these (including indirect taxes, subsidies, polluter pays policies and regulation). Public assurance of access to public goods, healthcare, education and housing. Public versus private provision of services (nationalisation, privatisation, contracting out, public private partnerships).
4 6 6 8
Introduction
xiii
Indicative syllabus content (1) The causes of short-term, medium-term and long-term lack of synchronisation between payments and receipts in households (ie month-to-month cash flow, shortterm saving and borrowing, and longer-term property purchases and pensions provision). The causes of short-term, medium-term and long-term lack of synchronisation between payments and receipts in firms (ie month-to-month cash flow management, finance of working capital and short-term assets and long term permanent capital). The causes of short-term, medium-term and long-term lack of synchronisation between payments and receipts in governmental organisations (ie month-to-month cash flow management, finance of public projects and long-term management of the national debt). The principal contracts and assets issued by financial institutions and borrowers to attract liquidity in the short, medium and long term (eg credit agreements, mortgages, bills of exchange, bonds, certificates of deposit and equities) The roles and functions of financial intermediaries and the principal institutions and markets in the financial system. The influence of commercial banks on the supply of liquidity to the financial system through their activities in credit creation. Yield on financial instruments (ie bill rate, running yield on bonds, net dividend yield on equity), relation between rates, role of risk, the yield curve. Influence of central banks on yield rates through market activity and as providers of liquidity to the financial system. Principal insurance contracts available, and basic operation of insurance markets including terminology (eg broking, underwriting, reinsurance). The role of foreign exchange markets in facilitating international trade and in determining the exchange rate.
(2)
(3)
(4)
9 10 10 10 9 15
xiv
Introduction
Effect of exchange rates on the international competitiveness of firms (including elementary foreign exchange translation calculations). Credit and foreign exchange risks of international trading firms and the use of letters of credit, export credit guarantees and exchange rate hedging to manage these risks. Influences on exchange rates: interest rates, inflation rates, trade balance, currency speculation. Governmental and international policies on exchange rates (ie exchange rate management, fixed and floating rate systems, single currency zones) and the implications of these policies for international business.
15 15 15 15
Indicative syllabus content (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) National Income Accounting identity and the three approaches to calculation and presentation of national income (Output, Expenditure and Income). Interpretation of national income accounting information for purposes of time series or cross-sectional evaluation of economic performance. The circular flow of income and the main injections and withdrawals. Illustration of changes to equilibrium level of national income using aggregate demand and supply analysis. Government macroeconomic policy goals (low unemployment, inflation, external equilibrium and growth) and the effects on business of the government's pursuit of these.
Introduction
xv
Types and consequences of unemployment, inflation and balance of payments deficits. The trade cycle and the implications for unemployment, inflation and trade balance of each stage (recession, depression, recovery, boom). Government policy for each stage of the business cycle and the implications of each policy for business. The central government budget and forms of direct and indirect taxation. Incidence of taxation (progressive, regressive) and potential impact of high taxation on incentives and avoidance. Fiscal, monetary and supply side policies, including relative merits of each. Layout of balance of payments accounts and the causes and effects of fundamental imbalances in the balance of payments. Arguments for and against free trade and policies to encourage free trade (eg bilateral trade agreements, multi-lateral agreements, free trade areas, economic communities and economic unions), and protectionist instruments (tariffs, quotas, administrative controls, embargoes). Principal institutions encouraging international trade (eg WTO/GATT, EU, G8). Nature of globalisation and factors driving it (eg improved communications, political realignments, growth of global industries and institutions, cost differentials). Impacts of globalisation (eg industrial relocation, emergence of growth markets, enhanced competition, cross-national business alliances and mergers, widening economic divisions between countries) Role of major institutions (eg World Bank, International Monetary Fund, European Bank) in fostering international development and economic stabilisation.
13, 16 12 12, 14 14
14 16 16
16 16 16
(16)
16
xvi
Introduction
The assessment
Format of computer-based assessment (CBA)
The CBA will not be divided into sections. There will be a total of seventy five objective test questions and you will need to answer ALL of them in the time allowed, 2 hours. Frequently asked questions about CBA Q A What are the main advantages of CBA? Q A Assessments can be offered on a continuing basis rather than at six-monthly intervals Instant feedback is provided for candidates by displaying their results on the computer screen
CBA must be taken at a 'CIMA Accredited CBA Centre'. For further information on CBA, you can email CIMA at cba@cimaglobal.com.
Q A
How does CBA work? Questions are displayed on a monitor Candidates enter their answers directly onto a computer Candidates have 2 hours to complete the Fundamentals of Financial Accounting examination The computer automatically marks the candidate's answers when the candidate has completed the examination Candidates are provided with some indicative feedback on areas of weakness if the candidate is unsuccessful
Your assessment will consist entirely of a number of different types of objective test question. Here are some possible examples. MCQs. Read through the information on page (xix) about MCQs and how to tackle them. Data entry. This type of OT requires you to provide figures such as the correct figure for payables in a statement of financial position. Multiple response. These questions provide you with a number of options and you have to identify those which fulfil certain criteria.
This text provides you with plenty of opportunities to practise these various question types. You will find OTs within each chapter in the text and the Quick quizzes at the end of each chapter are full of them. The Question Bank contains more than one hundred and twenty objective test questions similar to the ones that you are likely to meet in your CBA. Further information relating to OTs is given on page (xx).
Introduction
xvii
The Practice and Revision Kit for this paper was published in December 2009 and is full of OTs, providing you with vital revision opportunities for the fundamental techniques and skills you will require in the assessment. BPP Learning Medias MCQ Cards were also published in February 2010 and provide you with 100 MCQs to practice on, covering the whole syllabus.
xviii
Introduction
The correct answer is B. The MCQs in your assessment contain four possible answers. You have to choose the option that best answers the question. The three incorrect options are called distracters. There is a skill in answering MCQs quickly and correctly. By practising MCQs you can develop this skill, giving you a better chance of passing the exam. You may wish to follow the approach outlined below, or you may prefer to adapt it.
Skim read all the MCQs and identify what appear to be the easier questions. Attempt each question starting with the easier questions identified in Step 1. Read the question thoroughly. You may prefer to work out the answer before looking at the options, or you may prefer to look at the options at the beginning. Adopt the method that works best for you. Read the four options and see if one matches your own answer. Be careful with numerical questions, as the distracters are designed to match answers that incorporate common errors. Check that your calculation is correct. Have you followed the requirement exactly? Have you included every stage of the calculation? You may find that none of the options matches your answer. Re-read the question to ensure that you understand it and are answering the requirement. Eliminate any obviously wrong answers. Consider which of the remaining answers is the most likely to be correct and select the option.
Step 4
Step 5 Step 6
If you are still unsure make a note and continue to the next question. Revisit unanswered questions. When you come back to a question after a break you often find you are able to answer it correctly straight away. If you are still unsure have a guess. You are not penalised for incorrect answers, so never leave a question unanswered!
Assessment focus. After extensive practice and revision of MCQs, you may find that you recognise a question when you sit the exam. Be aware that the detail and/or requirement may be different. If the question seems familiar read the requirement and options carefully do not assume that it is identical.
BPP Learning Media's i-Pass for this paper provides you with plenty of opportunity for further practice of MCQs.
Introduction
xix
Examples of OTs are included within each chapter, in the quick quizzes at the end of each chapter and in the objective test question bank. BPP Learning Media's i-Pass for this paper provides you with plenty of opportunity for further practice of OTs.
xx
Introduction
International terminology
Your Fundamentals of Business Economics assessment will use international accounting terms and this text is written in international accounting terms as defined in IAS 1. It is a good idea to start now getting used to these terms, so the table below provides a list of UK terms with their international equivalents. UK term Profit and loss account Profit and loss reserve (in balance sheet) Balance sheet Turnover Debtor account Debtors (eg debtors have increased) Debtor Creditor account Creditors (eg creditors have increased) Creditor Debtors control account Creditors control account Stock Fixed asset Long term liability Provision (eg for depreciation) Nominal ledger VAT Debentures Preference shares/dividends Cash flow statement International term Income statement (statement of comprehensive income) Accumulated profits Statement of financial position Revenue Account receivable Receivables Customer Account payable Payables Supplier Receivables control account Payables control account Inventory Non-current asset (generally). Tangible fixed assets are also referred to as property, plant and equipment. Non-current liability Allowance (you will sometimes see provision used too). General ledger Sales tax Loan notes Preferred shares/dividends Statement of cash flows
Introduction
xxi
xxii
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Syllabus references
Ability required
Economics is concerned with how choices are made about the use of resources: what should be produced and who should consume it. The need to make such decisions arises because economic resources are scarce. Making decisions involves the sacrifice of benefits that could have been obtained from using resources in an alternative course of action. This sacrifice is known as the opportunity cost of an activity.
Both the basic assumption of rationality and the more detailed assumptions may be challenged. In particular, we will look again later at the assumption that businesses always seek to maximise their profits. A further complication is that concepts such as utility and welfare are not only open to interpretation, but also that the interpretation will change over time. The way in which the choices about resource allocation are made, the way value is measured, and the forms of ownership of economic wealth will also vary according to the type of economic system that exists in a society. (a) In a centrally planned (or command) economy, the decisions and choices about resource allocation are made by the government. Monetary values are attached to resources and to goods and services, but it is the government that decides what resources should be used, how much should be paid for them, what goods should be made and, in turn, what their price should be. This approach is based on the theory that only the government can make fair and proper provision for all members of society. In a free market economy, the decisions and choices about resource allocation are left to market forces of supply and demand, and the workings of the price mechanism. This approach is based on the observable fact that it generates more wealth in total than the command approach. In a mixed economy the decisions and choices are made partly by free market forces of supply and demand, and partly by government decisions. Economic wealth is divided between the private sector and the public sector. This approach attempts to combine the efficiency of the market system with the centrally planned systems approach to fair and proper distribution.
(b)
(c)
In practice, the industrialised countries in the developed world have mixed economies, although with differing proportions of free market and centrally planned decision-making from one country to the next. In such economies, the government influences economic activity in a variety of ways and for a variety of purposes. (a) (b) (c) Direct control over macroeconomic forces can be exercised through policy on tax, spending and interest rates. Taxes, subsidies and direct controls can affect the relative prices of goods and services. Government-owned institutions such as the UKs National Health Service (NHS) can provide goods and services directly, free or at low cost at the point of consumption.
(d) (e)
Regulation can be used to restrict or prevent the supply of goods and services. Incomes can be influenced through the tax and welfare systems.
Key terms
Microeconomics is the study of individual economic units; these are called households and firms. Macroeconomics is the study of the aggregated effects of the decisions of economic units. It looks at a complete national economy, or the international economic system as a whole.
(b)
This idea of scarcity is very important in economics, because it reminds us that producers and consumers have to make choices about what to produce or to buy. In the case of producers, we can identify four types of resource, which are known as factors of production. Each of these factors of production has an associated reward which accrues to its owner when it is used. (a) Land is rewarded with rent. Although it is easy to think of land as property, the economic definition of land is much broader than this. Land consists not only of property (the land element only: buildings are capital) but also all the natural resources that grow on the land or that are extracted from it, such as timber and coal. Labour is rewarded with wages (including salaries). Labour consists of both the mental and the physical resources of human beings. Labour productivity can be improved through training, or by applying capital in the form of machinery. Capital is rewarded with interest. It is easy to think of capital as financial resources, and the rate of interest as the price mechanism in balancing the supply and demand for money. However, capital in an economic sense is not 'money in the bank'. Rather, it refers to man-made items such as plant, machinery and tools which are used to aid the production of other goods and services. As we noted above, buildings such as factories are capital items. Enterprise, or entrepreneurship, is the fourth of factor of production. An entrepreneur is someone who undertakes the task of organising the other three factors of production in a business enterprise, and in doing so, bears the risk of the venture. The entrepreneur creates new business ventures and the reward for the risk associated with this is profit.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Key terms
Scarcity is the excess of human wants over what can actually be produced. A scarce resource is a resource for which the quantity demanded at a nil price would exceed the available supply. Since resources for production are scarce and there are not enough goods and services to satisfy the total potential demand, choices must be made. Choice is only necessary because resources are scarce.
Consumers must choose what goods and services they will buy. Producers must choose how to use their available resources, and what to produce with them. What will be produced? What will be consumed? And who will benefit from the consumption?
Making choices about how to use scarce resources is the fundamental problem of economics.
A4
A2
A5 A3
A1
Quantity of A
Figure 1 Production possibility curve The curve from A1 round to B1 in Figure 1 shows the maximum of all the various combinations of A and B that a society can make, given current technology, if it uses its limited resources efficiently. (a) The society can choose to make up to: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (b) A1 units of A and none of B B1 units of B and none of A A2 units of A and B2 of B (point P on the curve) A3 units of A and B3 of B (point Q on the curve)
The combination of A4 units of A and B4 units of B (plotted at point X) is inside the production possibility curve. This illustrates that more than these quantities can be made of either, or both, of A and B. Point X is therefore an inefficient production point for the economy, and if the society were to make only A4 of A and B4 of B, it would be using its limited resources inefficiently. Note that the production possibility curve is just what it says: it defines what is achievable if all productive resources are fully employed. It follows that changes in the level of unemployment have no effect upon it,
(c)
because the curve represents the position where all labour resources are employed (ie there is no unemployment). Similarly, changes in price levels will affect the monetary value of what can be produced, but not the volume, so they do not affect the curve either. (d) The curve is normally drawn concave to the origin.
Question Answer
What can you say about the combination of A and B indicated by point Y in Figure 1?
Point Y lies outside the production possibility curve. Even with efficient use of resources it is impossible to produce this combination of A and B. To reach point Y, either current resources must be increased or production methods must be improved perhaps by developments in technology.
The production possibility curve is an important idea in economics: it illustrates the need to make choices about what to produce, because it is not possible to have everything.
1.4 Opportunity cost: the cost of one use for resources rather than another
Choice involves sacrifice. If there is a choice between having A and having B, and a country chooses to have A, it will be giving up B to have A. The cost of having a certain amount of A can therefore be regarded as the sacrifice of not being able to have the corresponding amount of B. There is a sacrifice involved in the choices of consumers and firms (producers), as well as the choices of governments at the level of national economy.
Key terms
The cost of an item measured in terms of the alternatives forgone is called its opportunity cost. A production possibility curve illustrates opportunity costs. For example, if in Figure 1 it is decided to switch from making A3 units of A and B3 units of B (point Q) to making A2 units of A and B2 units of B (point P), then the opportunity cost of making (B2 B3) more units of B would be the lost production of (A3 A2) units of A. The production possibility line is a concave curve and not a straight line because some resources are more useful for making A than for making B, and vice versa. As a result, opportunity costs change as we move away from a situation in which production is wholly devoted to either A or B. Thus, as we move away from point A1, and introduce an increasing level of production of B, the amount of B that we gain from losing each unit of A progressively diminishes. At the level of the firm, the production possibility curve can be seen as showing the maximum output of different goods a firm can produce when all of its resources are fully used. For example, a firm might operate production lines capable of producing washing machines or refrigerators; producing more washing machines bears the opportunity cost of a lower level of production of refrigerators.
Chapter roundup
Economics is concerned with how choices are made about the use of resources: what should be produced and who should consume it. The need to make such decisions arises because economic resources are scarce. Making decisions involves the sacrifice of benefits that could have been obtained from using resources in an alternative course of action. This sacrifice is known as the opportunity cost of an activity.
Quick quiz
1 2 3 What is the essential feature of a command economy? Macroeconomics is the study of economic units such as households and firms. True or false? Which of the following is not recognised as a factor of production? A B C D 4 Capital Management Land Labour
The cost of an item measured in terms of the resources used is called its opportunity cost. True or false?
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers 12
Page 425
Topic list 1 Organisations 2 The objectives of firms 3 Corporate governance 4 Shareholders interest 5 Measuring sh areholder wealth
Syllabus references A (1), A (6) A (1) A (7), A (8) A (1) A (4), A (5)
1 Organisations
FAST FORWARD
Various types of organisation are found in the mixed economy. The economy can be divided into the public and private sectors. The public sector contains a range of organisations that provide public services and may also include some state-owned businesses. The private sector includes both profit-seeking businesses and non-profitmaking organisations such as charities, and mutuals.
10
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
(b)
In the UK, there are two forms of limited liability company. They both limit the liability of investors to the nominal value of their share holdings; however, they differ in the extent to which they are permitted to solicit investment from the general public. Private limited companies may not offer their securities to the public; a public limited company (plc) may. When the shares of plcs are regularly bought and sold on a stock exchange, they may be referred to as quoted companies, because the current price of their shares will be quoted in a journal of record.
Remember that not all public limited companies are quoted companies. Note carefully the confusing terminology here: public limited companies are owned by private investors (shareholders); they are not part of the public sector.
11
the skill of their leaders in negotiation, the current state of the public finances overall and the current economic climate. Alongside public sector organisations there are also quasi autonomous non-governmental organisations (QUANGOs), which are private organisations independent of the government but to which governments have devolved the authority for running public services. Examples in the UK include the Environment Agency, Regional Development Agencies, and regulators such as Ofcom.
Although it is convenient for economists to assume that profit maximisation is the central objective of firms, we should not overlook the fact that in reality the motives of managers may operate to serve alternative goals.
12
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
Where the management of a business is separated from its ownership by the employment of professional managers, the managers may be considered to be the agents of the owners. Agency theory is concerned to analyse the way agents may be expected to behave and how they can be motivated to promote their principals' interest. In fact, few large businesses are managed by their owners. In the case of larger companies, there are large numbers of shareholders, and they are unlikely to wish to take part in the management of the company, viewing it simply as a vehicle for investment. Even where ownership is concentrated, large companies tend to be managed mostly by professional managers who have little ownership interest, if any. This separation of ownership from control has arisen for several reasons. (a) Limited liability structure does not give shareholders power to manage the company (unless they are also managers); their influence normally extends only to proposing and voting on resolutions at company meetings. It is impracticable for a large number of shareholders to exercise managerial powers jointly; to be effective, power must be concentrated. Many shareholders are not interested in being managers, and are content to employ professional managers, so long as their investment prospers. Many organisations are so large or complex, or deal with such advanced technology, that they can only be managed effectively by well-qualified professionals.
Separation of ownership from control has been a feature of business for over a century and brings with it a recurring problem: the business should be managed so as to promote the economic interest of the shareholders as a body, but the power to manage lies in the hands of people who may use it to promote their own interests. How can the managers be made to favour the interest of the owners rather than their own?
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
13
This problem is not confined to the management of companies: it is the general problem of the agency relationship and occurs whenever one person (the principal) gives another (the agent) power to deal with his affairs. This separation of ownership from control is known as a principal-agent problem.
It has been suggested that price and output decisions will be taken by managers with managerial objectives in mind. Rather than seeking to maximise profits, managers may choose to achieve a satisfactory profit for a firm: this is called satisficing. Satisficing is also a common managerial response when there are multiple objectives, such as boosting share price, and achieving revenue growth. Similarly, if directors' remuneration schemes are based on criteria such as growth or corporate social responsibility, then they are unlikely to make the maximisation of profit their sole objective.
14
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
3 Corporate governance
Key term
Corporate governance is the systems by which companies and other organisations are directed and controlled. CIMA Official Terminology
Organisations are not autonomous; they are governed and controlled to serve some external purpose. All managers have a duty of faithful service to the external purpose of the organisation. As the agents of its owners, a company's managers are collectively responsible for the conduct of its affairs. This is true of organisations generally, whatever their nature and whether or not they seek profit. There is a chain of authority and accountability that runs hierarchically up and down the organisation. Junior managers are accountable to more senior ones and so on up the chain until the most senior managers are reached. The question then arises: who are these senior managers accountable to for the activities of the organisation as a whole? As a matter of principle, we can say that there should be some external entity on behalf of which the most senior managers control the organisation and to which they are accountable.
Question
Who are the senior managers of the following organisations and to whom are they accountable? (a) (b) (c) A charity The government of a democracy A trade union
Accountability
Answer
(a) The senior management of a charity is likely to be similar in nature to the board of a company, consisting of heads of departments (such as fundraising and operations) together with some non-executive directors. Their collective responsibility is likely to be to subscription-paying members of the institution assembled in a general meeting, where these exist, or possibly to a supervisory board, or even to a court of law. In any event, the actions of the managers in dealing with the interests of those the charity is intended to benefit will be the main concern. The senior management of a democratic government is called the Cabinet and, again, consists of senior politicians with functional and advisory roles. The external body to which it is responsible is the electorate
(b)
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
15
(the members of the public), who have the power collectively to expel the government from office and install a completely different one. (c) The senior management of a trade union will consist of senior executives and, depending on its constitution, is likely to be responsible to the membership of the union. The extent of this responsibility will depend on local law and tradition and may be discharged for example, through postal ballots or, less satisfactorily, through mass meetings.
In a company, although the shareholders own the company, the responsibility for directing and controlling the company rests largely with the board of directors. The respective power and key responsibilities of shareholders and directors are summarised in the table below. Shareholders Appoint the directors Board of directors Determine the strategy of the company Oversee the management of the company and its performance in achieving strategy and objectives Report to shareholders on the performance of the company Appoint the auditors Assure themselves that the system of corporate governance is appropriate and effective Ensure suitable internal controls are in place and the company complies with laws and regulations.
16
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
3.5 Stakeholders
FAST FORWARD
The stakeholder view holds that there are many groups in society with an interest in the organisation's activities. Stakeholders can be divided into internal, connected and external groups. The organisation's response to their priorities can be analysed according to their power (or influence) and their interest. Stakeholders are persons or groups that have a legitimate interest in a business's conduct and whose concerns should be addressed as a matter of principle. Many stakeholder groups have influence over they way in which organisations are managed and operate. They can therefore be fundamental to corporate governance.
Key terms
Stakeholders are those persons and organisations that have an interest in the strategy and behaviour of an organisation. CIMA Official Terminology There are three broad types of stakeholder in an organisation. Internal stakeholders such as employees and management Connected stakeholders such as shareholders, customers, suppliers and financiers External stakeholders such as the community, government and pressure groups
Connected
Shareholders
Customers
Suppliers
External
Community
Government
Pressure groups
The extent to which external stakeholders are recognised is linked to the size of the organisation, in that the policies and actions of larger organisations are more likely to be of interest to national governments and even international bodies than are those of smaller organisations. Stakeholders may also be analysed into those who have a formal contractual relationship with the organisation and those who do not. These two groups are called primary and secondary stakeholders. Internal and connected stakeholders fall into the primary category, therefore, while external stakeholders equate to secondary stakeholders. Mendelow classified stakeholders on a matrix whose axes are power (or influence) the stakeholder can exert and degree of interest the stakeholder has in the organisation's activities. These factors will help define the type of relationship the organisation should seek with its stakeholders.
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
17
Key players are found in segment D: any strategy the organisation wants to adopt must be acceptable to them, at least. An example would be a major customer. Key stakeholders may participate in decisionmaking. Stakeholders in segment C must be treated with care. While often passive, they are capable of moving to segment D. They should, therefore be kept satisfied. Large institutional shareholders might fall into segment C. Stakeholders in segment B do not have great ability to influence strategy, but their views can be important in influencing more powerful stakeholders, perhaps by lobbying. They should therefore be kept informed. Community representatives and charities might fall into segment B. Minimal effort is expended on segment A. An example might be a contractor's labour force.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Internal stakeholder groups are likely to have both more influence and more interest than external groups. Coalitions of stakeholder groups are likely to have more influence than single stakeholders or small uniform groups.
(b)
These two stakeholder groups are likely to be very vocal if disappointed. They are fundamental to operations and are able to disrupt them if they wish to, simply by walking away. It is important that they are not disappointed or aggrieved. In general, we may discern three areas in which stakeholders exercise influence in non-profit organisations.
18
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
(a) (b)
Objectives and goals are not based on profit, so there is scope for stakeholders to influence what the organisation sets out to do. Strategies cannot be aimed simply at profitability, so it can be developed to achieve other ends, such as effectiveness and economy. Many non-profit organisations will demand a particularly high standard of conduct in ethical terms. Management style and practices, particularly those elements that relate to the management of people, are highly likely to be of interest to some stakeholder groups.
(c)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
A number of reports have been produced in various countries aiming to address the risk and problems posed by poor corporate governance. There were three significant corporate governance reports in the United Kingdom during the 1990s. The Cadbury and Hampel reports covered general corporate governance issues, whilst the Greenbury report concentrated on remuneration of directors. The recommendations of these three reports were merged into a Combined Code in 1998, with subsequent updates, with which companies listed on the London Stock Exchange are required to comply. Though mostly discussed in relation to large quoted companies, governance is an issue for all bodies corporate; commercial and not for profit.
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
19
An increasing number of high profile corporate scandals and collapses at the start of the 1990s, including Polly Peck International, BCCI, and Maxwell Communications Corporation prompted the development of governance codes in the 1990s. However, scandals since then, such as Parmalat and Enron, have raised questions about further measures that may be necessary. These high profile cases have highlighted the need for guidance to tackle the various risks and problems that can arise in organisations' systems of governance.
20
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
3.9.2 Performance
Performance should improve if accountabilities are made clear and directors' motivation is enhanced by performance-related remuneration. Also, the extra breadth of experience brought by non-executive directors, and measures to prevent domination by a single powerful figure, should improve the quality of decision-making at board level.
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
21
22
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
Audit committees and auditors There should be formal and clear arrangements with the company's auditors, and for applying the financial reporting and internal control principles. Companies should have an audit committee consisting of non-executive directors, the majority of whom should be independent. The audit committee should review the audit, and the independence and objectivity of the auditors. In particular the committee should keep matters under review if the auditors supply significant non-audit services.
4 Shareholders' interest
FAST FORWARD
Investors invest in companies by buying their shares. The companies are expected to maximise the wealth of their shareholders by generating profit from trading operations. Investors will only provide funds if they believe that the prospective returns are adequate.
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
23
The senior managers of a quoted company are under pressure to maintain and, if possible, improve current profit performance, while, at the same time, continuing to invest for the future. Shareholders are assumed to monitor the performance of the companies they invest in and are likely to sell their shares in companies that underperform in order to invest in companies that seem to be performing more satisfactorily. If a large number of shareholders decide to dispose of their shares, the market forces of supply and demand (which are dealt with later in this Study Text) will cause the share price to fall to a level that reflects its performance and prospects. Conversely, the same forces will tend to drive up the price of shares in a company that is seen to be outperforming its rivals.
24
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
Shareholders need objective measures of company performance if they are to make sensible investment decisions. Short-term measures include ROCE, EPS and P/E figures. ROCE and EPS are straightforward measures of current achievement; P/E number, however, reflects the market's view of the share's future prospects. Shareholders need some objective measures of company performance so that they can make informed investment decisions. These measures can be divided into those suitable for the shorter term and those suitable for the longer term. In this context, the limit of the shorter term may be taken to be the issue of the next set of financial statements.
Profit before interest and tax, or profit from operations, is profit available for all holders of capital (shares and loans). Capital employed is defined as total assets less current liabilities. ROCE can also be defined as return on net assets.
Return on net assets
Operating profit (before interest and tax) 100 Total assets minus current liabilities
Note that interest is deducted as a cost when accounts are prepared so, to calculate PBIT from a set of accounts, you would have to add back to profit before tax the amount of any interest paid. Total assets and current
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
25
liabilities are shown as such on balance sheets prepared in accordance with international standards, so you should have no difficulty in arriving at the figure for capital employed. This sum should be equal to equity plus the nominal value of any outstanding loans.
Solution
20X9 20X8
247,011 751,969
ROCE
= =
360,245 988,899
36.4%
32.8%
This exercise illustrates a common use of measures such as ROCE: the making of comparisons between one year and another. We cannot really comment on the size of Snoxall plc's ROCE unless we know something about what is normal for its industry, but we can definitely say that it has improved between 20X8 and 20X9.
In the simple example above, we have calculated individual capital employed figures for each year. However, in your assessment, if you are asked to calculate ROCE and you are given two years' worth of capital employed figures, you should use an average capital employed figure for the later year. So, based on the figures from our example above, ROCE for 20X9 would be calculated as: PBIT = $360,245 Capital employed: average of $751,969 and $988,899 = $870,434 ROCE =
$360,245 = 41.4% $870,434
EPS is usually calculated as the profit available to equity shareholders divided by the number of equity shares in issue. Note that a company is likely to have far more shares authorised than issued; it is the number of shares actually issued to shareholders that we are interested in here. The total number of shares in the authorised share capital is not relevant here.
26
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
EPS =
Profit after tax and preference dividends Number of equity shares in issue
Here, because we are interested in the equity shareholders' point of view, we take the profit after interest and tax payments and we also deduct any dividends due to preference shareholders, who are regarded for this purpose as having more in common with lenders than with equity shareholders.
Solution
EPS is $59,000 = 73.75 cents 80,000
In practice, there are usually further complications in calculating the EPS, but fortunately these are outside your syllabus for this subject. However, be aware that the EPS ratio is also used in another ratio which can be used to assess the performance of a company the P/E ratio.
Key term
ROCE and EPS are simple measures of current performance. However, P/E differs in concept from ROCE and EPS in that it looks into the future. The P/E ratio is interesting in that it reflects shareholder opinion about company prospects because it shows, in effect, the number of years' worth of earnings from a share that would be needed to make up the price of buying a share. A high P/E number indicates that investors are content with a relatively low current return from the share. This is usually because they anticipate that their return will improve substantially in the future, possibly as a result of emerging opportunities or new and impressive products. A high P/E ratio shows that the market is confident about the future prospects of the company.
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
27
Earnings yield =
The dividend valuation model discounts expected future dividends to relate the cost of equity to market share price. ROCE and EPS are both based on historical accounting information. As a result, their usefulness is greatest as measures of how a company has performed in the recent past. We can expect that they will also give us a reasonable idea of how the company is doing in the current accounting period, but their relevance to the more distant future is limited. P/E number incorporates some information about investors' view of the future, but, again, is most relevant to the nearer term. Unfortunately, no-one has the ability to predict the future with any great degree of accuracy, so thinking about longer-term investment takes a different course. For the past, we could reasonably ask whether the company has actually satisfied its shareholder's requirements; for the future, we ask what it will have to do in order to satisfy them in the longer term. The requirements themselves are neatly encapsulated in the phrase cost of capital'.
Key term
Capital overall includes shares of all kinds and borrowings, and establishing a valid overall cost of capital is a difficult task that will form part of your continuing CIMA studies all the way to the Strategic level. Here we are only concerned with equity capital and thus with the rather simpler concept of the cost of equity. This represents the equity shareholders' requirements for the performance of their investments. It is widely accepted that the current price of a quoted company's shares reflects the future income to which shareholders are entitled to. There are two ways to measure this (a) The first is to base future income on expected future dividends, these being the actual cash disbursements that a company makes to its shareholders. When considering whether or not to buy shares in a company, potential investors assess what they expect the future performance of that company to be. One aspect of this will be the dividend income the investors will receive in the future as a result of holding shares in the company. The second concept (which is more complex and will be covered in section 5.4 below) is to base the valuation on the free cash flow to equity.
(b)
We will look first at a model based on expected future dividends, which allows for the way that companies tend to use their reserves to smooth dividend payments over time, averaging out the good years with the bad. We assume that a constant dividend will be paid each year into the indefinite future. This dividend valuation model shows the
28
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
relationship between the current share price, the cost of equity (the shareholders' required return, remember) and the size of the dividend expected each year. Rational investors will only buy a share if its cost is less than, or equal to, the value of the expected future dividends. To calculate this future value, future dividends must be discounted at a rate equivalent to the investor's cost of equity. If we assume that dividends are constant throughout the life of the company then the share price is expressed by the formula shown below: P0 =
d d d d d + + + ..... = , so ke = P0 (1+ k e ) (1+ k )2 (1+ k )3 ke e e
where ke d P0
is the shareholders' required return is the annual dividend per share, starting at year 1 and then continuing annually in perpetuity. is the ex-dividend share price (the price of a share where the share's new owner is not entitled to the dividend that is soon to be paid).
A more realistic assumption is that dividends, rather than being the same throughout the life of the company, will d actually grow at a constant rate. In this case the share price is P0 = , with g' being the dividend growth rate. ke g
Key terms
Cum dividend or 'cum div' means the purchaser of shares is entitled to receive the next dividend payment. Ex dividend or 'ex div' means that the purchaser of shares is not entitled to receive the next dividend payment. If you have already studied the Business Mathematics syllabus (as recommended by CIMA), you will recognise this formula as being based on the process of discounting and very similar to that for the present value of a perpetuity.
Formulae
Cost of equity share capital, paying an annual dividend d in perpetuity, and having a current ex div price P0: ke = d P0 d +g P0
Solution
With earnings of $20 million and a 25% payout rate, total dividends = 20 million/4 = $5 million With one million shares in issue, dividend per share = $5 million/1 million = $5 and market price per share = $50 million/1 million = $50 Therefore, using the formula ke =
d P0
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
29
The valuations based on discounting forecast free cash flows also relate the cost of equity to market share price. Some companies do not pay dividends: Microsoft, for example, paid no dividends until 2003. In this case, we cannot use dividends to look at the future income shareholders will be entitled to. Instead, models based on earnings need to be used. There are several such models, but for the purposes of the C4 syllabus we are interested in a simple model based on discounting the free cash flows. Once again, it is important for your consideration of the discounted cash flow model that you are familiar with the basic process of discounting as explained in your BPP C3 Business Mathematics Study Text. However, here is a brief review of discounting.
5.4.1 Discounting
The time value of money means that $100 income received in one year's time is worth less in real terms to an investor than $100 received now. In order to make rational decisions about where to invest their money, investors need to adjust for the differences in the real value of income generated at different time periods in the future. They can do this by discounting future income streams to convert them to their net present value. In other words, the value of the future flow of income must be reduced (discounted) to reflect the lower real value of income being received in future compared to the same amount being received now. The future earnings are discounted by applying a discount rate to them. The discount rate (or discount factor) is calculated as: Discount factor = =
1 (1 + r) t
Where r = the rate of discount t = time (years) The figures for discount factors can be found on the present value tables which are provided by CIMA. (Note: these are rounded to 3 decimal places.) The appropriate discount rate to use will depend on the specific circumstances of a calculation, but it is likely to be the interest rate or the cost of capital. The discount rate will have an inverse relationship to the future value of the income stream. That is, the higher the discount rate, the lower the future value of the income stream, and vice versa. When a discount rate has been applied to a stream of future earnings, the adjusted cash flows are known as the discounted cash flow (DCF). The formula to calculate the discounted value of a cash inflow to be received at a future date is: Discounted value = Nominal value of the cash flow (1 + r)t
Where r' is the discount rate, and t' is the year (time) when the inflow is received. So if $1,000 is to be received for each of the next three years, and the discount rate is 10%, the calculation of the discounted cash flow will be as follows.
30
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
Year 2 1,000
Year 3 1,000
Total
(1.1)2 = 826
= 909
The discounted cash flows for the three years are $909, $826 and $751 respectively. The present value of the earnings is then obtained by adding together all the discounted cash flows. In this case the NPV would be $2,486. The present value of the earnings that an investment project is expected to generate can be compared to the cost of the investment to see the overall net present value (NPV) of the project. If the NPV is positive the project should be regarded as cash generating and allowed to proceed. So, for example, let's say an investment of $2,000 was required to generate these discounted cash flows of $2,486, the net present value of the project would be $2,486 $2,000 = $486 positive.
Key term
The free cash flow to the firm (FCFF) is the after tax cash generated by the business and available for distribution to the equity holders and debt holders of the company. It is calculated in its simplest form from the Profit before interest and tax (PBIT) by adding back non-cash items such as depreciation and subtracting taxes and capital expenditure, ie FCFF = PBIT + DEPRECIATION TAX CAPITAL EXPENDITURE.
Key term
The free cash flow to equity (FCFE) represents the potential income that could be distributed to the equity holders of a company, as opposed to dividends which measures the actual cash disbursements to shareholders. The free cash flow to equity (FCFE) is calculated in the same way as free cash flow to the firm (FCFF) except that interest payments due to debt holders have to be deducted as FCFE = FCFF INTEREST PAYMENTS TO DEBT HOLDERS.
5.4.3 Example
The following information is available on a company. PBIT Interest Expenses Taxes Capital Expenditure 5,000,000 500,000 1,000,000 300,000
The free cash flow to the firm (FCFF) is FCFF = PBIT Taxes Capital Expenditure = 5,000,000 1,000,000 300,000 = 3,700,000 The free cash flow to equity (FCFE) is FCFE = FCFF Interest Expenses = 3,700,000 500,000 = 3,200,000
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
31
If we know what the equity shareholders' required rate of return is, we can use it as a discount rate to find the value of the company. Conversely, in principle, if we know the current market value of the company's shares and its forecast free cash flows, we can use this information to estimate the shareholders' required rate of return. However, this computation is outside your syllabus.
The company has 2,400,000 ordinary shares in issue. The equity shareholders require a rate of return on their investment of 17%. What should the company's current market value and ordinary share price be?
Solution
Year
1 2 3
The current market value on this basis is the sum of the present value column above, which is $17, 413,290. Dividing this figure by 2,400,000 (the number of shares in issue) will give us the current ordinary share price: this is $7.26.
Your syllabus requires you to be able to carry out both types of valuation calculation illustrated above.
5.6 The interaction between cash flows, required return and market value
FAST FORWARD
An increase in forecast dividends or free cash flows will lead to an increase in current market price, as will a reduction in the cost of equity. In both the dividend valuation and free cash flow models, we have a relationship between three quantities. (a) (b) (c) The investors' required rate of return (the cost of equity) Expected future cash flows (either FCFE or dividends payable) The current market value of the company's shares
It is important that you appreciate this simple relationship: the current market value is determined by the other two factors. The dynamics of the relationship are simple. (a) (b) If the expected cash flows increase, predictably enough, the current market value will increase and vice versa. Changes in the immediate future will have a larger effect than those in the more distant future. An increase in the cost of equity will reduce the current market value and vice versa. We can demonstrate this effect by recomputing Flo plc's current value assuming that investors have increased their required return to 20%.
32
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
Year
1 2 3
The current market value is now $16,581,570. Actually, examination of the discount factors themselves [1/(1 + r)t] will demonstrate the basic principle involved. The higher the discount rate is, the smaller the discount factors are and so, logically, the smaller are the present values of the discounted cash flows. As a result of the relationship outlined above, we can forecast with confidence that if either the forecast future cash flows change or the cost of equity changes, current market value must change in consequence. Current market value is, by definition, something that exists in the present. However, the cash flows are, again by definition, things that do not yet exist: they are expected future events. The rate of return required by investors is a feature of the present but is determined by investors' assessments of both current and expected future factors such as risk and the returns likely to be available elsewhere.
Question
Tekel plc's directors have increased their forecast profit after tax from $20 million to $24 million each year. Tekel will continue to pay out 25% of its earnings as a dividend. The current rate of return to ordinary shareholders is 10%.
Required
Explain the effect this is likely to have on the market value of the company's shares.
Answer
The profit forecast has increased by one fifth. If the directors retain their 25% dividend policy, cash payments to shareholders should also increase by one fifth. Current investors' desired rate of return is 10%: the forecast increase in profits is unlikely to alter this immediately, so their perception of the market value of the company is also likely to increase by one fifth. Using the formula ke =
d , if ke remains the same and d increases by 20%, P0 must also increase by 20%. P0
In practical terms, Tekel plc's shares will become more attractive to investors with capital to invest and demand for them will increase. Existing investors, knowing that the profit forecast has been increased, will only sell at a price that reflects the company's improved prospects.
Question
Flo plc has for many years been involved in dangerous and speculative activities involving prospecting for radioactive ores in politically unstable parts of the world. The company's directors have stated that the company effectively ceased its participation in these activities at the end of the end of the last accounting period; the funds released have been invested in a portfolio of commercial properties in European capital cities. Remarkably, the net effect of this change on forecast profits is zero.
Required
Explain the effect this change is likely to have on the market value of the company's shares.
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
33
Answer
The effect of this change in business focus is a significant reduction in the riskiness of Flo plc's activities overall. This should have the effect of reducing the cost of equity, since investors no longer need high returns to compensate them for a high level of risk. Since the forecast cash flows are unchanged, but the cost of equity has fallen, we would expect the market value of Flo plc's shares to rise. In practical market terms, Flo plc has become a much more attractive investment, offering high returns at low risk. Demand will increase, but the current owners of the shares will be reluctant to sell at the existing market price. Increased demand will drive the price up to a point at which the current investors are prepared to sell.
34
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
Chapter roundup
Various types of organisation are found in the mixed economy. The economy can be divided into the public and private sectors. The public sector contains a range of organisations that provide public services and may also include some state-owned businesses. The private sector includes both profit-seeking businesses and non-profitmaking organisations such as charities, and mutuals. Although it is convenient for economists to assume that profit maximisation is the central objective of firms, we should not overlook the fact that in reality the motives of managers may operate to serve alternative goals. Where the management of a business is separated from its ownership by the employment of professional managers, the managers may be considered to be the agents of the owners. Agency theory is concerned to analyse the way agents may be expected to behave and how they can be motivated to promote their principals' interest. Organisations are not autonomous; they are governed and controlled to serve some external purpose. All managers have a duty of faithful service to the external purpose of the organisation. The stakeholder view holds that there are many groups in society with an interest in the organisation's activities. Stakeholders can be divided into internal, connected and external groups. The organisation's response to their priorities can be analysed according to their power (or influence) and their interest. A number of reports have been produced in various countries aiming to address the risk and problems posed by poor corporate governance. There were three significant corporate governance reports in the United Kingdom during the 1990s. The Cadbury and Hampel reports covered general corporate governance issues, whilst the Greenbury report concentrated on remuneration of directors. The recommendations of these three reports were merged into a Combined Code in 1998, with which companies listed on the London Stock Exchange are required to comply.
Investors invest in companies by buying their shares. The companies are expected to maximise the wealth of their shareholders by generating profit from trading operations. Investors will only provide funds if they believe that the prospective returns are adequate. Shareholders need objective measures of company performance if they are to make sensible investment decisions. Short-term measures include ROCE, EPS and P/E figures. ROCE and EPS are straightforward measures of current achievement; P/E number, however, reflects the market's view of the share's future prospects. The dividend valuation model discounts expected future dividends to relate the cost of equity to market share price. The valuations based on discounting forecast free cash flows also relate the cost of equity to market share price. An increase in forecast dividends or free cash flows will lead to an increase in current market price, as will a reduction in the cost of equity.
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
35
Quick quiz
1 Who proposed a model of business based on the objective of maximising sales? A B C D 2 3 Drucker Williamson Ansoff Baumol
What does the term 'stakeholders' mean? Which one of the following is not a stakeholder for a mutual organisation? A B C D Customers Staff Shareholders Directors
4 5 6
What is the formula for return on capital employed? What is the formula for earnings per share? Megalith plc has authorised share capital of 25,000,000 preference shares and 100,000,000 ordinary shares. Profit before tax was $27, 800,000. Tax payable is $6,900,000 and preference dividend payable is $1,900,000. The company has 95,000,000 ordinary shares in issue, with a market price of $2.85 and 24,500,000 preference shares in issue, with a market price of $1.15. What is Megalith plc's P/E number? A B C D 12.95 14.25 15.00 13.64
The present value of Megalith's forecast future cash flows is now $267 million. What will happen to this value if Megalith plc's cost of equity rises? A B C D It will rise It will fall It will remain the same It is impossible to say
What is the name of the process through which future income streams are given a present value?
36
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
4 5 6
ROCE EPS B
If you thought the answer was 15.00, you have used the number of shares authorised rather than the number issued. If you thought the answer was 12.95, you have included the preference dividend in your earnings figure. If you thought the answer was 13.64, you have made both of these mistakes. 7 8 B It will fall. The cost of equity is the discount rate for this calculation. An increase in the discount rate used for a present value calculation will inevitably produce a fall in the present value computed.
Discounting.
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
37
425
Part A The goals and decisions of organisations 2: Economic systems and organisations
37
38
2: Economic systems and organisations Part A The goals and decisions of organisations
Theory of costs
Introduction
In this chapter we will be looking at the costs of production for an individual firm, and how these are affected by both short run and long run factors. We contrast the concept of opportunity cost (which we introduced in Chapter 1), with financial cost as seen from the accountant's point of view. The aggregate amount of goods supplied by every individual firm adds up to the market supply. By studying an individual firm we are looking at the 'building blocks' of market supply. However, we will also look at how individual firms look to grow in order to benefit from cost savings and efficiencies.
Topic list 1 Costs of production 2 Average co sts, marginal costs and diminishing returns 3 Economies of scale and lon g run costs 4 Growth of firms
39
1 Costs of production
Although we have identified that there are a range of organisations with differing objectives, we will focus now on organisations which seek to make a profit. It is widely accepted that this will enable us to give a useful explanation of the way firms behave. The basic condition for profitability is very simple: overall revenues must exceed overall costs.
Key terms
Profit is equal to total revenue minus total cost of any level of output. In order to understand how firms go about seeking profit, therefore, we must examine the ways in which costs and revenues arise. We will start by considering the costs incurred by a firm that makes and sells goods, and will define some key concepts about costs in economics.
A firm's output decisions can be examined in the short run, (when some factors of production are fixed) and in the long run, (when all factors of production can be varied). Total costs can be divided into fixed and variable elements. These elements have different effects on total cost as output is increased. Production is carried out by firms using the factors of production which must be paid or rewarded for their use. The cost of production is the cost of the factors used. Factor of production Land Labour Capital Enterprise Its cost Rent Wages Interest Normal profit
Notice that normal profit is viewed as a cost. This may seem odd to an accountant, who thinks of profit as the excess of revenues over cost, but normal profit is the amount of profit necessary to keep an entrepreneur in his or her present activity. In other words, normal profit is the opportunity cost of preventing the entrepreneur investing elsewhere. Any profit earned in excess of this normal profit is known as supernormal, abnormal, or excess profit. Whether a firm can maintain these profits in the long run will depend on the nature of the industry it is operating in. We will return to this point later in this Study Text when we look at the differences between perfect competition and monopoly.
Key term
The short run is a time period in which the amount of at least one factor of production (land, labour, capital or enterprise) is fixed. The long run is a period sufficiently long to allow full flexibility in all the factors of production used.
can all be increased or decreased. Decisions in the long run are therefore subject to fewer restrictions about resource availability. Inputs are variable at the decision of management. For example, management might decide to buy more raw materials, hire more labour, start overtime working and so on. (a) Labour is usually considered to be variable in the short run. Inputs which are treated as fixed in the short run are likely to include capital items, such as buildings and machinery, for which a significant lead time might be needed before their quantities are changed. There could also be constraints around technology which could limit the productivity of other factors of production. All inputs are variable in the long run. A decision to change the quantity of an input variable which is fixed in the short run will involve a change in the scale of production.
(b)
1.3 Short run costs: total costs, average costs and marginal costs
Let us now turn our attention to short run costs. Note that in economics the 'short run' is not a time period which can be measured in days or months. The key determinant of a time period being 'short' is that at least one factor of production is fixed.
Key terms
Total cost (TC). Total cost is the cost of all the resources needed to produce a given level of output. Total cost comprises total fixed cost (TFC) and total variable cost (TVC) Fixed costs are costs which do not change when levels of production change, for example, the rent of premises. Variable costs are costs which change according to the level of output, for example, raw material costs. Average cost (AC). Average cost for a given level of output is the total cost divided by the total quantity produced. Average cost is made up of an average fixed cost per unit plus an average variable cost per unit. AC =
TC TFC TVC = + N N N
AC = AFC + AVC
Average fixed cost per unit (AFC) total fixed costs divided by the number of units will get smaller as the number of units produced (N) increases. This is because TFC is the same amount regardless of the volume of output, so as N gets bigger, AFC must get smaller. Average variable costs per unit (AVC) total variable costs divided by the number of units will also change as output volume increases, but may rise as well as fall.
Marginal cost (MC). This is the extra cost (incremental cost) of producing one more unit of output. For example, the marginal cost for a firm of producing the 50th unit of output is the total cost of making 50 units minus the total cost of making the first 49 units.
Question
Costs
To test your understanding of these concepts, look at the three definitions given below. Which one(s) of them, if any, correctly describes the marginal cost of producing one extra unit of output? (a) (b) MC = increase in total cost of production MC = increase in variable cost of production
41
(c)
Answer
(a) and (b) are correct; (c) is incorrect. An example might help. Suppose a firm has made 100 units of output, and now goes on to produce one more. The costs might be as follows.
Cost of 100 units $ 200 100 300 Cost of 101 units $ 202 100 302
Total variable cost Total fixed cost Total cost Average cost Marginal cost = $302 $300 = $2.
$3.00
$2.99
Because fixed costs have not changed, the marginal cost is both the increase in the total cost of production and the increase in the variable cost of production.
Figure 1 shows how the various elements of cost vary as output changes.
Costs MC
AC AFC AVC
AFC Output
The diagram in figure 1 is a very important diagram in economics. Make sure you know what each of the curves is, and what it represents.
42
Here is an illustration of the relationship between the different definitions of the firm's costs. (The figures used are hypothetical.)
Units of output n Fixed costs FC $ 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 Variable costs VC $ 0.30 0.80 0.95 1.20 1.70 2.32 3.19 4.32 5.50 7.20 Total cost TC $ 1.10 1.60 1.75 2.00 2.50 3.12 3.99 5.12 6.30 8.00 Average cost AC $ 1.10 0.80 0.58 0.50 0.50 0.52 0.57 0.64 0.70 0.80 Marginal cost MC $ 1.10 0.50 0.15 0.25 0.50 0.62 0.87 1.13 1.18 1.70
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)
(1.60 1.10) (1.75 1.60) (2.00 1.75) (2.50 2.00) (3.12 2.50) (3.99 3.12) (5.12 3.99) (6.30 5.12) (8.00 6.30)
Total cost is the sum of capital costs (fixed costs) plus labour costs (variable costs), since these are the only two inputs in this example. Average cost is the cost per unit of output, ie AC =
(b)
(c)
TC TC = n output
Marginal cost is the total cost of producing n units minus the total cost of producing one less unit, ie (n 1) units. Total cost. Total costs of production carry on rising as more and more units are produced. Average cost. AC changes as output increases. It starts by falling, reaches a lowest level, and then starts rising again. Marginal cost. The MC of each extra unit of output also changes with each unit produced. It too starts by falling, fairly quickly reaches a lowest level, and then starts rising. AC and MC compared. At lowest levels of output, MC is less than AC. At highest levels of output, though, MC is higher than AC. There is a 'cross-over' point, where MC is exactly equal to AC. In this example, it is at 5 units of output.
Note the following points on this set of figures. (a) (b) (c) (d)
Economic costs are different from accounting costs, and represent the opportunity costs of the factors of production that are used.
As we have already mentioned, to an economist cost includes an amount for normal profit which is the reward for entrepreneurship. Normal profit is the opportunity cost of entrepreneurship. The opportunity cost of entrepreneurship is the amount of profit that an entrepreneur could earn elsewhere and so must be forgone to undertake the current project. In this situation, normal profit is the profit the entrepreneur must earn to persuade him to keep on with his investment in his current enterprise. If he could earn more by undertaking a different enterprise, as a rational decision-maker he will choose to invest in the other enterprise instead. A further feature of cost accounting is that costs can be divided into fixed costs and variable costs. Total fixed costs per period are a given amount, regardless of the volume of production and sales. Cost accountants usually
43
assume that the variable cost per unit is a constant amount, so that the total variable cost of sales is directly proportional to the volume of sales. Economists do not take this approach. In the short run, there are fixed costs and variable costs, but the variable cost of making an extra unit of output need not be the same for each extra unit that is made. As a result, the marginal cost of each extra unit is not constant, either.
Accounting profits consist of sales revenue minus the explicit costs of the business. Explicit costs are those which are clearly stated and recorded, for example:
Materials costs prices paid to suppliers Labour costs wages paid Depreciation costs on non-current assets Other expenses, such as rates and building rental
Economic profit consists of sales revenue minus both the explicit costs and the implicit costs of the business. Implicit costs are benefits forgone by not using the factors of production in their next most profitable way (opportunity costs).
It is a well established principle in accounting and economics that relevant costs for decision-making purposes are future costs incurred as a consequence of the decision. Past or 'sunk' costs are not relevant to our decisions now, because we cannot change them: they have already been incurred. Relevant future costs are the opportunity costs of the input resources to be used.
But suppose the buildings he uses in his business could have been put to another use to earn $15,000, and his own labour as business manager could get him a job with a salary of $20,000. The position of the business in economic terms would be as follows. $ Sales less explicit costs 25,000 Implicit costs ($15,000 + $20,000) (35,000) Loss (10,000) In economic terms, the business has made a loss. It would pay the trader to put his buildings and capital to the alternative use, and employ his own labour another way, working for someone else at a salary of $20,000.
Question
Wilbur Proffit set up his business one year ago. In that time, his firm has earned total revenue of $160,000, and incurred costs of $125,000, including his own salary of $12,000. Before, he had been a salaried employee of Dead End Ventures, earning an annual salary of $20,000.
44
To finance the business, Wilbur had to sell his investment of $200,000 in government securities which earned interest of 10% pa. He used $80,000 of this to buy a warehouse, whose annual commercial rental value would be $11,000 pa. The remaining $120,000 has been used to finance business operations.
Required
Calculate:
The accounting profit earned by Wilbur in the last year The economic profit or loss earned
Answer
Accounting profit
$ 160,000 125,000 35,000 $ 125,000 8,000 11,000 12,000 156,000 4,000 $ 160,000
Revenue Accounting costs Opportunity cost of owner's time extra salary forgone from alternative employment (20,000 12,000) Rental of factory (opportunity cost of $80,000) Opportunity cost of other capital tied up in the business (10% of $120,000) Economic profit
If the cost of producing one extra unit of a good is different to the current average cost, it will cause the average cost to change.
(b) (c)
In our example in Section 1.4 of this chapter, the average cost schedule rises from six units of output onwards and MC is bigger than AC at all these levels of output (6 10 units).
When the average cost curve is falling, marginal cost lies below it. This follows similar logic. If the cost of making an extra unit is less than the average cost of making all the previous units, the effect of making the extra unit must be a reduction in average unit cost. In our example in Section 1.4, this happens between production of one and four units. 45
(d)
When the average cost curve is horizontal, marginal cost is equal to it. In our example in Section 1.4, when there are five units of output, the average cost stays at $0.50 and the marginal cost of the fifth unit is also $0.50.
The relationship between marginal costs and average costs means that the marginal cost curve always cuts through the average cost curve at the lowest point of the average cost curve (see Figure 1 earlier).
Question
(a) (b)
Cost curves
It is possible for the average total cost curve to be falling while the average variable cost curve is rising. True or false? Marginal fixed costs per unit will fall as output increases. True or false?
Answer
(a) True. Average total cost (AC) comprises average fixed cost (AFC) and average variable cost (AVC). AFC falls as output rises, and the fall may be sufficient to outweigh a possible increase in AVC. In such a case, AC will fall while AVC rises. False. It is average fixed costs per unit that fall as output increases. Marginal fixed costs = 0, because fixed costs do not change when one extra unit of output is produced.
(b)
A firm's short run average cost (SRAC) curve is U shaped, due to diminishing returns beyond a certain output level.
The short run average cost curve (AC in Figure 1) is U shaped. We now consider why. Fixed costs per unit of output, ie average fixed costs, will fall as the level of output rises. Thus, if fixed costs are $20,000 and we make 10,000 units, the average fixed cost (AFC) will be $2 per unit. If output increases to 12,500 units the AFC will fall to $1.60 (20,000 12,500) and if output increases to 15,000 units, the AFC will fall again to $1.33 (20,000 15,000), and so on. Spreading fixed costs over a larger amount of output is a major reason why short run average costs per unit fall as output increases. Variable costs are made up from the cost of the factors of production whose use can be varied in the short run for example wages, fuel and raw material purchases. Total variable costs therefore vary with output in the short run as well as in the long run.
(a)
The accountant's assumption about short run variable costs is that up to a certain level of output, the variable cost per unit is more or less constant (eg wages costs and materials costs per unit of output are unchanged). If the average fixed cost per unit is falling as output rises, and the average variable cost per unit is constant, it follows that the average total cost per unit will also be falling as output increases. However, there are other reasons for the initial fall in average total cost. The first is the effects of the division of labour and specialisation. Imagine a small but fully equipped factory, with a variety of machinery and equipment and a workforce of, say, ten. If each person attempts to perform all the operations on a single item, production is likely to be low. (i) They will be unable to develop a high level of skill at every one of the jobs
(b)
46
Time will be lost as they move from machine to machine Individual variability will produce a high rate of defects, perhaps with each person tending to produce different faults Individuals will work at different rates on different operations: as a result, queues will form at some machines and others will be under-utilised
If there is a degree of specialisation, expertise and speed will rise, machines will be run at optimum rates and output will rise. Average costs will therefore fall. (c)
The second reason is the utilisation of indivisibilities. If a machine has an output capacity of 100 units per day but is only used to produce 50 units per day, the machinery cost of each of those 50 units will be twice the level it would be if the machine was used to capacity. Operation of a plant below normal output is uneconomical, so there are cost savings as production is increased up to capacity level.
In this example, diminishing returns set in once the fourth worker is employed (because the marginal output of adding a fourth worker (6) is lower than the marginal output from adding a third worker (7)). However, total output continues to rise as workers four to seven are added, and only starts to fall when the eighth worker is added.
47
Figure 2 U shaped short run cost curve and the relationship of AC to MC in the short run
Remember that the law of diminishing returns is a short run phenomenon; at least one factor of production is fixed. The law of diminishing returns is expressed in production quantities, but it obviously has direct implications for short run average and marginal costs. Resources cost money, and the average and marginal costs of output will depend on the quantities of resources needed to produce the given output. In our simple example earlier, the marginal output from adding an extra worker increased for workers 13, perhaps because adding extra workers means that each worker can now specialise in specific tasks. This increasing productivity means it will cost less to produce an extra unit of output, therefore the marginal cost of producing an extra unit of output falls. However, once diminishing returns set in, the marginal cost of producing an additional extra unit of output will increase, because trying to add extra workers will now have proportionally less impact on output: for example, because the factory may be getting over-crowded and workers are having to wait for machines to become available for them to use. A firm operates at maximum efficiency when average cost is at its minimum (output Z on Figure 2 above). Remember, this optimum output point (the bottom point of the AC cost curve) is always found where the marginal cost curve intersects the average cost curve.
48
Question
Total output volume
Diminishing returns
Number employed
In the diagram above, from what level of employment do diminishing returns start to occur?
Answer
Diminishing returns occur when the marginal physical product of extra units of labour starts to decline. This begins to happen at output W, when the rate of increase in total output starts to decline as numbers employed continue to increase. Note this is a theory of diminishing marginal returns, it does not relate to a decline in total output.
Once all the factors of production become variable, a firm's short run average cost (SRAC) curve can be shifted, and a firm's minimum achievable average costs at any level of output can be depicted by a long run average cost (LRAC) curve.
These two direct consequences then also generate a third difference between the short run and the long run. Because all inputs are variable in the long run, the problems associated with the diminishing returns for variable
49
factors constrained by fixed factors of production do not arise. In other words, the law of diminishing returns applies only to short run costs. However, whereas short run output decisions are concerned with diminishing returns, long run output decisions are concerned with economies of scale. Output will vary with variations in inputs, such as labour and capital. (a) (b) If output increases in the same proportion as inputs (for example doubling all inputs doubles output) there are said to be constant returns to scale. If output increases more than in proportion to inputs (for example doubling all inputs trebles output) there are beneficial economies of scale. Economies of scale mean that the long run average costs of production will continue to fall as the volume of output rises. If output increases less than proportionally to inputs (for example trebling all inputs only doubles output) there are said to be diseconomies of scale. Diseconomies of scale mean that the long run average costs of production will rise as output volume rises.
(c)
Returns to scale are, for example, concerned with improvements or declines in productivity by increasing the scale of production, for example by mass-producing instead of producing in small batch quantities.
1 2 3 4
In the real world, the duplication of all inputs might be impossible if one incorporates qualitative as well as quantitative characteristics in inputs. One such input is entrepreneurship. Doubling the size of the firm does not necessarily double the inputs of organisational and managerial skills, even if the firm does hire extra managers and directors. The input of entrepreneurship might be intangible and indivisible.
The effect of economies of scale is to shift the whole cost structure downwards and to the right on a graph showing costs and output. A long run average cost curve (LRAC) can be drawn as the 'envelope' of all the short run average cost curves (SRAC) of firms producing on different scales of output. Each SRAC shows a different scale of production and, once diminishing returns start to occur, the firm varies its factors of production thereby shifting the SRAC to a new position. The LRAC is tangential to each of the SRAC curves. Figure 3 shows the shape of such a long run average cost curve if there are increasing returns to scale economies of scale up to a certain output volume and then constant returns to scale thereafter.
50
The shape of the LRAC depends on whether there are increasing, constant or decreasing returns to scale. Even if increasing returns to scale are not achievable indefinitely as output rises, up to a certain minimum efficient scale of production (MES) there will be increasing returns to scale. Firms will reduce their average costs by producing on a larger scale up to the MES.
51
A firm should try to minimise its average costs in the long run, and to do this it ought to try to produce output on a scale where the LRAC curve is at its lowest point. This indicates its minimum efficient scale of production (MES). While there are economies of scale, a firm should always be trying to grow until it reaches its minimum efficient scale of production. If a firm is suffering diseconomies of scale, in theory it should look to reduce production levels, or seek a more efficient combination of its factors of production.
52
Equally, large firms can also employ specialist staff in IT, HR, accountancy etc and their skills can be fully utilised in their specialist areas.
Question
The above list of sources of economies of scale is not exhaustive. Can you add to it?
Economies of scale
Answer
(a) (b) (c) (d) Large firms attract better quality employees if the employees see better career prospects than in a small firm. Specialisation of labour applies to management, and there are thus managerial economies; the cost per unit of management will fall as output rises.
Marketing economies are available, because a firm can make more effective use of advertising, specialist salesmen, and specialised channels of distribution.
Large companies are able to devote more resources to research and development (R & D). In an industry where R & D is essential for survival, large companies are more likely to prosper.
53
(b)
External economies of scale are potentially significant to smaller firms who specialise in the ancillary services to a larger industry. For example, the development of a large world-wide industry in drilling for oil and natural gas off-shore has led to the creation of many new specialist supplier firms, making drilling rigs, and various types of equipment. Thus, a specialist firm may benefit more from the market demand created by a large customer industry than from its own internal economies of scale.
A firm may also experience technical diseconomies of scale. For example, increasing the size of the plant and equipment may create large administrative overheads thereby increasing total average costs, even though the direct production cost itself is lowered. These are all internal diseconomies of scale. However, there may also be external diseconomies of scale which affect all firms in an industry as the industry grows. For example, if a natural resource such as oil or gas is overused then shortages may result. In turn, this would increase the average cost of production. The implication of diseconomies of scale is that companies should achieve a certain size to benefit fully from scale economies, but should not become too big, because if they do cost controls might slacken and organisational inefficiency may be likely to result.
54
Question Answer
Explain in detail the difference between diminishing returns and economies of scale.
Diminishing returns. In the short run, some factors of production are fixed, and some are variable. This means that although a firm can increase the volume of its output in the short run, it can only do so within the constraint of having some fixed factors. As a result, the short run average cost curve is U shaped, because of increasing and then diminishing marginal returns. Diminishing marginal returns occur within a given production capacity limit. Economies of scale. In the long run, all factors of production are variable and so a firm can increase the scale of its output without any constraints of fixed factors. By increasing output capacity in this way, a firm might be able to reduce its unit costs, for example by mass-producing with bigger and more efficient machines or with more specialised machines. These cost reductions are economies of scale.
55
4 Growth of firms
FAST FORWARD
Firms seek to grow in order to improve their relationship with their owners and to achieve economies of scale. If there are significant economies of scale to be earned, there is a strong argument in favour of growth by firms. The two methods of growth are organic and by mergers and acquisitions. Growth may take the form of vertical or horizontal integration or conglomerate diversification.
(b)
Key terms
Horizontal integration. When two firms in the same business merge, there is horizontal integration. Horizontal integration tends to create monopolies. For example, if All-England Chocolate Co with a 15% share of the UK chocolate market were to merge with British Choc Co which has a 20% share of the UK market, the enlarged company might expect to hold a 35% share of the market. Vertical integration. Two firms operating at different stages in the production and selling process might merge. When they do, vertical integration occurs. For example a company which operates exclusively in oil refining might take over an oil shipping company, and perhaps an oil extraction company too. This would be backward vertical integration, moving back through stages in production towards the raw material growing/extracting stage. The same company might take over a company with a distribution fleet of petrol tanker lorries, and perhaps a chain of petrol stations too. This would be forward vertical integration: integrating forward through stages in production and selling towards the end consumer sales stage. Conglomerate diversification. A company might take over or merge with another company in a completely different business altogether. This form of merger is diversification, and a group of diversified companies is referred to as a conglomerate organisation.
56
The advantages and disadvantages of these different types of business expansion are summarised in the table below.
Horizontal expansion or integration Advantages Disadvantages
57
Economies of scale in finance and administration. Expertise can be shared across areas which would
previously have been unconnected.
Often a four or five-firm concentration ratio is used, and this shows the percentage market share of the four (or five) largest firms in the industry. For example, if an industry has total annual sales of $100m, and the four largest firms in the industry have annual sales $25m, $22m, $17m and $15m respectively, the fourfirm concentration is 79%. The market concentration ratio may also assist in determining the market form of the industry. Market forms can be classified by the concentration ratio. In ascending order of their concentration ratio they would be: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Perfect competition (a larger number of small firms share the market) Monopolistic competition Oligopoly Duopoly Monopoly (a single firm supplies the whole market)
We will look at all of these market structures in more detail in Chapter 7a and 7b of this Study Text.
58
Small firms have certain advantages over large firms which may outweigh economies of scale. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Since they are small, they are more likely to operate in competitive markets, in which prices will tend to be lower and the most efficient firms will survive at the expense of the inefficient. They are more likely to be risk takers, investing 'venture capital' in projects which might yield high rewards. Innovation and entrepreneurial activity are important ingredients for economic recovery or growth.
Management-employee relations are more likely to be co-operative, with direct personal contacts between managers at the top and all their employees.
Small firms tend to specialise, and so contribute efficiently towards the division of labour in an economy. The structure of a small firm may allow for greater flexibility (eg an employee or manager can switch from one task to another much more readily). There is also likely to be less bureaucracy in small firms compared to larger firms. So, small firms may be able to respond to opportunities more quickly than larger firms. Small firms often sell to a local market; large firms need wider markets, and may incur relatively higher costs of transport.
Managerial economies can be obtained by hiring expert consultants, possibly at a cheaper cost than having to employ permanent management specialists.
Some small firms act as suppliers or sub-contractors to larger firms. Market demand may be insufficient to justify large scale production.
The growth of the internet has also helped provide new opportunities for small firms. Through the internet, small firms can reach a much wider potential customer base than they were able to through direct selling alone. For example, an online retailer has a much wider potential customer base than a retailer who has a single high street shop.
59
Chapter roundup
A firm's output decisions can be examined in the short run, (when some factors of production are fixed), and in the long run, (when all factors of production can be varied). Total costs can be divided into fixed and variable elements. These elements have different effects on total cost as output is increased.
Economic costs are different from accounting costs, and represent the opportunity costs of the factors of production that are used.
If the cost of producing one extra unit of a good is different to the current average cost, it will cause the average cost to change. A firm's short run average cost (SRAC) curve is U shaped, due to diminishing returns beyond a certain output level. Once all the factors of production become variable, a firm's short run average cost (SRAC) curve can be shifted, and a firm's minimum achievable average costs at any level of output can be depicted by a long run average cost (LRAC) curve. The shape of the LRAC depends on whether there are increasing, constant or decreasing returns to scale. Even if increasing returns to scale are not achievable indefinitely as output rises, up to a certain minimum efficient scale of production (MES) there will be increasing returns to scale. Firms will reduce their average costs by producing on a larger scale up to the MES. Firms seek to grow in order to improve their relationship with their owners and to achieve economies of scale. If there are significant economies of scale to be earned, there is a strong argument in favour of growth by firms. The main methods of growth are organic and by mergers and acquisitions. Growth may take the form of vertical or horizontal integration or conglomerate diversification.
60
Quick quiz
1 2 3 4 Explain the distinction between short run and long run costs. What is the law of diminishing returns? Why might there be diseconomies of scale? Which of the following is an example of an external economy of scale? A B C D 5 Increased wage costs due to falling unemployment in the region. The employment of specialist managers by a firm to cope with higher output levels. The extension of low-cost telecommunication links to an area of the country not previously served by such links. Cheaper finance in recognition of the firm's increased share of the market and therefore its stability.
Which of the following cannot be true? In the short run, as output falls: A B C D Average variable costs falls Average total cost falls Average fixed cost falls Marginal costs falls
The tendency for unit costs to fall as output increases in the short run is due to the operation of: A B C D Economies of scale The experience of diminishing marginal returns Falling marginal revenue Increasing marginal returns
7 8
What is technical efficiency? Harold Ippoli employs 30 people in his factory which manufactures sweets and puddings. He pays them $5 per hour and they all work maximum hours. To employ one more person he would have to raise the wage rate to $5.50 per hour. If all other costs remain constant, the marginal cost of labour is: A B C D $20.50 $15.00 $5.50 $0.50
Which of the statements below best defines the difference between the short run and the long run? A B C D Labour costs are fixed in the short run and variable in the long run. Economies of scale are present in the long run but not in the short run. At least one factor of production is fixed in the short run but in the long run it is possible to vary them all. None of the factors of production is fixed in the short run
10
Which of the following is NOT true? A B C D A firm will carry on producing in the short run provided that price at least equals average variable cost A firm will carry on producing in the short run provided that price at least equals average fixed cost A firm will carry on producing in the short run provided that total revenue at least equals total variable cost A firm will stop producing in the long run if total revenue is less than total cost
61
Note that by increasing the wage for the 31st person to $5.50 per hour, the employer also had to increase the wage for the existing 30 people to $5.50 per hour. 9 10 C B A firm will carry on producing in the short run provided total revenue at least equals total variable cost, and is therefore making a contribution towards fixed costs (so C is true). If total revenue must at least equal total variable cost, price (average revenue) must at least equal average variable cost (so A is true). In the long run, if total revenue is less than total cost, the firm is not making a normal profit and so will stop producing.
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
8 13
426
62
63
64
Introduction
The distinction between the microeconomic level and the macroeconomic level was mentioned in Chapter 1. In this chapter, we look in more depth at the microeconomic level of the individual firm, individual markets and consumers (or households). This means looking at what influences the amount of a product which is demanded or supplied and analysing how price and output are determined through the interaction of demand and supply. We start by examining the concept of a market which, in economics, goes beyond the idea of a single geographical place where people meet to buy and sell goods.
Topic list 1 The concept of a market 2 The demand schedule 3 The supply schedule 4 The equilibrium price 5 Demand an d supply analysis 6 Maximum and minimum prices
65
In a free market, the price mechanism signals demand and supply conditions to producers and consumers. It therefore determines the activities of both producers and consumers, influencing the levels of demand for and the supply of goods.
Key term
A market can be defined as a situation in which potential buyers and potential sellers (suppliers) of a good or service come together for the purpose of exchange. Suppliers and potential suppliers are referred to in economics as firms. The potential purchasers of consumer goods are known as households. However, some markets have buyers who are other firms or government authorities. For example, a manufacturing firm buys raw materials and components to go into the products that it makes. Service industries and government departments must similarly buy in supplies in order to do their own work. The demand for goods by firms and government authorities is a derived demand in that it depends on the demand from households for the goods and services that they produce and provide. Markets for different goods or commodities are often inter-related. All commodities compete for households' income so that if more is spent in one market, there will be less to spend in other markets. Further, if markets for similar goods are separated geographically, there will be some price differential at which it will be worthwhile for the consumer to buy in the lower price market and pay shipping costs, rather than buy in a geographically nearer market.
66
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
1.3 Utility
Utility is the word used to describe the pleasure or satisfaction or benefit derived by a person from the consumption of goods. Total utility is the total satisfaction that people derive from spending their income and consuming goods. Marginal utility is the satisfaction gained from consuming one additional unit of a good or the satisfaction forgone by consuming one unit less. If someone eats six apples and then eats a seventh, total utility refers to the satisfaction he derives from all seven apples together, while marginal utility refers to the additional satisfaction from eating the seventh apple, having already eaten six. The idea that consuming one extra unit of a good affords less satisfaction or benefit than was afforded from consuming the previous unit is known as diminishing marginal utility. The concepts of utility and diminishing marginal utility are very important in determining how consumers choose to spend their limited incomes.
Acting rationally means that the consumer attempts to maximise the total utility attainable with a limited income. When the consumer decides to buy another unit of a good he is deciding that its marginal utility exceeds the marginal utility that would be yielded by any alternative use of the price he pays. If a person has maximised his total utility, it follows that he has allocated his expenditure in such a way that the utility gained from spending the last penny spent on each good will be equal. If we recall the basic idea behind the fundamental economic problem how to maximise the benefit available from scarce resources we can see that the idea of utility is very important to this. Consider the following example. Mr Smith enjoys going to the cinema, but also going to the theatre. Cinema tickets cost 10 while theatre tickets cost 20. He doesnt want to spend more than 100 in total on cinema and theatre trips. He has estimated that the marginal utility he gets from each trip is as follows: Trip number 1 2 3 4 Cinema 95 80 65 50 Theatre 220 210 190 160
Marginal utility To do this we need to consider for both types of trip, because Mr Smiths utility is maximised at Cost
Marginal utility of cinema trips Marginal utility of theatre trips the point where = . Price of cinema trips Price of theatre trips
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
67
Theatre Trip 1: 220 / 20 = 11 Trip 2: 210 / 20 = 10.5 Trip 3; 190 / 20 = 9.5 Trip 4: 160 / 20 = 8
Utility is maximised by having two cinema trips and four theatre trips, because the marginal utility divided by the price is 8 for both of them at this point, and the total cost of 100 (20 for cinema trips and 80 for theatre trips). However, it is important to check the total cost of the options suggested. In this example we are trying to calculate how consumers can most effectively allocate expenditure to maximise their utility. However, we must remember the fundamental point that consumers have limited income, so any choices they make are constrained by the amount of income available. (In our example, the limit was the 100 budget allowance Mr Smith gave himself for the trips). The idea of utility also plays an important role in determining demand for a good or service. We are now going to look at demand and supply in turn, before considering how they interact through the price mechanism.
The demand schedule shows how much of a good consumers are willing and able to purchase at any given price. The position of the demand curve is determined by the demand conditions, which include consumers' tastes and preferences, and consumers' incomes.
Demand might be satisfied, and so actual quantities bought would equal demand. On the other hand, some demand might be unsatisfied, with the number of would-be purchasers trying to buy a good being too great for the supply of that good. In which case, demand is said to exceed supply. The phrase 'willing and able to buy' in the key term above is very important. Demand does not mean the quantity that potential purchasers wish they could buy. For example, a million households might wish that they owned a luxury yacht, but only one hundred households might actually be able to buy a luxury yacht at its given price. In this case, economic demand is one hundred, not one million. Economic demand needs to be effective. That is, it must be supported by available money (ie willing and able to buy), rather than just being a general desire for goods or services.
68
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
Price per kg $ 1 2 3 4 5 6
Notice that we show demand falling as price increases. This is what normally happens with most goods. This is because purchasers have a limited amount of money to spend and must choose between goods that compete for their attention. When the price of one good rises, it is likely that other goods will seem relatively more attractive and so demand will switch away from the more expensive good to the cheaper alternative. So the shape of the demand curve is determined by the consumer acting rationally; with demand tending to be higher at a low price, and lower at a high price for most goods and services. We can show this schedule graphically, with price on the 'y' axis and quantity demanded on the 'x' axis. If we assume that there is complete divisibility, so that price and quantity can both change in infinitely small steps, we can draw a demand curve by joining the points represented in the schedule by a continuous line (Figure 1). This is the household's demand curve for biscuits in the particular market we are looking at.
Price ($) A 6
5 4 3
G 2
1 0
1 C
8 F
10
Quantity (kg)
The area of each rectangle in Figure 1 represents consumers' total money outlay at the price in question. For example, at a price of $6, demand would be 1 kilogram and total spending would be $6, represented by rectangle ABCO. Similarly, at a price of $2, demand would be 8 kilograms and the total spending of $16 is represented by rectangle GEFO.
Sketching demand and/or supply curves may be a useful way of analysing an assessment question. In Figure 1, the demand curve happens to be a straight line. Straight line demand curves are often used as an illustration in economics because it is convenient to draw them this way. In reality, a demand curve is more likely to be a curved line convex to the origin. As you will be able to appreciate, such a demand curve means that there
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
69
are progressively larger increases in quantity demanded as price falls (Figure 2).This happens because of the fall in marginal utility experienced as consumption of a good increases.
Price ($) 6 5 4 3 2 1
9 10 Quantity (kg)
Question
Demand curve
Refer to Figure 2. The price of the commodity is currently $3 per kilo, and demand is approximately 4 kilograms at that price. What would be the (approximate) demand for the commodity if the price fell to $2 per kilo? And what would be the demand if the price rose to $4 per kilo?
Answer
Demand rises to (approximately) 6 kilos at the reduced price of $2 per kilo. If price rises to $4 per kilo, demand falls to (approximately) 3 kilos.
Note that changes in demand caused by changes in price are represented by movements along the demand curve, from one point to another. These changes in quantity demanded in response to a change in price are called expansions or contractions in demand. The price has changed, and the quantity demanded changes (prompting a movement along the curve), but the demand curve itself remains the same.
70
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
sloping downwards from left to right but with quantities demanded (total market demand) being higher at each price level. A demand curve generally slopes down from left to right. (a) (b) As we saw earlier, the curve is downward sloping because progressively larger quantities are demanded as price falls. A fall in the good's price means that it becomes cheaper both in relation to the household's income and also in relation to other (substitute) products. Therefore the overall size of the market for the good increases. The converse argument applies to an increase in prices; the size of the market will shrink as the good becomes more expensive.
Several factors influence the total market demand for a good. One of these factors is obviously its price, but there are other factors too, and to help you to appreciate some of these other factors, you need to recognise that households buy not just one good with their money but a whole range of goods and services.
Factors determining demand for a good
The price of the good The size of households' income (income effect) The price of other substitute goods (substitution effect) Tastes and fashion Expectations of future price changes The distribution of income among households.
The income effect reflects the impact of a price change on consumers' income. If the price of a good falls, all other things being equal, consumers become better off as their real income has increased. Therefore they can afford to buy more of the good, following its fall in price. The income effect can also be reinforced by the substitution effect. The substitution effect occurs when consumers buy more of one good and less of another good because of relative price changes between the two goods. For example, if two types of bread are considered substitutes, the price of bread 1 falls relative to the price of bread 2, then consumers will buy more of 1 than 2: they substitute bread 1 for bread 2. A demand curve shows how the quantity demanded will change in response to a change in price provided that all other conditions affecting demand are unchanged that is, provided that there is no change in the prices of other goods, tastes, expectations or the distribution of household income. (This assumption that 'all other things remain equal' is referred to as ceteris paribus.) Make sure you remember this point about a movement along the demand curve reflecting a change in price when other factors are unchanged. We will return to it later to examine what happens to the demand curve when the other conditions affecting demand are changed.
A change in the price of one good will not necessarily change the demand for another good. For example, we would not expect an increase in the price of televisions to affect the demand for bread. However, there are goods
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
71
for which the market demand is inter-connected. These inter-related goods are referred to as either substitutes or complements.
Examples of substitute goods and services
Rival brands of the same commodity, like Coca-Cola and Pepsi-Cola Tea and coffee Some different forms of entertainment
Substitution takes place when the price of one good rises relative to a substitute good. By contrast, complements are connected in the sense that demand for one is likely to lead to demand for the other.
Examples of complements
Cups and saucers Bread and butter Motor cars and the components and raw materials that go into their manufacture
Question
What might be the effect of an increase in the ownership of domestic deep freezers on the demand for perishable food products?
Answer
(a) (b) Domestic deep freezers and perishable products are complements because people buy deep freezers to store perishable products. Perishable products are supplied either as fresh produce (for example, fresh meat and fresh vegetables) or as frozen produce, which can be kept for a short time in a refrigerator but for longer in a freezer. The demand for frozen produce will rise, while the demand for fresh produce will fall. Wider ownership of deep freezers is likely to increase bulk buying of perishable products. Suppliers can save some packaging costs, and can therefore offer lower prices for bulk purchases.
(c)
2.5 Household income and demand: normal goods and inferior goods
As you might imagine, more income will give households more to spend, and they will want to buy more goods at existing prices. However, a rise in household income will not increase market demand for all goods and services. The effect of a rise in income on demand for an individual good will depend on the nature of the good. Demand and the level of income may be related in different ways. (a) We might normally expect a rise in household income to lead to an increase in demand for a good, and goods for which demand rises as household income increases are called normal goods. The downwardsloping demand curves we have looked at in Figures 1 and 2 earlier in this chapter are the demand curves for normal goods. Demand may rise with income up to a certain point but then fall as income rises beyond that point. Goods whose demand eventually falls as income rises are called inferior goods: examples might include 'value' or 'basics' ranges of own-brand supermarket foods (which could be substituted for more expensive ranges),
(b)
72
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
and bus or coach travel (which could be substituted for rail or air travel). The reason for falling demand is that as incomes rise, customers can afford to switch demand to superior products.
Price Inferior good
Question
Income distribution
What do you think might be the demand for swimming pools amongst a population of five households enjoying total annual income of $1m, if the distribution of income is either as under assumption 1 or as under assumption 2. Annual income Assumption 1 Assumption 2 $ $ Household 1 950,000 200,000 Household 2 12,500 200,000 Household 3 12,500 200,000 Household 4 12,500 200,000 Household 5 12,500 200,000
Answer
Under assumption 1, the demand for swimming pools will be confined to household 1. Even if this household owns three or four properties, the demand for swimming pools is likely to be less than under assumption 2, where potentially all five households might want one.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
73
A rise in household income (including a reduction in direct taxes) A rise in the price of substitutes A fall in the price of complements A change in tastes towards this product An expected rise in the price of the product An increase in population.
Figure 4 shows an outward shift in the demand curve, but conversely a fall in demand at each price level would be represented by a shift in the opposite direction: a shift to the left of the original demand curve. Such a shift may be caused by the opposite of the conditions of demand shown above.
D1
D0
Quantity demanded
Figure 4 Changes in quantity demanded and outward shift of the demand curve
74
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
The difference between a change in demand and a shift of the demand curve is of fundamental importance. Remember: (a) (b) Movements along a demand curve (contractions or expansions) for a good are caused solely by changes in its price Variations in the conditions of demand create shifts in the demand curve
Question
In County X, a recent fall in the price of DVDs has seen demand for DVDs increase significantly. However, cinema operators have reported a decline in customer numbers, and they believe this is due to people preferring to buy DVDs to watch rather than going to the cinema. What effect is the fall in the price of DVDs likely to have on the demand curves for: (a) (b) DVD players cinema tickets.
Answer
(a) There is likely to have been an outward shift in the demand curve for DVD players. DVD players are complements to the DVDs themselves because people will need to buy the DVD players in order to watch their DVDs. So, the increased demand for DVDs will lead to an increase in demand for DVD players even though their price may be unchanged. This results in an outward shift in their demand curve (an expansion of demand). There is likely to be an inward shift in the demand curve for cinema tickets (a contraction of demand). Even though the price of cinema tickets has not changed, people are demanding less of them because they are choosing to watch DVDs instead. Cinema tickets are a substitute product to DVDs, and a fall in the price of a substitute leads to an inward shift of the demand curve for a product.
(b)
The supply curve shows the quantity of a good which would be supplied by producers at a given price.
As with demand, supply relates to a period of time for example, we might refer to an annual rate of supply or to a monthly rate.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
75
The quantity of a good supplied to a market varies up or down for two reasons. (a) (b) Existing suppliers may increase or reduce their output quantities. Firms may stop production altogether and leave the market, or new firms may enter the market and start to produce the good.
If the quantity that firms want to produce at a given price exceeds the quantity that households (consumers) would demand, there will be an excess of supply, with firms competing to win what sales demand there is. Over-supply and competition would then be expected to result in price-competitiveness and a fall in prices. As with demand, a distinction needs to be made. (a) (b) An individual firm's supply schedule is the quantity of the good that the individual firm would want to supply to the market at any given price. Market supply is the total quantity of the good that all firms in the market would want to supply at a given price.
As we have already seen in Chapter 3, a firm's short run average cost curve is U shaped, with marginal cost (MC) rising and falling more steeply than average cost (AC). If we assume there is a single, constant selling price for all firms, then a firm's average revenue (AR) and marginal revenue (MR) will be identical. We can show this as Price = Average Revenue = Marginal Revenue.
76
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
We know that the firm will supply where MC = MR in order to maximise profit. Consequently, the firm's chosen levels of output (forming its supply curve) are as shown in Figure 5 below.
Price/ cost MC = supply AC
P3
AVC
P2 D2= AR2 = MR2
P1
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Quantity
We can see that at price P1 the firm supplies Q1 output, because MC = MR1. When price rises to P2, the output increases to Q2 and so on, provided that the firm has the capacity to increase its sales output. In these conditions, the firm's marginal cost curve becomes its supply curve. However, remember there is a minimum price level below which a firm will not supply. In the short run, a firm will only continue to supply, if the selling price covers all its variable costs. At P2 and Q4, the supplier's average revenue (AR) will be less than its average cost (AC) but greater than its average variable cost (AVC). Because AC > AR the firm makes a loss, but some of its fixed costs are still paid for, because AR > AVC. If the firm had stopped producing altogether, it would still incur its fixed costs even though there will be no sales income to pay for any of these fixed costs. So it would have been financially worse off than it was by producing at a level where AR > AVC, even though it made a loss at this point. Therefore, in the short run the firm's supply curve is its marginal cost curve above the variable cost curve (AVC).
It is important that you remember that a firm will continue to produce in the short run if price is greater than average variable costs, even if price is less than average total costs.
Cost-plus pricing
The idea of the marginal cost curve representing the supply curve is the traditional theory of a firm's short run supply curve. However, more recent theories of the firm incorporate a cost-plus pricing approach.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
77
Under a cost-plus pricing approach, a firm adds a profit margin to its average cost at any level of output in order to establish its selling price. This alternative theory produces a horizontal supply curve.
Price/ cost P AC D2= AR2
D1= AR1
Quantity
A rational (profit maximising, or loss minimising) firm will only supply where AR > AC. So the minimum and maximum levels of output occur at Q1 and Q2 respectively, at price P1; that is, where AR crosses the AC curve (AC = AR). Changes in the market price will lead to changes in output. (Note, we are still assuming a single, constant selling price for all firms in the industry). A higher price (P2) will lead to a new supply curve, between Q3 and Q4.
78
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
The supply curve shows how the quantity supplied will change in response to a change in price. If supply conditions alter, a different supply curve must be drawn. In other words, a change in price will cause a change in supply along the supply curve. A change in other supply conditions will cause a shift in the supply curve itself.
This distinction between a movement along the supply curve and a shift in the supply curve is just as important as the similar distinction relating to the demand curve.
(c) (d)
A shift of the supply curve is the result of changes in costs, either in absolute terms or relative to the costs of other goods. If the price of the good is P1, suppliers would be willing to increase supply from Q0 to Q1 under the new supply conditions (Figure 7).
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
79
Conversely, we might see a leftward (or upward) shift in the supply curve if the cost of supply increases. This would mean that at the existing price, a firm's output will decrease and less will be supplied. This is also illustrated on Figure 7: at price P1, the quantity supplied now falls from Q0 to Q2, as the supply curve shifts from S0 to S2. In order for the supplier to restore output levels to the original Q0, price would have to increase to P2. An upward (leftward) shift (S0 S2) in supply could be caused by: (a) (b) (c) An increase in the cost of factors of production (eg a rise in wages and salaries, which are the costs of labour) A rise in the price of other goods which would make them relatively more attractive to the producer An increase in indirect taxes, or a reduction in a subsidy, which would make supply at existing prices less profitable.
Price P2
S2
S0
S1
P1
Q2
Q0
Q1
Quantity supplied
We need to distinguish between short run and long run responses of both supply and demand. In the short run both supply and demand are relatively unresponsive to changes in price, as compared to the long run. (a)
In the case of supply, changes in the quantity of a good supplied often require the laying off or hiring of new workers, or the installation of new machinery. All of these changes, brought about by management decisions, take some time to implement. In the case of demand, it takes time for consumers to adjust their buying patterns, although demand will often respond more rapidly than supply to changes in price or other demand conditions.
(b)
In some markets, responses to changes in price are relatively rapid. In others, response times are much longer. In stock markets for example, the supply and demand for company shares respond very rapidly to price changes, whereas in the markets for fuel oils or agrichemicals response times are much longer.
80
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
Question
Quantity supplied
What effect will higher grain prices have on the supply curve of a cereal manufacturer who makes cereals from grain?
Answer
The higher price of grain will cause the supply curve to shift leftwards (or upwards). The increase in grain prices increase the cereal manufacturer's production costs, making supply at existing prices less profitable.
The competitive market process results in an equilibrium price, which is the price at which market supply and market demand quantities are in balance. In any market, the equilibrium price will change if market demand or supply conditions change.
(b) (c)
Decisions by firms about what industry to operate in and what markets to produce for will be influenced by the prices obtainable. Although some firms have been established in one industry for many years, others are continually opening up, closing down or switching to new industries and new markets. Over time, firms in an industry might also increase or reduce the volume of goods they sell. Sometimes, however, price will not represent the economic cost of a good or service. For example, price may be higher than costs due to taxes imposed by government. The sales price of cigarettes and alcohol is much higher than the cost of producing them, due to the imposition of taxes and duty. By contrast, a subsidy may bring about an artificially low price. However, in the main, we will be looking at price as an indicator of the exchange value of goods and services, as determined by the market forces of supply and demand.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
81
P2
C Excess demand
D Market demand
Quantity
Figure 8 shows the planned (or 'ex ante') demand and planned supply at a set of prices. At price P1 in Figure 8, suppliers want to produce a greater quantity than the market demands, meaning that there is excess supply, equal to the distance AB. Suppliers would react as the stock of unsold goods accumulates: (a) (b) They would cut down the current level of production in order to sell unwanted inventories. They would also reduce prices in order to encourage sales.
The opposite will happen at price P2 where there is an excess of demand over supply shown by the distance CD. Supply and price would increase. Faced with an excess of demand, manufacturers would be able to raise their prices. This would make supplying the good more profitable and supply would increase. At price P the amount that sellers are willing and able to supply is equal to the amount that customers are willing and able to buy. Consumers will be willing to spend a total of (P Q) on buying Q units of the product, and suppliers will be willing to supply Q units to earn revenue of (P Q). P is the equilibrium price. The forces of supply and demand push a market to its equilibrium price and quantity. Note carefully the following key points. (a) (b) (c) (d)
82
If there is no change in conditions of supply or demand, the equilibrium price will prevail in the market and will remain stable. If price is not at the equilibrium, the market is in disequilibrium and supply and demand will push prices towards the equilibrium price. In any market there will only be one equilibrium position where the market is cleared. Shifts in the supply curve or demand curve will change the equilibrium price (and the quantity traded).
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
In the same way that consumers may be able to buy a good for less than they would be prepared to pay, so producers may be able to sell a good at a higher price than they would have been prepared to supply it for. In this case, there is a producer surplus. Figure 9 illustrates this. The area of producer surplus on the graph represents the suppliers in the market who would be prepared to supply quantities of the good at less than the market price.
The effects of demand and supply conditions on markets can be analysed by studying the behaviour of both demand and supply curves. In this section, we will look at some examples involving the analysis of demand and supply conditions. We will examine the likely effects on the price and quantity sold of second hand cars in the event of: (a) (b) (c) A large increase in petrol prices A big increase in the price of new cars A massive investment in public transport
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
83
5.1 Analysis
Petrol and cars are complementary products; demand for one is likely to affect demand for the other. Hence, any change in the market for petrol (part (a) of this example) would be expected to affect the market for second-hand cars. The demand for petrol, however, is likely to be relatively unresponsive to a change in price, so a change in price will only have a small impact on the quantity demanded. Consequently, a major change in its price will be necessary to affect the demand for any complementary product. Figure 10 assumes that there is a large increase in the price of fuel (petrol) as stated above.
(i) Fuel market
Price D S1 S p1 p D1 p p1 Price
q1
Figure 10
Quantity of fuel
q1
Number of vehicles
In this instance, we have assumed that the rise in the price of fuel results from a change in the conditions of supply. This is the basis of the new supply curve S1 shifting to the left of the existing one (Figure 10 (i)). A rise in the price of fuel is a rise in the cost of owning and running a car. There will thus be a fall in the demand for secondhand cars and a fall in the price and quantity sold (Figure 10 (ii)). Part (b) of the example involves new vehicles and used vehicles, which are substitute products. A consumer has a choice to buy either a new car or a used car. The consumer is likely to buy one or the other, not both.
(i) New vehicles market
Price D S1 S D p1 p Price
p1 p
q1
Number of vehicles
q1
Number of vehicles
Figure 11 84
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
It is assumed that the increase in the price of new cars is the result of a major increase in supply costs. The rise in price causes a switch of demand into second-hand vehicles, so pushing up their price and leading to an increase in the number sold (Figure 11(ii)). The increased price of new vehicles could alternatively result from an increase in the demand for them. Part (c) of the example involves another 'product' which is in competition with second-hand cars. If there is a reduction in the price of public transport services following the outward shift in supply, the result is likely to be as shown in Figure 12.
(i) Public transport (ii) Used vehicles market
Figure 12
In part (c) of our example, the fall in public transport prices leads to an expansion in demand for public transport (Figure 12(i)) while the demand for second-hand cars falls (with a new demand line D1 in Figure 12(ii)) together with a fall in price. However, the relationship between public transport and the market for second-hand cars is likely to be a highly complex and indeterminate one. Thus, people might make greater use of public transport while the ownership of cars (including second-hand cars) could continue to increase.
Where maximum prices are imposed, there will be excess demand: rationing may be necessary, and black marketeers may seek to operate. Where minimum prices are imposed, producers will make excess supply.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
85
(a) (b)
They might set a maximum price (or price ceiling) for a good, perhaps as part of an anti-inflationary economic policy. They might set a minimum price (or price floor) for a good. The EU Common Agricultural Policy (CAP) is an example of a price floor, designed to ensure that farmers receive at least the minimum prices for their produce.
Quantity
86
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
Question
Supply of and demand for good Q are initially in equilibrium as shown in the diagram below.
Price S
Equilibrium
P D
Quantity
The government introduces a maximum price P. What effect will this have on the quantity of good Q purchased? A B C D It will rise from G to E It will rise from E to H It will fall from H to G It will fall from E to G
Answer
D The initial equilibrium quantity is E (where the supply and demand curves intersect). Quantity demanded at the controlled price P will be H. However, only quantity G will be supplied and purchases will therefore be limited to this amount. Therefore, the quantity purchased will fall from E to G due to the shortage of supply available.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
87
Price S
Z P M D
Quantity
The problem with floor prices is that more of the good will be produced than can be sold at the minimum price, and so surplus quantities will build up, which have to be either stored or destroyed. Either way, the floor prices leads to a misallocation of resources. To try to prevent over-supply and 'dumping' of excess supply at low prices, a system of production quotas might be introduced whereby each supplier is only allowed to produce up to a maximum quantity and no more. For some types of produce, the EU tried to overcome the problem of excess supply by imposing quotas on farmers. From 1992, the EU Common Agricultural Policy started to oblige farmers to take land out of production. Land which is taken out of production in this way is known as 'set-aside'.
Question Answer
Floor prices
What are the economic impacts of the Common Agricultural Policy (CAP) and other floor price schemes?
CAP guarantees a minimum price above the market equilibrium price. Therefore it encourages an excess of supply over demand, creating surplus production of agricultural goods. However, it provides price and income stability for the farmers producing the goods.
There are also examples of artificially high prices reducing demand for goods where the prices are imposed by companies rather than government or legislation. An EU report in September 2009 found that despite the costs of butter, milk and cheese falling 39%, 31% and 18% respectively in the last year, the price which supermarkets have charged their customers had only fallen by 2%. Consequently, shoppers' demand for dairy products is lower than it would have been if more of the price cuts had been passed on to them, and the higher prices have led to an increase in the 'butter mountain' paid for by EU taxpayers. The EU has announced it is going to work with the competition authorities in various countries across Europe to examine whether the supermarkets have been involved in any anti-competitive practices.
88
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
To raise wage levels for workers employed to a level above the 'equilibrium' wage rate To reduce the demand for labour and so cause job losses
Wage D = MRPL Y S = MC L in free labour market
M W
Minimum wage
Qm
Qw
Quantity of labour
Without a minimum wage, Qw workers would be employed at wage rate W (Figure 15).
Question
Minimum wage
By reference to Figure 15, work out what happens when a minimum wage M, higher than the existing rate W, is imposed.
Answer
The supply curve for labour is now the line MXY. Demand for labour from employers will fall to Qm, but Qm workers will at least earn a higher wage. However, ceteris paribus, the imposition of the minimum wage would create unemployment at Qw Qm.
In practice, there may be a temptation for firms to ignore the floor price, for example by establishing informal arrangements with workers whereby they work for less than the minimum wage. However, whilst this would provide employment for the workers it raises ethical issues about their treatment.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
89
Chapter roundup
In a free market, the price mechanism signals demand and supply conditions to producers and consumers. It therefore determines the activities of both producers and consumers, influencing the levels of demand for and the supply of goods. The demand schedule shows how much of a good consumers are willing and able to purchase at any given price. The position of the demand curve is determined by the demand conditions, which include consumers' tastes and preferences, and consumers' incomes. The supply curve shows the quantity of a good which would be supplied by producers at a given price. The competitive market process results in an equilibrium price, which is the price at which market supply and market demand quantities are in balance. In any market, the equilibrium price will change if market demand or supply conditions change. The effects of demand and supply conditions on markets can be analysed by studying the behaviour of both demand and supply curves. Where maximum prices are imposed, there will be excess demand: rationing may be necessary, and black marketeers may seek to operate. Where minimum prices are imposed, producers will make excess supply.
90
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
Quick quiz
1 2 3 4 5 What factors influence demand for a good? What are (a) substitutes and (b) complements? What factors affect the supply quantity? What is meant by equilibrium price? A demand curve is drawn on all except which of the following assumptions? A B C D 6 Incomes do not change. Prices of substitutes are fixed. Price of the good is constant. There are no changes in tastes and preferences.
The diagram shown relates to the demand for and supply of Scotch whiskey. The market is initially in equilibrium at point X. The government imposes a specific tax on Scotch whilst at the same time, the price of Irish Whiskey (a substitute for Scotch Whisky) rises. Which point, A, B, C or D represents the new market equilibrium?
A price ceiling set above the equilibrium market price will result in: A B C D Market failure Excess supply over demand Market equilibrium Excess demand over supply A fall in the price of a substitute product A reduction in direct taxation on incomes A reduction in price of the product An increase in the price of a complementary product A good of such poor quality that demand for it is very weak A good of lesser quality than a substitute good, so that the price of the substitute is higher A good for which the cross elasticity of demand with a substitute product is greater than 1 A good for which demand will fall as household income rises Its marginal cost curve where price is less than average variable costs Its marginal cost curve where price is greater than average variable costs Its average cost curve where price is less than marginal cost Its average cost curve where price is greater than marginal cost
Part B The market system and the competitive process 4: Price determination the price mechanism
Which one of the following would normally cause a rightward shift in the demand curve for a product? A B C D
10
In traditional theory, which of the following best describes a firm's short run supply curve: A B C D
91
2 3
4 5 6 7
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
14 19
428
92
4: Price determination the price mechanism Part B The market system and the competitive process
93
1 Elasticity of demand
FAST FORWARD
Demand for a good depends largely on price, household income and the relative price of substitutes or complementary goods. Changes in any of these will cause either a movement along the demand curve or a shift in the demand curve. Price elasticity of demand indicates the responsiveness in the quantity demanded of a good to a change in the price of that good.
Key terms
Price elasticity of demand (PED) is a measure of the extent of change in the market demand for a good in response to a change in its price. The coefficient of PED is measured as:
Percentage change in quantity demanded Percentage change in price
Since demand usually increases when the price falls, and decreases when the price rises, elasticity has a negative value. However, it is usual to ignore the minus sign, and just describe the absolute value of the coefficient. This can be expressed as:
Q Q P P
100 100 is the symbol for 'change in' is the quantity demanded of the good is the price of the good
where Q P
If we are measuring the responsiveness of demand to a large change in price, we can measure elasticity between two points on the demand curve, and the resulting measure is called the arc elasticity of demand. We calculate the arc elasticity of demand from the percentage change in quantity relative to average quantity for the relevant range of output and from the percentage price change relative to the average of the corresponding price range. If we wish to measure the responsiveness of demand at one particular point in the demand curve, we can calculate a point elasticity of demand, without averaging price and quantity over a range. In doing so, it is convenient to assume that the demand curve is a straight line unless told otherwise.
94
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
What is the price elasticity of demand measuring the responsiveness of demand over this range of price increase?
Solution
Annual demand at $1.20 per unit is 800,000 units. Annual demand at $1.30 per unit is 730,000 units. Average quantity over the range is 765,000 units. Average price is $1.25. % change in demand
% change in price 70,000 100% = 9.15% 765,000
Ignoring the minus sign, the arc elasticity is 1.14. The demand for this good, over the range of annual demand 730,000 to 800,000 units, is elastic because the price elasticity of demand is greater than 1. Now try the following exercise yourself.
Question
If the price per unit of X rises from $1.40 to $1.60, it is expected that monthly demand will fall from 220,000 units to 200,000 units. What is the arc price elasticity of demand over these ranges of price and output?
Answer
Monthly demand at $1.40 per unit = 220,000 units Monthly demand at $1.60 per unit = 200,000 units Average quantity = 210,000 units Average price = $1.50 % change in demand % change in price Arc price elasticity of demand =
20,000 100% = 9.52% 210,000
Ignoring the minus sign, the arc elasticity is 0.71. Demand is inelastic over the demand range considered, because the price elasticity of demand (ignoring the minus sign) is less than 1.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
95
Solution
We are asked to calculate the elasticity at a particular price. We assume that the demand curve is a straight line. At a price of $1.20, annual demand is 800,000 units. For a price rise: % change in demand % change in price Price elasticity of demand at price $1.20 = 70,000 100% = 8.75% (fall) 800,000 10c 100% = 8.33% (rise) 120c
8.75 = 1.05 8.33
Ignoring the minus sign, the price elasticity at this point is 1.05. Demand is elastic at this point, because the elasticity is greater than 1.
Question
If the price per unit of x rises from $1.40 to $1.60, it is expected that monthly demand will fall from 220,000 units to 200,000 units. What is the point price elasticity of demand when the price is $1.40?
Answer
We assume that the demand curve is a straight line. At a price of $1.40, demand is 220,000 units. For a price rise of 20 cents to $1.60: % change in demand % change in price Price elasticity of demand = 20,000 100% = 9.09% (fall) 220,000 20c 100% = 14.29% (rise) 140c 9.09 = 0.64 14.29
or 0.64 ignoring the minus sign. Demand is inelastic at this point, because it is less than 1.
96
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
If it is not clear from the details of an assessment question whether you need to calculate arc or point elasticity, then calculate the point elasticity.
Question
Range of elasticity
A shop sells 100 shirts each month at a price of $20. When the price is increased to $24, the total sales revenue rises by 14%. Within which range does the price elasticity of demand lie? A B C D Under 0.15 Greater than 0.15 and less than 0.5 Greater than 0.5 and less than 1.0 Greater than 1.0
Answer
B Total revenue of $20 = 100 $20 = $2,000 Total revenue at $24 = $2,000 1.14 = $2,280 Number sold at $24 = $2,280 24 = 95
Demand is inelastic if the absolute value is less than 1 Demand is elastic if the absolute value is greater than 1
Think about what this means if there is an increase in price. Where demand is inelastic, the quantity demanded falls by a smaller percentage than the rise in price. Where demand is elastic, demand falls by a larger percentage than the rise in price.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
97
The ranges of price elasticity () at different points on a downward sloping straight line demand curve are illustrated in Figure 1.
Price P = infinity
>1
0.5P
=1
<1
=0 0 0.5Q Q Quantity
At higher prices on a straight line demand curve (the top of the demand curve), small percentage price reductions can bring large percentage increases in quantity demanded. This means that demand is elastic over these ranges. At lower prices on a straight line demand curve (the bottom of the demand curve), large percentage price reductions can bring small percentage increases in quantity. This means that demand is inelastic over these price ranges.
(c)
This means that in Figure 2, rectangles OABC, ODEF and OGHJ all have the same area, since the areas of these rectangles represent total spending by customers at each price. (i) (ii) If the selling price were D, total demand would be F and total spending on the product would be D F (rectangle ODEF). If the selling price were A, total demand would be C, and total spending on the product would be A C (rectangle OABC).
98
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
(iii)
If the selling price were G, total demand would be J and total spending on the product would be G J (rectangle OGHJ).
Price D E
Quantity
Perfectly inelastic Relatively inelastic Unit elasticity Relatively elastic Perfectly elastic
Necessity Luxury
For the assessment, you need to be able: To understand the factors influencing elasticity To measure price elasticity from given price and demand data, and to draw appropriate conclusions from such information To draw the correct implications for the total revenue of the producer of changes in the price of the product
The price elasticity of demand is relevant to total spending on a good or service. Total expenditure is a matter of interest to both suppliers, to whom sales revenue accrues, and to government, who may receive a proportion of total expenditure in the form of taxation.
When demand is elastic, an increase in price will result in a greater than proportional fall in the quantity demanded, and total expenditure will fall.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
99
In Figure 3, total expenditure at price PA is represented by the area OPAAQA and total expenditure at price PB is represented by the area OPBBQB. Area OPAAQA is greater than area OPBBQB: this can be seen by observing that area Y (expenditure lost on a rise in price from A to B) is greater than area X (expenditure gained).
Price B X PA A Total expenditure falls when price rises Y
PB
QB
QA
Quantity
When demand is inelastic, an increase in price will still result in a fall in quantity demanded, but the fall in quantity demanded will be less than proportional to the rise in price so total expenditure will rise. In Figure 4, area X (expenditure gained) is greater than area Y (expenditure lost).
Price
PB X PA
B A Y
QB
QA
Quantity
With unit elasticity, expenditure will stay constant regardless of a change in price. In Figure 5, area X and area Y are the same.
100
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
Price
PB X PA
QB
QA
Quantity
Question
Suppose that there are two products, A and B.
Product A currently sells for $5, and demand at this price is 1,700 units. If the price fell to $4.60, demand would increase to 2,000 units. Product B currently sells for $8 and demand at this price is 9,500 units. if the price fell to $7.50, demand would increase to 10,000 units. In each of these cases (and using the 'point' method), calculate: (a) (b) The price elasticity of demand (PED) for the price changes given The effect on total revenue, if demand is met in full at both the old and the new prices, of the change in price.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
101
Answer
(a) Product A At price $5: Change in quantity Change in price PED = 300 =17.7% 1,700 40c = 8% $5
17.7% = 2.2. (Ignoring the minus sign = 2.2, and so > 1.) 8%
Demand is elastic and a fall in price should result in such a large increase in quantity demanded that total revenue will rise. $ 8,500 Revenue at old price of $5 ( 1,700) 9,200 Revenue at new price of $4.60 ( 2,000) Increase in total revenue 700 (b) Product B At price $8: Change in quantity Change in price PED =
500 = 5.3% 9, ,500
50c = 6.25% $8
5.3% = 0.85. (Ignoring the minus sign = 0.85, and so < 1.) 6.25%
Demand is inelastic and a fall in price should result in only a relatively small increase in quantity demanded. Total revenue will fall. $ 76,000 Revenue at old price of $8 ( 9,500) 75,000 Revenue at new price of $7.50 ( 10,000) 1,000 Fall in total revenue
102
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
Giffen observed that among the labouring classes of his day, consumption of bread rose when its price rose. This could happen because the increase in price of a commodity which made up a high proportion of individuals' consumption could have a significant effect on real incomes. People would have to increase their consumption of bread because they were no longer able to afford more expensive foods. The demand curve for a good might also slope upwards if it is bought for purposes of ostentation. In this case, having a higher price tag makes the good more desirable to consumers and thus increases demand once price goes above a certain point. These goods will therefore also have positive elasticities of demand.
Percentage of income spent on the good Availability of substitutes Necessity versus luxury The time horizon Pricing policies of competitors Habit Definition of market
1.13 Necessity
Demand for goods which are necessary for everyday life (for example, basic foodstuffs) tends to be relatively inelastic while demand for luxury goods tends to be elastic. If a good is a luxury and its price rises, the rational consumer may well decide he or she no longer needs that good and so demand for it will fall. However, if a good is a necessity, the consumer will have to continue buying it even though its price has increased. For luxury goods, the income elasticity of demand (see 1.18 below) tends to become more significant than price elasticity of demand.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
103
1.16 Habit
Goods which are habit-forming tend to be inelastic, because the consumer 'needs' the goods despite their increase in price. This pattern can be seen with addictive products such as cigarettes.
Income elasticity of demand measures the responsiveness of demand to changes in household income. Cross elasticity of demand is determined by the availability of substitute (competitors') products.
It is possible to construct other measures of elasticity than price elasticity, and an important one which you need to know about is income elasticity of demand. The income elasticity of demand for a good indicates the responsiveness of demand to changes in household incomes. When household income rises people will not only increase their demand for existing goods but also start to demand new goods which they could not previously afford. Income elasticity of demand = (a) % change in quantity demanded % change in income
Demand for a good is income elastic if income elasticity is greater than 1; in other words, if quantity demanded rises by a larger percentage than the rise in income. For example, if the demand for compact discs will rise by 10% if household income rises by 7%, we would say that the demand for compact discs is income elastic. Demand for a good is income inelastic if income elasticity is between 0 and 1, and the quantity demanded rises less than the proportionate increase in income. For example, if the demand for books rises by 6% if household income rises by 10%, we would say that the demand for books is income inelastic.
(b)
104
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
The change in quantity demanded takes the form of a shift in the position of the demand curve, not a movement along it, since it is not stimulated by a change in price. Goods whose income elasticity of demand is positive are said to be normal goods, meaning that demand for them will rise when household income rises. If income elasticity is negative, the commodity is called an inferior good since demand for it falls as income rises. Inferiority in this sense, is an observable fact about the consumer's demand preferences, rather than a statement about the quality of the good itself. Inter-city bus travel is an example of an inferior good. Bus travel is cheaper than air or rail travel, but takes longer. When consumers have limited income, they are prepared to forego the increased time taken for to travel in return for the cheaper cost. However, as their income increases, they will choose the more rapid modes of transport over the slower, albeit cheaper, bus travel. Therefore demand for bus travel will fall as income rises. Income elasticity of demand can be summarised as follows.
Elasticity Value Type of good Example
ve 01 >1
For most commodities, an increase in income will increase demand. The exact effect on demand will depend on the type of product. For example, the demand for some products like bread will not increase much as income rises. Therefore, bread has a low income elasticity of demand. In contrast, the demand for luxuries increases rapidly as income rises and luxury goods therefore have a high income elasticity of demand.
Question
What will be the effect on price, quantity demanded and quantity supplied of luxury sports cars, given a significant reduction in income tax?
Answer
The demand curve for sports cars will shift to the right. Price, quantity demanded and quantity supplied will all go up. The effect of a cut in income tax is to leave households with more to spend. Sports cars are a luxury good, so their income elasticity of demand is likely to be quite high. The percentage increase in demand for the cars is therefore likely to be greater than the percentage increase in after-tax household income. We can illustrate the change diagrammatically:
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
105
Price S
P1 P0
D0 Q0 Q1
D1 Quantity
The shift in the demand curve (from D0 to D1) means that the equilibrium quantity demanded and supplied shifts from Q0 to Q1 and the equilibrium price increases from P0 to P1.
*(assuming no change in the price of A) The cross elasticity of demand depends upon the degree to which goods are substitutes or complements. (a) (b) If the two goods are substitutes, cross elasticity will be positive and a fall in the price of one will reduce the amount demanded of the other. If the goods are complements, cross elasticity will be negative and a fall in the price of one will raise demand for the other.
For example, assume bread and butter are complements. If the price of bread increases, demand for bread and then, in turn, butter will decrease. So, as a fraction, we have a negative value (quantity of butter demanded) over a positive value (increase in price) meaning the cross elasticity of demand is negative. Cross elasticity involves a comparison between two products. The concept is a useful one in the context of considering substitutes and complementary products. The value of the cross-elasticity of demand shows the strength of the relationship between the two goods. Indices tending towards 1 or -1 indicate a strong relationship, statistics tending towards zero indicate a weak relationship.
Cross-elasticity Value Example
1 ve 0 +ve +1 Bread and butter Bread and cars White bread and brown bread
106
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
Make sure you know how to calculate the different types of elasticity, and how to distinguish between complements and substitutes. Remember that cross elasticity of demand (like other measures of elasticity) measures the percentage change in the quantity demanded for one good, in response to the percentage change in the price of another.
2 Elasticity of supply
FAST FORWARD
Elasticity of supply measures the responsiveness of the quantity of a good supplied following a change in the price of that good.
Where the supply of goods is fixed whatever price is offered, for example in the case of antiques, vintage wines and land, supply is perfectly inelastic and the elasticity of supply is zero. The supply curve is a vertical straight line. Where the supply of goods varies proportionately with the price, elasticity of supply equals one and the supply curve is a straight line passing through the origin. (Note that a demand curve with unit elasticity along all of its length is not a straight line, but a supply curve with unit elasticity is a straight line.) Where the producers will supply any amount at a given price but none at all at a slightly lower price, elasticity of supply is infinite, or perfectly elastic. The supply curve is a horizontal straight line. Perfectly inelastic supply, unit elastic supply and perfectly elastic supply are illustrated in Figure 6.
Perfectly inelastic supply Unit elastic supply (two examples) Perfectly elastic supply
Note that a supply curve with unit elasticity can have many different gradients. The key feature that identifies unitary elasticity is not the gradient of the curve, but the fact that it passes through the origin.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
107
Supply is elastic (greater than 1) when the percentage change in the amount producers want to supply is greater than proportional to the percentage change in price. Supply is inelastic (less than 1) when the amount producers want to supply changes by a smaller percentage than the percentage change in price.
Inelastic supply Elastic supply
Note: If the supply curve 'cuts' across the quantity supplied axis, supply is inelastic (< 1). If the supply curve 'cuts' across the price axis, supply is elastic (> 1).
(b) (c)
(d) (e)
(f)
108
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
(c)
(d)
Q1
Q2
Q3
Quantity
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
109
The rise in price in the short run will encourage entrepreneurs to open new restaurants to take advantage of the profits to be earned. In the long run, supply is consequently more elastic and is shown by supply curve S2. The expanded output in the industry leads to a new equilibrium at a lower price P3 with the new level of output being Q3.
Question
Which diagram shows perfectly elastic supply?
Elasticity of supply
Answer
C A is unit elastic supply (two examples). B is perfectly inelastic supply (or demand), D is unit elastic demand. C shows perfectly elastic supply.
3 Primary markets
FAST FORWARD
Inelasticity of both supply and demand is an important feature of some markets, particularly in the primary sector. Agricultural markets illustrate two important effects especially well: these are the cyclic variation in supply and the paradox that farmers incomes tend to vary inversely with levels of production.
110
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
Hog population
In the diagram, the horizontal axis represents both the break-even price and the average national total number of hogs. The cycle begins with a small rise in price that takes it above the break-even level. As the price rises towards point A, producers decide to increase output. To do this, they need more breeding stock, so they send fewer animals to market. This is, effectively, a reduction in output towards point B, so prices continue to rise. Approximately a year later, the decision to increase breeding stock starts to have effect and output rises past point C. As a result, price starts to fall past point D. At about the end of year 2 (T2), price has fallen to the break-even level and farmers decide to reduce production. This cannot be done immediately and, in the short term, the decision leads to an increase in the number of animals sent to market in order to reduce breeding stock numbers. The production curve rises towards point E, while price falls towards point F. Production then actually declines during year 4, while price rises back to the break-even point and the cycle begins again. A similar cycle has been observed in the production of potatoes.
P1
P3
P2
Q2
Q1
Quantity
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
111
Figure 10 shows a situation that starts in the same way as the hog cycle: the market in the first time period is in disequilibrium because the current price is P1, not the market clearing price. This price leads producers to plan to supply Q1 in the second time period. When this amount of the good eventually reaches the market, the producers are disappointed to find that price has fallen to P2 due to the excess of supply over demand. They decide that they will only produce quantity Q2 in the third time period. This restriction in supply inevitably leads to a rise in price to P3. It is easy to see what will happen in subsequent time periods: price and quantity will continue to oscillate, though, in this case, the market will approach equilibrium at the market clearing price. However, while in this instance we have shown price gradually converging on the market clearing price, this is not always the case.
Price Splanned P3 P1
P2
Q2
Q1
Quantity
Figure 11 shows a rather different situation. Here the oscillations diverge and equilibrium is never attained. Such a market would produce alternating surpluses and shortages of increasing size. Fortunately, this is an entirely theoretical situation. However, the cobweb theory demonstrates the instability of price in the market once there is a disequilibrium between supply and demand. The nature of the market oscillations depends on the relationship between the gradients of the supply and demand curves. If the supply curve is steeper than the demand curve, the oscillations will decay towards equilibrium, as in Figure 10. If the demand curve is steeper than the supply curve, the oscillations will expand, as shown in Figure 11. There is also the intermediate case, of course, where the gradients are identical: in this case the oscillations will continue at the same magnitude indefinitely.
Price S1
P1
S0
P0 Y D 0 Q1 Q0 Quantity
Figure 12 shows the effect of the overall shift in the supply curve resulting from a poor harvest. At time 0, supply was at S0 and price was at P0. The next harvest was poor and by time 1, the supply curve has shifted to the left. The quantity sold, Q1, is not very much reduced below Q0, but there has been a marked increase in price from P0 to P1. Total revenue equal to area Y has been lost, but this is more than compensated for by extra revenue equal to area X. It is easy to see that in years when harvests are generally good, the opposite effect will be apparent: the supply curve will shift to the right, prices will fall and more total revenue will be lost than will be gained from the extra quantity sold. Ironically, when harvests generally have been good and there is an abundance of supply, farmers find their incomes falling. Conversely, when harvests are poor and prices rise, farmers will have higher incomes. Therefore there is considerable potential for instability and insecurity of supply in agriculture, in that a series of good harvests can lead to lack of investment, exit from the industry and even financial failure among farmers.
'As warm weather returns to Chesapeake Bay, so too does one of its delicacies: blue crabs. Seasoned and steamed, breaded and lightly fried, or picked clean for crab cakes, few crustaceans are more delicious. The first crab catch this year was the biggest in more than a decade. Yet the glut, attributed to the mild winter and an increase in the number of juvenile crabs, is bringing anything but profits for the watermen . Prices at the dock are running at $8-10 a bushel (60-80 crabs), down from $30 in April. Last year, the price ranged from $40 to $85.' (The Economist, 27 May 2006)
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
113
114
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
While the CAP benefits farmers, it is disadvantageous to consumers who have to pay a price above the market price. This results in a loss of consumer surplus.
Chapter roundup
Demand for a good depends largely on price, household income and the relative price of substitutes or complementary goods. Changes in any of these will cause either a movement along the demand curve or a shift in the demand curve.
Price elasticity of demand indicates the responsiveness in the quantity demanded of a good to a change in the price of that good.
For the assessment, you need to be able: To understand the factors influencing elasticity To measure price elasticity from given price and demand data, and to draw appropriate conclusions from such information To draw the correct implications for the total revenue of the producer of changes in the price of the product
Income elasticity of demand measures the responsiveness of demand to changes in household income. Cross elasticity of demand is determined by the availability of substitute (competitors') products. Elasticity of supply measures the responsiveness of the quantity of a good supplied following a change in the price of that good. Inelasticity of both supply and demand is an important feature of some markets, particularly in the primary sector. Agricultural markets illustrate two important effects especially well: these are the cyclic variation in supply and the paradox that farmers incomes tend to vary inversely with levels of production.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
115
Quick quiz
1 2 What is meant by the price elasticity of demand (PED) for a commodity? What is the significance of PED to: (a) (b) 3 4 A manufacturer? The Chancellor of the Exchequer?
What determines the cross elasticity of demand between two goods? If the absolute value of the price elasticity of demand for dry white wine is greater than one, a decrease in the price of all wine would result in: A B C D A more than proportional decrease in the quantity of dry white wine purchased A less than proportional decrease in the quantity of dry white wine purchased A less than proportional increase in the quantity of dry white wine purchased A more than proportional increase in the quantity of dry white wine purchased
Which combination of demand and supply curves would be appropriate for a firm attempting to increase its profits by increasing its market share? A B C D Inelastic demand, inelastic supply Elastic demand, elastic supply Inelastic demand, elastic supply Elastic demand, inelastic supply
Fish and chips are considered complementary products. If the price of fish rises, what will the impact be in demand for chips? A B C D Rises Stays the same Falls Doubles
Using the point method, what is the price elasticity of demand of product X as price falls from its current price of $20 to $15? Old New Price 20 15 Quantity 10 15 A B C D 0.5 1 1.5 2
Which of the following statements is true? 1. 2. 3. A B C D If the price elasticity of demand is more than 1, a fall in price will result in a fall in total expenditure on the good; The income elasticity of demand will only be zero in the case of inferior goods; The cross-elasticity of demand for complementary goods will always be positive. None of them is true Statement 1 only is true Statement 2 only is true Statement 3 only is true
116
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
Elasticity is not constant along a straight line demand curve. Put the correct values for elasticity in the boxes on this diagram.
A B C D E 10
Part B The market system and the competitive process 5: Elasticities of demand and supply
117
4 5
6 7 8
C D A
1 2 3 4 5 A
10
B is a demand curve and could show unit elastic demand, C is unit elastic supply (two examples), D is perfectly elastic supply (or demand). A shows perfectly inelastic supply (or demand).
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
20 23
429
118
5: Elasticities of demand and supply Part B The market system and the competitive process
Topic list 1 Market failure 2 Externalities and g overnment intervention 3 Indirect taxes and subsidies
119
1 Market failure
FAST FORWARD
Free markets may not lead to an ideal allocation of resources, and there are various methods of regulating markets.
(b)
Advocates of a free market economy argue that the market forces of supply and demand will result in an efficient allocation of economic resources. (a) (b) (c) Consumers will want lower prices and producers will want higher prices; a balance of supply and demand is struck in the market through the price mechanism. Producers will decide what goods to produce, and in what quantities, by relating their prices to the costs of production (and the costs of the scarce resources needed to produce them). If the price of a product is too high, consumers will want to buy less of it. If the price is too low, producers will make less of it and switch their production resources into making something different which generates a higher price.
However, the arguments in favour of a free market are based on the assumption that there is perfect competition in the market. Perfect competition has a number of prerequisites. (a) (b) (c) (d) Markets each have a large number of competing firms, each producing a homogeneous product, and each having only a small share of the market. Producers are price-takers. They have to sell at the ruling market price: they cannot impose their own price at which to sell goods or services. Consumers and producers have perfect information about markets and prices. There is perfect mobility of factors of production, so factors of production can be switched easily from making one type of good into making another. Perfect competition also assumes there are no barriers to entry or exit for firms wanting to enter (or leave) a market.
In reality, these assumptions are not often completely valid. However, the characteristics of the markets for many goods are still similar to conditions of perfect competition.
120
6: Market failures, externalities and intervention Part B The market system and the competitive process
The following are examples of market imperfections. (a) If a monopoly firm controls a market, it might prevent other firms from entering the market (for example by claiming patent rights, or launching a strong marketing campaign with the intention of keeping customers away from the new firms). By restricting supply in this way, the monopolist may keep prices higher than they would be in a competitive market. (We will look at monopolies in more detail in a later chapter.) Just as monopolies are firms which dominate supply to a market, monopsony buyers are large individual buyers who dominate demand in a market. Monopsonists may exert control over the market, exacting low prices or other favourable conditions from suppliers. Consumers may make bad purchasing decisions because they do not have complete and accurate information about all goods and services that are available. It takes time for the price mechanism to work. Firms cannot suddenly enter a new market or shut down operations. The slow response of the price mechanism to changes in demand creates some short term inefficiency in resource allocation.
(b)
(c) (d)
Note the following concepts. Market failure: the failure of a market to produce a satisfactory allocation of scarce resources. Social costs: the total costs to society as a whole of using economic resources. Social benefits: the total gains to society as a whole flowing from an economic decision. Externalities: the differences between private and social costs. Public goods: goods which cannot be provided privately because if they are, everyone will benefit from them; regardless of whether they have paid for them or not. As a result, individuals would have no incentive to pay for these goods. Merit goods: goods which need to be provided in the long-term public interest.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 6: Market failures, externalities and intervention
121
It can be argued that a free market system would result in a satisfactory allocation of resources, provided that private costs are the same as social costs and private benefits are the same as social benefits. In this situation, suppliers will maximise profits by supplying goods and services that benefit customers, and that customers want to buy. By producing their goods and services, suppliers are giving benefit to both themselves and the community. However, there are other possibilities. (a) (b) Members of the economy (suppliers or households) may do things which give benefit to others, but yield no reward to themselves. Members of the economy may do things which are harmful to others, but which have no cost to themselves.
When private benefit is not the same as social benefit, or when private cost is not the same as social cost, an allocation of resources which only reflects private costs and benefits may not be socially acceptable. Here are some examples of situations where private cost and social cost differ. (a) A firm produces a good and, during the production process, pollution is discharged into the air. The private cost to the firm is the cost of the resources needed to make the good. The social cost consists of the private cost plus the additional 'costs' incurred by other members of society, who suffer from the pollution. The private cost of transporting goods by road is the cost to the haulage firm of the resources to provide the transport. The social cost of road haulage would consist of the private cost plus the cost of repairs and maintenance of the road system (which sustains serious damage from heavy goods vehicles) plus any environmental costs, such as harm to wildlife habitats from road building or pollution emitted by the transport lorry.
(b)
122
6: Market failures, externalities and intervention Part B The market system and the competitive process
(b)
Suppose that a large firm pays for the training of employees as accountants, expecting a certain proportion of these employees to leave the firm in search of a better job once they have qualified. The private benefits to the firm are the benefits of the training of those employees who continue to work for it. The total social benefit includes the enhanced economic output resulting from the training of those employees who go to work for other firms.
Question
Think of some situations other than those mentioned above in which private costs differ from social costs and private benefits differ from social benefits. How might these differences be prevented or compensated for in each situation?
2.3 Externalities
Key term
Externalities are the spill-over effects of a transaction which extend beyond the parties to the transaction and affect society as a whole. In other words, externalities are the differences between the private and the social costs, or benefits, arising from an activity. An 'externality' is a cost or benefit which the market mechanism fails to take into account, because the market responds purely to private signals. So far we have looked at the price mechanism as being driven purely by the costs and benefits accruing to the parties to the transaction. However, if pricing policy is to maximise net social benefit then it also needs to include externalities when calculating costs. We can use demand and supply analysis to illustrate the consequences of externalities. If an adverse externality exists, (the social cost of supplying a good is greater than the private cost to the supplier firm), then a supply curve which reflects total social costs will be above the (private cost) market supply curve. Figure 1 shows two possibilities. (a) (b) If a free market exists, the amount of the good produced will be determined by the interaction of demand (curve D) and supply curve S. Here, output would be Y, at price Py If social costs are taken into account, and the market operated successfully, the supply curve should shift leftwards, and the amount of the good produced should be X, at price Px.
As we will see in detail in a later chapter, the profit maximising level of production for a firm (and therefore the level of production a firm will aim for) is that where marginal cost equals marginal revenue. If a firm's private costs are adjusted to take account of social costs, its optimum level of production will still occur when MC = MR, but now marginal cost also includes the cost to society of producing an extra unit of output. This is the concept of social marginal costs.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 6: Market failures, externalities and intervention
123
Price Q = supply curve reflecting the total social cost PX PY E S = supply curve reflecting the private cost for the industry
Quantity
Figure 1 Externalities Given a free market, output of the good will exceed what it ideally should be (by Y X in Figure 1 above), and so resources will have been over-allocated to production of this particular good.
Key term
Merit goods are considered to be worth providing to everyone irrespective of whether everyone can afford to pay for them, because their consumption is in the long-term public interest. Education is one of the chief examples of a merit good.
124
6: Market failures, externalities and intervention Part B The market system and the competitive process
Merit goods are different from public goods in that they are divisible. For example, some consumers possess the means to buy merit goods, such as education and healthcare, and they are willing to do so. However, while the people who choose to pay for the good will benefit from it, in doing so they will use up the supply of the good, so that free riders cannot also benefit from it. Although national governments provide a service of merit goods in the interests of the nation's well-being, the private sector provides an alternative supply of them for example, in the UK there are private schools, and private health care schemes which consumers pay to use. However, what distinguishes a merit good from a public good is that where people have elected for a private supply the benefit is restricted to them. Thus only people who pay for private schools or private health care will benefit from them. Because merit goods provided by the state are offered on a large scale, governments can achieve economies of scale in their provision. Governments also provide merit goods (such as education and health) because it is in the nation's interests as a whole that such things are provided. On the other hand, many governments want to see less consumption of certain demerit goods, such as tobacco. Apart from providing public goods and merit goods, a government might choose to intervene in the workings of markets by other methods. (a) (b) Controlling the means of production (for example, through state ownership of industries) Influencing markets through legislation and regulation (regulation of monopolies, bans on dangerous drugs, enforcement of the use of some goods such as car seat belts, laws on pollution control and so on) or by persuasion (for example, using anti-tobacco advertising) Redistributing wealth, perhaps by taxing relatively wealthy members of society and redistributing this tax income so as to benefit the poorer members Influencing market supply and demand through: (i) (ii) (iii) (e) Price legislation Indirect taxation Subsidies
(c) (d)
Creating a demand for output that creates employment. A free market system would match supply with demand. Demand would thus lead to employment because of the needs of suppliers, but the level of demand might not be high enough to ensure full employment. Government might therefore wish to intervene to create a demand for output in order to create more jobs.
Some externalities, particularly the problems of pollution and the environment, appear to call for co-operation between governments. The Kyoto Protocol adopted in 1997 aimed to stabilise the levels of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere to control the threat of global warming. By 2009, over 180 countries had ratified the treaty.
Question
Pollution
An industrial company alters its production methods to reduce the amount of waste discharged from its factory into the local river. What will be the effect (increase or decrease) on: (a) (b) Private costs External benefits
Part B The market system and the competitive process 6: Market failures, externalities and intervention
125
Answer
(a) (b) Private costs of the company will presumably increase: the anti-pollution measures will have involved a financial outlay. External benefits will presumably increase: the public will benefit from a cleaner river.
Tradable permits
126
6: Market failures, externalities and intervention Part B The market system and the competitive process
Demand and supply analysis can be used to examine the effects on a market of imposing an indirect tax or a subsidy.
The supply curve without any tax is S0 The supply curve including the cost of the tax is S1 The tax is equal to P1 P2 or the distance A B.
Before the tax was imposed, quantity supplied and demanded was X0, but once the tax has been imposed, the equilibrium quantity is only X1. At this point (demand = X1), the price the consumer pays is P1, but the amount that the supplier receives is only P2. P1 P2 is the amount of tax payable.
Price S1 S0
P1 P0 P2
A C B D T
X1
X0
Quantity
Part B The market system and the competitive process 6: Market failures, externalities and intervention
127
Without the tax, output would be X0 and price P0. Total expenditure (before the tax was imposed) can be shown by the rectangle OP0TX0. (a) (b) After the tax has been imposed, output falls to X1 and price with tax rises to P1. Total expenditure is OP1AX1, of which P2P1AB is tax revenue and OP2BX1 is producers' total revenue. A new price equilibrium arises at point A. (i) (ii) (iii) Price to the customer has risen from P0 to P1. Average revenue received by producers has fallen from P0 to P2. The tax burden is shared between the producers and consumers, with CB borne by the supplier and AC borne by consumers.
Consumers pay P0P1AC of total tax revenue and producers pay P2P0CB.
P1
Q2
Q1
Quantity
Q1
Quantity
Question
Burden of taxation
Try to work out yourself (from general principles, or from study of Figure 3) who bears the burden of taxation in each of these extreme cases.
128
6: Market failures, externalities and intervention Part B The market system and the competitive process
Answer
In Figure 3(a), with perfectly elastic demand, demand falls to zero if the price is raised. Consequently, the supplier must bear the full burden of the tax. In spite of the imposition of the tax, the market price remains the same but there is a fall in the quantity supplied from Q1 to Q2. The supplier only receives P2 after paying P1 P2 in tax. In the case of perfectly inelastic demand (Figure 3(b)), the supplier can pass on the full amount of the tax to the consumer by increasing the price from P1 to P2. Demand is not reduced at all by the increase in price. Because the supplier can charge a higher amount to compensate for the tax payable, the quantity supplied remains unchanged.
The elasticity of supply is also relevant. Figure 4 shows that for a given demand curve, the more inelastic the supply curve, the greater the proportion of the tax that is borne by the supplier. (a) Figure 4(a) shows a relatively inelastic supply curve (S). Imposition of the tax shifts the supply curve vertically upwards to S1 and the equilibrium price rises from P1 to P2. The price to the consumer rises by AB per unit, while the supply price to the producer falls by BC per unit. Thus, the greater burden is borne by the supplier (because the distance BC is greater than the distance AB). By contrast, Figure 4(b) shows a relatively elastic supply curve S. With the imposition of the tax, the supply curve shifts to S1 and the equilibrium price rises to P2. The price to the consumer rises by AB per unit, and the supply price to the producer falls by BC per unit. The greater burden is borne by the consumer (because AB is greater than BC).
(b)
So, Figure 4 shows that the consumer bears a greater proportion of the tax burden the more elastic is the supply curve. Figure 4 also shows that, for any given demand curve, the price rise and the fall in the equilibrium quantity will also both be greater when the supply curve is elastic than when it is inelastic.
(a) Price D S1 Tax Price S (b) D
Part B The market system and the competitive process 6: Market failures, externalities and intervention
129
It is also important to consider the relationship between the elasticity of demand and the elasticity of supply when assessing how the burden of tax will be split between producer and consumer.
Figure 5: The effect of the relative elasticities of supply and demand If demand is less elastic than supply Figure 5(a) the consumer will bear the greater proportion of the tax burden. If demand is more elastic than supply Figure 5(b) the producer will bear the greater proportion of the tax burden.
Make sure you know how the relative elasticities of supply and demand affect the way the burden of tax is distributed between producers and consumers. As a final point on this topic, though, be aware that while an indirect tax can help adjust for externalities, it could affect the competiveness of individual firms or industries. Since such a tax reduces output, it may be harmful to an industry. For some companies, the reduction in quantities produced may lead to significant rises in the unit costs of production. This could have adverse consequences on the competitive position of the firm if it competes (either domestically or internationally) with foreign firms which are not subject to the same tax.
3.3 Subsidies
A subsidy is a payment to the supplier of a good by the government. The payment may be made for a variety of reasons. (a) (b) (c) To encourage more production of the good, by offering a further incentive to suppliers To keep prices lower for socially desirable goods whose production the government wishes to encourage To protect a vital industry such as agriculture, when demand in the short term is low and threatening to cause an excessive contraction of the industry.
130
6: Market failures, externalities and intervention Part B The market system and the competitive process
Price
S0 S1
P0 P2 P1 Subsidy
B D
Q0
Q2
Quantity
In Figure 6, supply curve S0 shows what the supply would be if no subsidy existed. Payment of the subsidy moves the supply curve downwards (outwards) to S1.
If there were no subsidy, the free market equilibrium price would be P0, and output Q0. A subsidy per unit equivalent to AB is introduced, such that suppliers would now be willing to produce Q0 at a lower price (P1 rather than at P0). In other words, the supply curve shifts outwards from S0 to S1. As a result, there will be a shift in the equilibrium quantity produced to Q2, which can be sold on the market for P2. Thus, the subsidy will have two effects.
The amount supplied in equilibrium will increase (from Q0 to Q2). The price will fall (from P0 to P2), but the decrease in price will be less than the value of the subsidy itself (P0 P1).
Question
By reference to Figure 6, analyse the extent to which the benefit of the subsidy falls to: (a) (b) The consumer The supplier
Subsidy
Answer
The benefit of the subsidy will be shared between the consumer and the supplier. (a) (b) Consumers benefit by the lowering of prices from P0 to P2. Suppliers benefit because although they receive a lower price, P2, they receive the subsidy AB per unit.
The cost of the subsidy is borne by the government (in effect, the taxpayer).
Part B The market system and the competitive process 6: Market failures, externalities and intervention
131
Chapter roundup
Free markets may not lead to an ideal allocation of resources, and there are various methods of regulating markets. Note the following concepts. Market failure: the failure of a market to produce a satisfactory allocation of scarce resources. Social costs: the total costs to society as a whole of using economic resources. Social benefits: the total gains to society as a whole flowing from an economic decision. Externalities: the differences between private and social costs. Public goods: goods which cannot be provided privately because if they are provided, all will benefit from them, regardless of whether they have paid for them or not. As a result, individuals would have no incentive to pay for these goods. Merit goods: goods which need to be provided in the long-term public interest.
Demand and supply analysis can be used to examine the effects on a market of imposing an indirect tax or a subsidy.
Quick quiz
1 2 3 4 5 What is the general case in favour of allowing a free market to operate? What is market failure, and what are its main causes? What is an externality? List the various forms of government intervention in markets. Which of the following are imperfections in a market? 1 2 3 A B C D 6 1 2 3 A B C D Consumer brand loyalty to a firm's branded goods, regardless of price; The lack of completely accurate information for consumers about all goods and services available; The slow response of firms to price changes and the relatively inelastic supply of a good in the short run. Items 1 and 2 only Items 2 and 3 only Items 1 and 3 only Items 1, 2 and 3 It only reflects private costs and private benefits; It may lead to serious inequalities in the distribution of income and wealth; It may lead to production inefficiencies and a wastage of resources. 1 and 2 only 2 and 3 only 1 and 3 only 1, 2 and 3
132
6: Market failures, externalities and intervention Part B The market system and the competitive process
Muddy Waters Co is an industrial company which has altered its production methods so that it has reduced the amount of waste discharged from its factory into the local river. Which of the following is most likely to be reduced? A B C D Total private costs Social costs External benefit Variable costs
Much Wapping is a small town where a municipal swimming pool and sports centre have just been built by a private firm, Builder Co. Which of the following is an external benefit of the project? A B C D The increased trade of local shops The increased traffic in the neighbourhood The increased profits for the sports firm The increased building on previous open land
The government has just increased the tax on tobacco. Assuming that the demand for cigarettes is completely inelastic, who pays the tax? A B C D It is shared between supplier and consumer in proportions equal to the relative prices before and after the increase. The supplier The consumer It is shared between supplier and consumer in proportions equal to the relative quantities sold before and after the increase.
10
Which of the following statements is always true if an indirect tax is imposed on a good or service: A B C D The price will rise by an amount equal to the tax The producer will bear more of the tax than the consumer The price rise will be smaller the greater the price elasticity of demand is The price rise will be greater the greater the price elasticity of demand is
Part B The market system and the competitive process 6: Market failures, externalities and intervention
133
Question numbers 24 28
Page 431
134
6: Market failures, externalities and intervention Part B The market system and the competitive process
Topic list 1 The firm's output decision 2 Equilibrium un der perfect competitio n 3 Equilibrium for a monopo ly 4 More about monopoly
135
The assumption of profit maximisation provides a basis for beginning to look at the output decisions of individual firms. A firm will maximise its profits where its marginal costs equal marginal revenue (MC = MR).
Price = AR = MR PN
Figure 1
Figure 2
In Figure 2, with straight line MR and AR curves, the length OX is exactly half of the length OY.
Figure 2 is a very important diagram and forms the basis of other more detailed illustrations. Make sure you understand the principles behind Figure 2.
136
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Note that in Figure 2, at any given level of sales, all units are sold at the same price. The firm has to reduce its selling price to sell more, but the price must be reduced for all units sold, not just for the extra units. This is because we are assuming that all output is produced for a single market, where a single price will prevail. When the price per unit has to be reduced in order to increase the firm's sales, the marginal revenue can become negative. This happens in Figure 2 at prices below PN when a reduction in price does not increase output sufficiently to earn the same total revenue as before. In this situation, demand would be price inelastic. We can illustrate this by using an example. The figures below illustrate the relationship between price (average revenue), total revenue and marginal revenue. Note that although reducing the price from 5 to 4 generates an additional unit of sales (from 6 to 7), the fact that the sale price of all the initial 6 units has also been reduced from 5 to 4 means that total revenue falls as a result. Average revenue (AR) price 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Units sold 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Total revenue (TR) 0 10 18 24 28 30 30 28 Marginal revenue (MR) 0 10 8 6 4 2 0 2
1.3 Profit
We have defined profit as total revenue (TR) minus total cost (TC). (a) Figure 3 shows, in simplified form, how TR and TC vary with output. As you might expect, TC increases as output rises. The effect of increasing marginal cost (caused by diminishing returns) is that the rise in TC accelerates as output increases and so the TC curve becomes steeper. Conversely, the gradient of the TR curve reduces as output and sales increase. This is because most firms operate under the conditions illustrated in Figure 2. That is to say, they must reduce their prices in order to sell more. The rate of growth of TR therefore declines. Notice carefully that the vertical axis of Figure 3 shows total values whereas in Figures 1 and 2, it shows value per unit. Profits are at a maximum where the vertical distance AB between the TR and TC curves is greatest.
(b)
(c) (d)
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
137
Revenue/ cost TC
TR A
Total profit
Output
The identification of the profit-maximising output (MC = MR) is a crucial concept in economics. Make sure you remember this. (d) Figures 4 and 5 show the profit maximising output quantity M for the two types of firm shown in Figures 1 and 2. In both cases, the firm increases its profit with each extra item it produces until output M is reached, because MR>MC when output is less than M. At output M, the MC and MR curves cross. The addition to total revenue from subsequent units will be less than the increase in total cost which they cause. This level of output, M, corresponds to the level M shown in Figure 3.
138
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
$ Per unit
$ Per unit
In other words, given the objective of profit maximisation there are three possibilities: (a) (b) (c) If MC is less than MR, profits will be increased by making and selling more. If MC is greater than MR, profits will fall if more units are made and sold, and a profit-maximising firm would not make the extra output. In other words, if MC > MR a firm will look to reduce output. If MC = MR, the profit-maximising output has been reached, and so this is the output quantity that a profit-maximising firm will decide to supply.
Question
The following data refer to the revenue and costs of a firm. Output 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Required (a) (b) (c) Total revenue $ 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Total costs $ 110 140 162 175 180 185 194 229 269 325 425
Calculate the marginal revenue for the firm. Calculate the firm's fixed costs and the marginal cost at each level of output. What level of output will the firm aim to produce and what amount of profit will it make at this level?
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
139
Answer
Total revenue (TR) $ 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 (a) Marginal revenue TRn TR(n-1) $ 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Total costs (TC) $ 110 140 162 175 180 185 194 229 269 325 425 (b) Marginal costs TCn TC(n-1) $ 30 22 13 5 5 9 35 40 56 100 Total profit TR TC $ (110) (90) (62) (25) 20 65 106 122 131(max) 125 75
Output 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (a)
Marginal revenue is the incremental revenue which results from the sale of the last unit of output. The figures in the table above show that marginal revenue is a constant $50 at all levels of output given. This means that average revenue (price) must also be a constant $50.
(b)
The fixed costs of the firm are those costs which do not vary with output. The level of fixed costs are therefore the total costs of $110 at the output level of zero. Marginal cost is the change in total cost arising from the production of the last unit of output. The marginal cost for each level of output is shown in the table.
(c)
The firm will seek to maximise profits by producing at a level of output at which marginal cost equals marginal revenue. It can be seen from the table that this occurs between output level 8 (marginal cost: $40) and output level 9 (marginal cost: $56). Whether the firm can produce output between the values 8 and 9 will depend on the nature of the product. For whole units of output, total profit (total revenues minus total costs) is maximised at an output of 8, where total profit is $131.
140
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
$ per unit
MC
AC
Figure 6 Profit maximisation and breakeven positions In economic terms, the breakeven point also represents the point at which a firm is making a normal profit. Ultimately, the amount of profit a firm makes, and whether it is normal or supernormal, depends on the market structure in which the firm is operating, and the time period (short run or long run) under review. We shall return to both of these points about market structure and time period later.
In perfectly competitive markets, firms are price takers, and so their decisions are concerned with what output level will maximise profits. In imperfect competition, firms can influence the market price, and so their decisions are about what price to set as well as what volumes of output to produce. Pure monopoly is an extreme form of imperfect competition.
Characteristics of perfect competition There are a large number of buyers and sellers in the market. Firms are 'price takers', unable to influence the market price individually. Buyers and sellers can trade as much as they want at the prevailing market price, as determined by the interaction of supply and demand.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
141
Producers and consumers have the same, perfect, information about the product and the market. The product is homogeneous: one unit of the product is the same as any other unit. There is free entry of firms into and free exit of firms out of the market: there are no barriers to entry. There are also no restrictions on the mobility of factors of production. There are no transport costs or information gathering costs. Producers and consumers act rationally. This means that producers will always try to maximise profits. Normal profits are earned in the long run.
You should be familiar with the assumptions of the 'perfect competition' model for your assessment.
Question
Perfect market?
Think about the market for a particular product say motor cars. To what extent is this market 'perfect', as defined by the criteria above?
Answer
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) There is a huge number of buyers, and many sellers too. For any given model of car, a particular dealer is likely to be a price taker. Communication is generally good. Product features are well known and list prices are freely available. And discount levels too are widely commented on, in the press and by word of mouth. The product is very far from homogeneous: different makes and models of car differ significantly from one another. Entry to the market is not easy, whether we are talking about manufacturers of motor cars (very high startup costs), or dealers. Transport costs are not absent. On the contrary, significant geographical price differentiation is possible because of the high transport costs involved. Consumers dont always act rationally. Some might be attracted to a car with a higher price, even if it is no better than other cheaper cars. Some may not shop around at different dealers even though it could save them money. Manufacturers can sustain large accounting profits in the long run, so it is likely these are supernormal economic profits.
(g)
142
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
P1
A E
Q1
Output
Figure 7 Supernormal profits in the short run Figure 7 also shows the average total cost curve (ATC) and the marginal cost curve (MC), with the MC cutting the ATC at the lowest point of the ATC. Given these cost curves and the demand curve D1, the firm will produce the output Q1, where the MC curves cuts the MR horizontal curve at the point C. This is the profit maximising level of output (MC = MR). Note, however, that the profit maximising level of output is not the same as the level of technical efficiency. This would occur at output E, where average cost (ATC) is at its minimum. By definition, technical efficiency is achieved when a firm is producing the level of output at which its average costs are minimised. At Q1, on Figure 7, average revenue is greater than average cost, so the firm is making supernormal profits indicated by the rectangle ABCD. These supernormal profits will attract new firms into the industry and the price will be bid down. This new position is illustrated in Figure 8, where the new price is P2. Here, instead of making a profit, the firm makes a loss shown by the rectangle WXYZ. Once again the firm produces where MC = MR giving an output of Q2. A firm could choose to do this for a short period so long as revenues covered its variable costs; in this case MC=MR is the loss minimising position rather than the profit maximising position.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
143
Price MC ATC
P2
D2 = MR 2
Q2
Output
Figure 8 Losses in the short run In the long run, whenever profits are being made, new firms will enter the industry increasing supply and causing the price will fall. Similarly, when losses are made, firms will leave the industry and the price will rise. If profits are not 'normal', they act as a signal to producers to transfer resources into, or out of, an industry.
Question
In conditions of perfect competition, the demand curve for a firm's product is: (a) (b) Identical to the firm's marginal revenue curve. True or false? Perfectly inelastic. True or false?
Perfect competition
Answer
(a) (b) True. The firm can sell whatever output it produces at the market price. (D = AR = MR) False. (a) above implies that the demand curve is perfectly elastic.
Importantly though, it is only the demand curve for the firm which is horizontal because of the firm's position as a price taker. The demand curve facing the industry may not be horizontal. Its elasticity will vary according to the industry, but it is usually drawn as the normal downward-sloping demand curve. Similarly, market supply is shown in the traditional way, as an upward-slowing curve. The demand and supply diagram for the industry is shown as figure 9 below.
144
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Price S
Quantity
Figure 9: Supply and demand in a perfectly competitive industry The industry supply and demand model also explains why a firm in a perfectly competitive industry can go from making a supernormal profit to making a loss (Figures 7 & 8 above) as new firms enter the industry. The introduction of new producers leads to an outward shift in the industry supply curve from S to S1. (Figure 10). This shift causes price to fall from P1 to P2 meaning that the individual firm, which takes the market price, moves from making a supernormal profit (Figure 7) to a loss (Figure 8).
Price S S1
P1 P2
Q1
Q2
Quantity
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
be established where there is just enough profit (normal profit) to keep existing firms in the industry. There is no incentive for firms to enter or leave the industry. This long-term position is illustrated in Figure 11. Note the following points about Figure 11. (a) (b) The market price, P, is the price which all individual firms in the market must take. If the firm must accept a given MR (as it must in conditions of perfect competition) and it sets MR = MC, then the MC curve is in effect the individual firm's supply curve (Figure 11(b)). The market supply curve in Figure 11(a) is derived by aggregating the individual supply curves of every firm in the industry. Consumer surplus is represented by the area to the left of the demand curve above P. The firm is operating at its most cost-effective point (the lowest point on the AC curve).
Market demand S Market supply
Consumer surplus
(c) (d) ( )
MC AC
MR = AR = D
Qm
Qf
(b)
Figure 11(b) also shows us that the individual firm's equilibrium position occurs where price equals marginal cost. Since price is a measure of the value of the good to a consumer, and marginal cost measures the cost to the producer of attracting resources from alternative uses, then the price of the last unit of output is equal to the opportunity cost of its production. This signifies that allocative efficiency is being achieved. The long-run equilibrium position under perfect competition is unique because it is the only market condition which achieves allocative efficiency. In the long run, all firms in the industry will have MR = MC = AC = AR = price, as at output Qf in Figure 11(b). Because this position earns the entrepreneur the desired return on their capital (normal profit), ensures allocative efficiency, and means that firms operate their most cost-effective point, long-run equilibrium under perfect competition is held to be a desirable model for an economy.
This explanation of long run equilibrium under perfect competition and the accompanying diagrams are fundamental knowledge.
Question
A perfectly competitive firm will be in equilibrium where price is equal to marginal cost. True or false?
146
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Answer
True. Under perfect competition, price, average revenue and marginal revenue are all the same. Therefore, given that the firm will be in equilibrium at MC = MR, MC is also equal to price.
Question
Small firm
A small perfectly competitive firm manufactures 200 wooden garden benches each month which it sells for $40 each. The table below shows the firm's costs. Total variable cost Marginal cost Total fixed cost What should the firm do in the short term? A B C D Increase output Cease production Lower its price Maintain output at its present level $7,200 $40 $1,800
Answer
D The firm is producing and selling at a level of output where marginal cost ($40) is equal to marginal revenue ($40). It is therefore already maximising its profit or minimising its loss. Its monthly total revenue is $40 200 units = $8,000. This covers the variable costs and makes a contribution of $800 towards its fixed costs. Ceasing production would cause this contribution to be lost. There would be no point to reducing price since under perfect competition it can sell as much as it can produce at the prevailing market price. Equally, there would be no point increasing output, because if the firm increased production, it would find that its marginal cost rose.
Firms will generally try to earn supernormal profits if they can. Competition, though, tends to erode supernormal profits, and firms may have to be satisfied, when equilibrium is reached, with just normal profits. The ability to sustain supernormal profits depends on the nature of competition in the industry.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
147
In practice, legislation often deems a firm in the private sector to be a monopoly once its market share exceeds a certain level. In the UK, a firm is deemed to hold a monopoly if its market share exceeds 25%. (However, this definition can be problematic in economics, because it would also include duopolists and some oligopolists). A firm's monopolistic position may result from some natural factor which makes it too costly for another firm to enter the industry. For example, in the domestic water supply industry it will normally be too costly for a second firm to lay a second water supply system to compete for part of the business of an existing sole supplier: the sole supplier enjoys a natural monopoly. In other cases, a monopoly may be formed by mergers of a number of firms in an industry. However it is formed, a monopoly can only exist if potential competitors are kept out of the market by barriers to entry. (We will look at potential barriers to entry later.) For a monopoly, the total market supply is identical to the single firm's supply, and the average revenue curve in monopoly is the same as the total market demand curve. A monopolist can either be a price maker (and thus a quantity taker) or set quantity (and take the equilibrium price which results). However, it cannot fix both price and quantity because it cannot control market demand. If price must be reduced to increase unit sales, average revenue is falling and marginal revenue will always be lower than average revenue. If the monopolist increases output by one unit, the price per unit received will fall, so the extra revenue generated by the sale of the extra unit of the good is less than the price of that unit. The monopolist therefore faces a downward sloping AR curve with an MR curve below the AR curve (Figure 12). For any given price, AR is double the MR on straight-line average revenue curves.
Price
PX MR X PY PZ MR Y AR
MR Z
MR
Output
Figure 12 A monopolist's average revenue (AR) and marginal revenue (MR) curves Marginal revenue can be negative. This occurs when demand is price inelastic and, although lowering the price increases sales demand, the volume increase is proportionately less than the price decrease and so total revenue falls.
Question Answer
Study the diagram in Figure 12 above. At what price and output level would the firm maximise its sales revenue?
At the point where MR = 0. Price PZ and output Z. Further sales will lead to negative MR, and hence a reduction in total revenue.
148
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
It is important that you should understand what the MR and AR (demand) curves are showing us in Figure 12. (a) At output quantity X, the marginal revenue earned from the last unit produced and sold is MRX, but the price at which all the X units would be sold is PX. This is found by looking at the price level on the AR curve associated with output X. Similarly, at output quantity Y, the marginal revenue from the last unit produced and sold is MRY, but the price at which all Y units would be sold on the market is, from the AR curve for Y output, PY. At output Z, the marginal revenue from the last unit produced is zero, and the price at which all Z units would be sold is Pz. Total revenue will be maximised at Z. If any more units are sold, MR will be negative, thereby reducing total revenue.
(b) (c)
AR = Demand
Q1 MR
Output
Figure 13 Equilibrium of a monopoly firm earning normal profits In this situation, the monopoly will make a loss by producing at output higher than Q, and so it will have to produce at an output level which is well below the capacity at which its average costs are minimised (output Q1). Monopolies are usually able to earn 'monopoly' or supernormal profits in the long run as well as the short run, and the situation illustrated in Figure 13 will be rare for a monopoly, although (as we shall see later in this Study Text) this is a long-run equilibrium situation for firms in the type of market structure known as monopolistic competition.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
149
In perfect competition, a firm will not be able to earn supernormal profits in the long run because they would be 'competed away' by new entrants to the industry. However, a monopoly firm can earn supernormal profits in the long run as well as in the short run, because there are barriers to entry which prevent rivals entering the market.
Figure 14 Monopolist's short-run equilibrium In Figure 14, the monopolist's profit is maximised at output QM, where marginal cost (MC) equals marginal revenue (MR), and the price charged is the average revenue PM. The monopolist is earning supernormal profits represented by the rectangular area PM ZYX.
150
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
MR O QM QPC
Figure 15 Monopoly and perfect competition compared The monopoly restricts output and raises price compared to levels under perfect competition. Under perfect competition output of QPC would be produced at a price of PPC. Under monopoly, however, output of QM would be produced at a price of PM. Under perfect competition, the area CBPpc would constitute consumer surplus. Under monopoly, with price PM being charged, this is reduced to CZPM. Part of the consumer surplus has been transformed into super normal profit. The small triangular area ZBA is called the dead weight loss due to monopoly, since it is a benefit totally lost.
Monopolists are able to use price discrimination to sell the same product at different prices in different markets.
Question Answer
You might have thought of:
Price discrimination
You are likely to have encountered examples of price discrimination in practice. Can you recall any?
Telephone calls (different prices for peak and off-peak calls) Rail travel (there are many different tickets you can buy for an identical journey) Package holidays (more expensive during school holidays)
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
151
Four basic conditions are necessary for price discrimination to be effective and profitable. (a) (b) The seller must be able to control the supply of the product and keep out any competitors who could undercut the premium price. To this extent, the market must be imperfect. There must be at least two distinct markets with no cross-over between them. For example, a rail fare will either be for a peak time or off-peak. If a customer buys an off-peak fare he or she cannot use it during a peak period. The seller must be able to prevent the resale of the good by one buyer to another. The markets must, therefore, be clearly separated so that those paying lower prices cannot resell to those paying higher prices. The ability to prevent resale tends to be associated with the character of the product, or the ability to classify buyers into readily identifiable groups. Services are less easily resold than goods while transportation costs, tariff barriers or import quotas may separate classes of buyers geographically and thus make price discrimination possible. There must be significant differences in the willingness to pay among the different classes of buyers. In effect this means that the elasticity of demand must be different in at least two of the separate markets so that total profits may be increased by charging different prices.
(c)
(d)
A monopolist can increase its supernormal profit by selling more of its output in the market which is most inelastic. We can illustrate this as in Figure 16 below. The diagram on the left illustrates a market with inelastic demand, the diagram on the right illustrates a market with elastic demand. In each market, the profit maximising output is determined by MC = MR, and costs are assumed to be the same in both markets. Price (P1) is higher in Market 1 because demand is more inelastic than in Market 2, and the supplier makes more profit in Market 1 than Market 2. This is part of the logic behind price discrimination. Separating a product into different markets with different elasticities allows the monopolist to increase profits by charging higher prices in the market with inelastic demand. Market 1
Price MC P1 Profit Price
Market 2
MC AC AC P2 Profit
AR
MR 0 Q1
AR Quantity 0 Q2
MR Quantity
152
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Figure 17 Price discrimination Figure 17 demonstrates firstly the equilibrium position of a monopolist who does not discriminate. He produces at the point C where marginal cost equals marginal revenue, producing output Q3 and selling at price P. His total revenue is given by the rectangle OPBQ3. Figure 17 also illustrates how the monopolist can improve on this position, both from the point of increased revenue and increased profits. The discriminating monopolist does not charge the same price for all units sold. If we assume that the monopolist can discriminate perfectly, then he can sell each unit for a different price as indicated on the demand curve. Thus he can sell the first unit Q1 at the price P1, and the second unit Q2 at the price P2. This follows for all units sold so that the demand curve now becomes the marginal revenue curve; each extra unit sold is sold for the price indicated on the demand curve, each previous unit being sold for the higher price relevant to that unit. The perfectly discriminating monopolist will still maximise profits by producing at the level of output where MC = MR, but the marginal revenue curve is the demand curve D. The perfectly discriminating monopolist therefore produces at the point E where marginal cost equals the new marginal revenue, producing Q4 units. Recall that the total revenue for the non-discriminating monopolist by producing at the level of output was equivalent to area OPBQ3. The additional revenue of the discriminating monopolist is represented by the areas APB plus Q3BEQ4. The discriminating monopolist has thus maximised his revenue (consistent of course with maximising his profit). If the monopolist did not wish to maximise profit but wished simply to maximise revenue he would expand production to the point Q5 when his total revenue would be the area OAQ5. Take care not to confuse maximising revenue with maximising profit. Increasing output beyond Q4, in the example of Figure 17, will not increase profit as marginal costs exceed marginal revenue for each additional unit sold.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
153
Time Markets may be separated by a time barrier, for example where the cost of telephone calls varies according to the time of day at which they are made. Rail operating companies charge cheaper rates for off peak travel. Holiday companies charging a higher price for a given holiday at certain times of the year is another example. These are examples of services which cannot be transferred from the cheaper to the more expensive market, because they are defined by the time period to which they relate. User groups Price discrimination also occurs where it is possible to separate customers into clearly defined groups. Industrial users of gas and electricity are able to purchase these fuels more cheaply than are domestic users. Similarly milk is sold more cheaply to industrial users, for example for making into cheese or ice cream, than to private households. Income A third way price discrimination can be applied is on the basis of income (for example, concessionary travel fares offered to students). Place Finally, price discrimination could be applied according to place for example, banks offering different interest rates for on-line accounts compared to high street only accounts.
Question Answer
(a)
Price discrimination
Explain why it is possible for a railway or airline to charge different fares for passengers using the same service.
The nature of the good. Prices can be varied according to the time of day or day of the week because there are distinct business and leisure markets. Many customers will be forced to travel at peak times and pay top prices and some will switch to travelling at a cheaper time when the railway or airline has spare capacity to be filled up. Demand for journeys at peak times will be relatively inelastic, since demand will be from commuters who must travel in these periods in order to reach their workplace on time. Demand for leisure journeys is much more elastic. The seller can prevent the resale of tickets. A cheaper rate might be offered to children. Since a child cannot transfer his ticket to an adult there is no danger that adults can buy cheaper tickets by using children to obtain tickets on their behalf. Geographical separation of market segments: a railway can sell cheap travel to customers travelling from say, Manchester to London, but still charge full rates to customers travelling from London to Manchester.
(b)
(c)
Monopoly may be beneficial (because of economies of scale) or harmful (because they restrict output and raise prices). Government policies have been directed at the harmful aspects of monopoly. Rather than keeping nationalised monopolies in public ownership, the UK government has privatised them, setting up consumer watchdog bodies to regulate the newly privatised industries. We have identified two key characteristics of monopolies: (a) A monopolist is likely to produce less output but charge a higher price for it than a comparable firm operating in conditions of perfect competition, unless the monopolist can achieve economies of scale that a smaller firm could not. This leads to the monopolist earning extra profits and also a social cost or deadweight burden of monopoly.
154
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
(b)
These two points might suggest that monopolies are a bad thing. But there are economic arguments both for and against monopolies.
It may be that monopolies encourage complacency about costs (X-inefficiency) and may produce allocative and technical inefficiency. Goals other than profit maximisation pursued in large companies could also result in inefficiencies. Arguments against monopolies include the following. (a) The profit-maximising output of a monopoly is at a point where total market output is lower and prices are higher than they would be under perfect competition. Consumer surplus is also reduced under monopoly compared to perfect competition, suggesting that the monopolist is benefiting at the expense of society as a whole. Monopolies do not achieve allocative efficiency since the prices they charge are greater than marginal cost. Monopolies do not use resources in the most efficient way possible (technical efficiency). Efficient use of resources can be defined as combining factors of production so as to minimise average unit costs. The profit-maximising output of a monopoly is not where average costs (AC) are minimised, and so monopolies are not efficient producers. Monopolists can carry out restrictive practices, such as price discrimination, to increase their supernormal profits.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
(b) (c)
(d)
155
(e)
The higher prices and supernormal profits encourage firms in competitive markets to want to become monopolies, and they can do this by trying to create product differentiation, by introducing differences between their own products and the products of rival competitors. These differences might be real product design or quality differences, or imaginary differences created by a brand name and a brand image. This can be beneficial for producers, but at the expense of consumers. Because they are not threatened by competition and can earn supernormal profits, monopolies might become slack about cost control, so that they fail to achieve the lowest unit costs they ought to be capable of. They may also adopt a complacent attitude to innovation. Because a monopolist is able to maintain supernormal profits in the long run (due to barriers to entry) it has less need to innovate than a firm operating in a more competitive market would have. Monopolies might stifle competition, by taking over smaller competitors who try to enter the market or by exploiting barriers to entry against other firms trying to enter the market. If a monopoly controls a vital resource, it might make decisions which are damaging to the public interest. This is why the government often chooses to put vital industries under state control (for example, health care, the fire service and the nuclear power industry in the UK at the time of writing). There might be diseconomies of scale in a large monopoly firm.
(f)
(g) (h)
(i)
(b)
(c)
(d) (e)
(f)
156
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
(g)
Geographical barriers. In remote areas, the transport costs involved for a supplier to enter a market may prevent it from entering that market. For example, in the UK, local village shops have historically had a local monopoly, although the barriers to entry to such a market have been weakened by the growth of the internet and online shopping.
(b)
AC 2
Q2
Q1
Output
Output
(a) Figure 18
Technical inefficiency
(b)
X-inefficiency
All monopolies might be accused of some X-inefficiency, but there has been a view that state owned monopolies have a tendency to be more X-inefficient than monopolies which are private companies. This may be because state-owned monopolies have different objectives from those of private sector organisations.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
157
Chapter roundup
The assumption of profit maximisation provides a basis for beginning to look at the output decisions of individual firms. A firm will maximise its profits where its marginal costs equal marginal revenues (MC = MR). In perfectly competitive markets, firms are price takers, and so their decisions are concerned with what output level will maximise profits. In imperfect competition, firms can influence the market price, and so their decisions are about what price to set as well as what volumes of output to produce. Pure monopoly is an extreme form of imperfect competition. Firms will generally try to earn supernormal profits if they can. Competition, though, tends to erode supernormal profits, and firms may have to be satisfied, when equilibrium is reached, with just normal profits. The ability to sustain supernormal profits depends on the nature of competition in the industry. Monopolists are able to use price discrimination to sell the same product at different prices in different markets. Monopoly may be beneficial (because of economies of scale) or harmful because they restrict output and raises prices. Government policies have been directed at the harmful aspects of monopoly. Rather than keeping nationalised monopolies in public ownership, the UK government has privatised them, setting up consumer watchdog bodies to regulate the newly privatised industries. It may be that monopolies encourage complacency about costs (X-inefficiency) and may produce allocative and technical inefficiency. Goals other than profit maximisation pursued in large companies could also result in inefficiencies.
Quick quiz
1 In what way does monopoly differ from perfect competition? In a monopoly: A B C D 2 3 4 Products are differentiated Supernormal profit is possible in the short run There are barriers to entry There are economies of scale
How can a firm in perfect competition make supernormal profits? What is price discrimination? The necessary conditions for a firm to be able to discriminate on price are: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) A B C D The firm is a price setter The markets are kept separate Price elasticity of demand is different in each market Customers in each market are not aware of the prices charged in other markets (i), (ii) and (iii) only (i), (ii) and (iv) only (ii), (iii) and (iv) only All of them
158
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Which of the following defines the long-run equilibrium position of a firm operating under conditions of perfect competition? A B C D MC = MR, AC < AR, MR < AR MC = MR, AC = AR, MR < AR MC > MR, AC = AR, MR = AR MC = MR, AC = AR, MR = AR
Selling the same good at different prices to different customers is termed: A B C D Monopolistic exploitation Protectionism Price discrimination Non-price competition
In the diagram the firm is currently producing at output level E. The firm will seek to:
Price MC AC
AVC AR = MR
E XY
Quantity
The firm will seek to: A B C D 8 Leave the industry because AC > MR at all outputs and so losses are inevitable Increase output to point Y in order to maximise profits Reduce output to point W in order to maximise profits Increase output to point X in order to maximise profits
The diagram shows the cost curves and revenue curves for Hans Tordam Co, a firm of tulip growers. Which of the following statements is true? 1 2 3 Price P and output Q are the profit-maximising price and output levels for the firm. Price P and output Q are price and output levels at which the firm makes normal profits. Price P and output Q are the revenue-maximising price and output levels.
Price MC AC
AR Q MR Quantity
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
159
A B C D 9
Statement 1 only is correct Statements 1 and 2 only are correct Statements 2 and 3 only are correct Statements 1, 2 and 3 are correct
The diagram shows the revenue and cost curves for a profit-maximising monopoly firm, Lord and Masters Co. Which of the following statements are correct? 1 2 3 If the firm has zero marginal costs and 100% fixed costs, its profit-maximising output would be OZ; At profit-maximising output OY, supernormal profits for Lord and Masters Co are STWX; If the firm's fixed costs increased, so that the AC curve rose to a level where it is at a tangent to the AR curve at point W, it would cease to make supernormal profit.
Price
T W MC AC S X
AR = D 0 Y Z
Quantity
A B C D 10
Statements 1 and 2 are correct Statements 2 and 3 are correct Statements 1 and 3 are correct Statements 1, 2 and 3 are all correct
These diagrams show long term equilibrium under perfect competition for both the firm and the industry. Label these diagrams.
1 $ S 2 4 P P $ 3
Q 6
Q 5
A B C D E F
Firm's average cost Output of the firm Market supply Firm's marginal cost Market demand Total industry output
160
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
11
Which one of the following is unlikely to act as a barrier to entry for a new firm wishing to enter an industry? A B C D Significant economies of scale High fixed costs Perfect information Product differentiation and brand loyalty
12
In the short run, the number of firms in the market is fixed. If the prevailing market price is above the lowest point on a firm's average total cost curve, it will make supernormal profits. This will continue until new entrants are attracted into the market and drive the market price down by increasing supply. Price discrimination exists when the same product is sold at different prices in different markets or market segments. A To be able to discriminate on price a firm must be a price setter, must have at least two separate markets, and the price elasticity of demand must be different in each market. Although customers may be aware of different prices in other markets, because the markets are separate they have to take the price prevailing in their market. (iv) is incorrect. For long run equilibrium, MC = MR = AC = AR = Demand.
3 4
5 6 7 8
D C D B
The firm will aim to produce where MR = MC. 1. Profit is maximised at price P and output Q, because this is where MC = MR; 2. At this price/output level, average cost equals average revenue. Normal profit is included in cost, and so the firm is making normal profits only, but no supernormal profits; 3. Total revenue is not being maximised because this price/output level is not where MR = 0. Statement 1 is correct, because if MC = 0, profits would be maximised where MC = MR, which would be at output OZ, where MR = 0. Statement 2 is correct. Supernormal profits per unit are the difference between AR and AC (price and average cost). This is (W X) or (T S). Total supernormal profits for output OY are therefore illustrated by area STWX. Statement 3 is probably more difficult to understand but is also correct. If fixed costs increase, but variable costs remain the same, the MC curve will be unchanged, and so the profit-maximising price will still be OT and the profit-maximising output OY. But if higher fixed costs have raised average costs (AC) to point W, at this price and output level AR = AC, and so there will be no supernormal profits.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly
161
10
1 2 3 4 5 6
E C D A B F If consumers had perfect information this would mean they were aware of all new entrants to the industry as potential alternative suppliers to the existing producers in the industry. The fact that consumers are aware of the new suppliers removes a barrier to entry rather than creating one. The profit maximising level of output is where marginal costs equals marginal revenue. Long-term equilibrium is at an output where average cost equals marginal cost and marginal revenue.
11
12
Allocative efficiency is only achieved if a firm produces at the point where price equals marginal cost. Profit maximising firms will seek to produce where MC = MR. Under perfect competition, because price (AR) = MR, price also equals MC.
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Page 432
162
7a: Market structures perfect competition and monopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Introduction
Economic theorists have noted that actual market structures very rarely correspond with the extreme cases of perfect competition and monopoly which we examined in Chapter 7(a). Moving away from these extremes leads to the analysis of other forms of imperfect market structure, including monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly, which we will now consider. These different market structures are defined largely by the number of suppliers in the market. However, in each of the markets, the firm is a price searcher searching for the price which will maximise profits, given the conditions in the market. By the time you have finished Chapters 7a and 7b you should have a full understanding of the different models of market structure.
Topic list 1 Monop olistic competition and non-price competition 2 Oligopoly 3 Duop oly 4 Contestable markets 5 Market concentration
Learning ou tcome s B (vi), (vii) B (vi), (vii) B (vi), (vii) B (vi), (vii) B (iv)
163
When price competition is restricted, firms usually go in for other forms of competition, such as sales promotion and product differentiation.
Question
See if you can think of other examples of product differentiation.
Product differentiation
Answer
Possible examples could be restaurants, cereals, clothing and shoes they are all goods or services which are advertised on non-price grounds.
The short-run equilibrium for a firm in monopolistic competition is illustrated in Figure 1 below. This is the same as the equilibrium of a monopoly firm earning supernormal profits. The firm makes supernormal profits of (P A) Q units, shown by the area of the rectangle PQBA.
Price
MC = supply AC P A Q B
AR = demand
MR
Output
Figure 1 The short-run equilibrium of a firm in monopolistic competition Note that although the short-run equilibrium of a firm in monopolistic competition resembles that of a monopolist's, the demand curve (average revenue curve) for the firm in monopolistic competition is likely to be more elastic. This is because the customer in the market has a choice between products, and can be tempted to move between products by advertising campaigns (which are a feature of this type of market structure). The long-run equilibrium for a firm in monopolistic competition is illustrated by Figure 2. This is the same as the equilibrium of a monopoly firm which earns no supernormal profits, but normal profits only. The supranormal profits earned in the short run have attracted new entrants and so have been competed away.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly
165
The competitive rivalry resulting from the new entrants to the market causes the firm to lose some of its customers, but not all. This is an important point: because the firm has established a brand loyalty it will be able to retain some of its customers despite the entry of the new competitors into the market. However, the loss of customers is reflected in a leftward shift of the demand curve, and the reduction of profit levels to normal profit only. However, although monopolistic competition creates normal profit in the long run like perfect competition, unlike perfect competition it does not achieve allocative or technical efficiency. Allocative efficiency occurs where price equals marginal cost. However, as Figure 2 illustrates price (P1) is higher than marginal cost at output level Q1 (where MC = MR). This means that output could be increased so some people could be made better off without others suffering. Allocative efficiency would be achieved at quantity QA and price A. Technical efficiency is not achieved because the average cost of the equilibrium output is not at the lowest point on the average cost curve (T). This would be achieved where output quantity equals QT. Figure 2 also illustrates that the firm has excess capacity, because output at the level of technical efficiency (QT) is greater than current output of Q1. As a result of the allocative and technical inefficiency, monopolistic competition still gives rise to higher prices and lower outputs than perfect competition.
(b)
166
7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
2 Oligopoly
FAST FORWARD
Oligopolies might collude and make a formal or informal cartel agreement on the price for the industry and output levels for each firm. The kinked oligopoly demand curve may explain why there is price stability (and non-price competition) in many oligopoly markets.
The examiner regards this interdependence of decision making as fundamentally important to any discussion of oligopoly. One strategy which an oligopolist might adopt is to co-operate with other firms, and such a strategy will give rise to a cartel.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly
167
Price
S2 S1
P2 P1
Q2
Q1
Output
The firms in the cartel must be able to control supply to the market. The firms must agree on a price and on the output each should produce.
In Figure 3, if the market price is fixed at P2, firms would want to supply output Z in a free market. This cannot be allowed to happen; otherwise market price P2 could not be sustained. The main weakness with cartels is that each firm is still seeking the best results for itself, and so there is an incentive for an individual firm to break the cartel agreement by secretly increasing its output and selling it at the fixed cartel price. However, if all firms increased their output in this way, the cartel would collapse because the high price could not be sustained without a restricted output, and excess supply on the market would force down the price. This has been the common experience of the oil-producing countries of the Organisation of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC). Attempts to agree on a restricted output quota for each country in order to push up oil prices have often broken down because some member countries exceeded their quota, or sold below the cartel's agreed price. The success of a price cartel will depend on several factors. (a) (b) (c) (d) Whether it consists of most or all of the producers of the product. Whether or not there are close substitutes for the product. For example, a price cartel by taxi drivers might lead to a shift in demand for buses and trains, because these are possible substitutes for taxis. The ease with which supply can be regulated. In the case of primary commodities, such as wheat, rice, tea and coffee, total supply is dependent on weather conditions and even political events in the producing country. The price elasticity of demand for the product. Cartels are likely to be most effective for goods which are inelastic. An attempt to raise prices by cutting output of an elastic good might result in such a large a fall in demand and such a small rise in price that the total income of producers also falls. Whether producers can agree on their individual shares of the total restricted supply to the market. This is often the greatest difficulty of all.
(e)
168
7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Figure 4 Kinked oligopoly demand curve The kinked demand curve is used to explain how an oligopolist might have to accept price stability in the market. Let us assume that the oligopolist is currently charging price P, and producing output Q, meaning he is producing at the 'kink' on the demand curve. (a) If the oligopolist were to raise his prices above P, his competitors are likely to keep their price lower so that many consumers would buy from the competitors instead. An example is the difficulty which individual petrol companies have in raising the price of petrol at garages. If competitors do not raise their prices too, the firm usually soon has to restore its prices to their previous level. In other words, the demand curve would be quite elastic at these increased prices, because consumers will switch to an alternative supplier. If, on the other hand, the oligopolist were to reduce his prices below P, competitors would probably do the same. Total market demand might rise, but the increase in demand for the individual oligopolist's products would probably be quite low. Demand is thus likely to be inelastic at prices below P, hence the 'kink' in the demand curve, with the curve being elastic at prices above P and inelastic at prices below it.
(b)
The marginal revenue (MR) curve is discontinuous at the output level where there is the kink in the demand curve. The kink in the demand curve explains the nature of the marginal revenue curve MR. At price P, output OQ, the MR curve falls vertically because at higher prices the MR curve is based on the more elastic demand curve, and at prices below P the MR curve is based on the less elastic demand.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly
169
Unfortunately, however, the economic theories about oligopolies do not explain how an oligopolist sets its price in the first place.
170
7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
The presence of these aspects of non-price competition is a common feature of oligopoly markets.
Question
(a) (b) Draw a diagram to show the effect of a cartel on price and output to the market. Draw a diagram to show a kinked oligopoly demand curve.
3 Duopoly
FAST FORWARD
A duopoly is an oligopoly market structure containing only two firms. The two firms can either collude or compete; and if they compete one firm can only gain at the expense of the other firm. Duopoly is a useful model for analysing oligopoly behaviour, especially the interdependence between firms. In a duopoly, if the firms compete, then, assuming the market size remains constant (ceteris paribus), the gains of one firm must be matched exactly by the losses of the other firm. So a firm must decide whether to try to increase its market share or to allow market share to remain constant. This decision can be considered as game theory.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly
Interestingly, after the advertising campaigns both firms are worse off than they were before. The figures show that although one firm can gain in the short run from a competitive strategy, in the long run both firms are likely to be better off by working together and not advertising (colluding) rather than competing with each other. However, game theory presupposes that the firms do not have a collusive agreement and do not know what the other is going to do. So A and B must select their strategies based solely on the outcome which is best for them regardless of the decision made by their rival. Under these circumstances, both firms will choose to advertise. Individually, they increase profitability $100m by advertising. But collectively this course of action causes them both to lose $50m. Game theory illustrates the key problem of interdependent decision-making in duopoly and oligopoly. Competition among the firms in a market can lead to inefficiency and competitive actions that use resources without generating corresponding benefits.
4 Contestable markets
FAST FORWARD
A firm in a contestable market in which there are low barriers to entry will only earn normal profit and no supernormal profit.
Question
Long-run equilibrium
Draw a diagram to show the long-run equilibrium position for a firm in a perfectly competitive market. Include on your diagram marginal cost (MC), average cost (AC), marginal revenue (MR) and average revenue (AR). Compare your diagram with Figure 11(b) in Chapter 7a: this is what your diagram should look like.
Firms in contestable markets are forced into having to accept normal profits because there are neither entry nor exit barriers which can help sustain supernormal profits.
172
7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
If the firms were to be inefficient and produce at a level where AC is not minimised, or if they were to raise prices to earn supernormal profits, other firms would quickly enter the market to skim off any excess profits knowing they could just as easily leave if supernormal profits were to be eroded by the extra competition. Thus, the theory of contestable markets shows that it is not necessary to have many firms supplying to a market for conditions similar to perfect competition to apply. It is enough for the few firms in the market to know that many more firms could enter the market, skim off supranormal profits and then leave the industry again, for the few firms to act in a similar way to firms in the perfect competition model.
For assessments, knowing the relevant diagrams for different market structures is important. Check that you understand how the diagrams are built up, and why curves slope in a particular direction.
5 Market concentration
FAST FORWARD
Market concentration describes the extent to which a market is controlled by a few large firms. It can be measured by a concentration ratio, which only considers a few firms, or by the Herfindahl index and the Gini coefficient, both of which consider them all. The Gini coefficient is supplementary to the Lorenz curve graphical depiction of concentration. We have shown that very large suppliers are able to exert influence over market price. The extreme case is the monopoly, but it is not necessary to achieve monopoly in order to exert market power. Oligopolists, whether collusive or not, are also capable of influencing market price and even when there are a large number of suppliers in a market, it is possible for the larger ones to wield market power.
Key terms
Market concentration is the extent to which supply to a market is provided by a small number of firms. Industry concentration is a similar concept, dealing with a complete industry (or group of related markets) rather than a single market. The degree of concentration in an industry, and thus the potential for uncompetitive price-fixing, is of interest to both customers and suppliers and to government regulatory bodies.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly
173
Five firm concentration ratio (%of Gross Value Added) 100 100 68 63 36
Major firms (2004) British Sugar, Tate & Lyle BAT, Gallaher Group, Imperial Tobacco Group Allied Domecq, Carlsberg Tetley, Diageo, Interbrew, Scottish & Newcastle Astra-Zeneca, Eli Lilly, GlaxoSmithKline, Pfizer PWC, Deloitte, KPMG, Ernst & Young, Grant Thornton
174
7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Perfect competition
A B
Lorenz curve
100
Figure 5 Lorenz curve A straight line at forty five degrees from the origin would show perfect competition: cumulative market share increases at exactly the same rate as the cumulative number of firms, since all have the same turnover. This, however, is unrealistic: Lorenz curves (whether showing income distribution or market concentration) typically display increasing gradients as the horizontal coefficient increases towards one hundred percent. This is because the smaller firms by definition, have less than an average share of the market. As the cumulative percentage increases, the larger firms come into consideration and when the firm with the exact average market share is reached, the gradient of the curve reaches forty five degrees. Larger firms are then included and since they have above average market shares, the gradient increases until the largest is reached.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly
175
Chapter roundup
When price competition is restricted, firms usually go in for other forms of competition, such as sales promotion and product differentiation. Oligopolies might collude and make a formal or informal cartel agreement on the price for the industry and output levels for each firm. The kinked oligopoly demand curve may explain why there is price stability (and non-price competition) in many oligopoly markets. A duopoly is an oligopoly market structure containing only two firms. The two firms can either collude or compete; and if they compete one firm can only gain at the expense of the other firm. A firm in a contestable market in which there are low barriers to entry will only earn normal profit and no supernormal profit. Market concentration describes the extent to which a market is controlled by a few large firms. It can be measured by a concentration ratio, which only considers a few firms, or by the Herfindahl index and the Gini coefficient, both of which consider them all. The Gini coefficient is supplementary to the Lorenz curve graphical depiction of concentration.
176
7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Quick quiz
1 2 3 4 5 What is meant by non-price competition? What forms does product differentiation take? What are the implications of the kinked oligopoly demand curve for price and output by an oligopoly firm? What is meant by the term 'contestable market'? Which of the following statements best describes long run equilibrium in a market where there is monopolistic competition? A B C D 6 Marginal revenue equals average cost There is excess capacity in the industry since firms can reduce average costs by expanding output Firms will earn supernormal profits because price exceeds marginal cost Price equals marginal cost, but does not equal average cost
Which one of the following statements about price discrimination is incorrect? A B C D Dumping is a form of price discrimination. For price discrimination to be possible, the seller must be able to control the supply of the product. Price discrimination is only profitable where the elasticity of demand is different in at least two of the markets. An example of price discrimination is the sale of first class and second class tickets on an aeroplane journey.
The oligopolist is least likely to compete through: A B C D Advertising Improving product quality Cutting price Providing incidental services as an 'add-on' to the basic good
This question consists of two statements. Which, if either, is correct? 1 2 A B C D In conditions of monopolistic competition, firms will eventually reach an equilibrium output which is less than the output level at which average total cost is at a minimum. In perfect competition, at the output level where marginal revenue equals marginal cost, a firm's average variable costs are minimised. Both statements are correct The first statement is correct but the second statement is false The first statement is false but the second statement is correct Both statements are false
Which of the following factors would weaken the long-term survival of a cartel? A B C D Greater price elasticity of demand for the product in the long run A high concentration of production in the hands of a few firms Substantial costs associated with entry into the industry Broadly similar cost structures between industry members
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly
177
10
Are the following statements correct? 1 2 A B C D Firms operating under conditions of monopolistic competition will often engage in advertising The profits of a firm operating under conditions of monopolistic competition can be increased by a shift of its average revenue curve or a fall in the elasticity of demand for the firm's product Both statements are correct The first statement is correct but the second statement is false The first statement is false but the second statement is correct Both statements are false
11
Which one of the following is not normally a characteristic of an oligopolistic market? A B C D There is interdependence of decision making Low barriers to entry Price stability Non-price competition
12
What is a duopoly?
3 4
178
7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Few suppliers; barriers to entry and similar cost structures are prerequisites for an effective collusive oligopoly. Greater elasticity of demand for a product in the long run would affect the cartel's ability to charge a higher price whilst maintaining the same volume of sales. This would lead to firms leaving the cartel and cutting prices in order to sell more of their own production. The second statement in fact explains why the first statement is correct. Firms in monopolistic competition will often use advertising to try to shift their demand curve to the right, or to make demand for their product more price-inelastic (enabling them to earn bigger profits by raising prices). Oligopolies usually contain a small number of large firms. The size of these existing firms (and the economies of scale they enjoy) will act as a barrier to entry for potential new entrants.
10
11 12
A duopoly is a market structure containing only two firms. If the firms choose to compete, and the size of the market remains constant, one firm can only gain directly at the expense of the other.
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers 33 35
Page 434
Part B The market system and the competitive process 7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly
179
NO BARRIERS TO ENTRY FIRM AS PRICE TAKES NORMAL PROFITS IN LONG RUN TECHNICAL EFFICIENCY ALLOCATIVE EFFICIENCY
180
7b: Market structures monopolistic competition, oligopoly and duopoly Part B The market system and the competitive process
Introduction
There is a potential role for government in the regulation of private markets where these fail to bring about an efficient use of resources. We now examine this role of government in relation to monopolies and other aspects of competition. Since monopolies have both economic disadvantages and economic advantages, there are reasons why a government might wish either to restrict or to encourage the development of private enterprise monopolies within its country.
Topic list 1 Government regulation and privatisation 2 Public policy towards monopolies
Ability required
181
Market failure is said to occur when the market mechanism fails to result in economic efficiency, and therefore the outcome is sub-optimal. In response to the existence of market failure, and as an alternative to taxation and public provision of production, the state often resorts to regulation of economic activity in a variety of ways. Of the various forms of market failure, the following are the cases where regulation of markets can often be the most appropriate policy response. Market failure Imperfect competition Externalities Regulation Where monopoly power is leading to inefficiency, the state will intervene through controls on, say, prices or profits in order to try to reduce the effects of the monopoly. A possible means of dealing with the problem of external costs and benefits is via some form of regulation. Regulations might include, for example, controls on emissions of pollutants, restrictions on car use in urban areas, the banning of smoking in public buildings, compulsory car insurance and compulsory education. Regulation is often the best form of government action whenever informational inadequacies are undermining the efficient operation of private markets. This is particularly so when consumer choice is being distorted. Examples here would include legally enforced product quality/safety standards, consumer protection legislation, and the provision of job centres and other means of improving information flows in the labour market. The government may also resort to regulation for social reasons. For example, legislation to prevent racial, sexual or age discrimination in the labour market; regulation to ensure equal access to goods such as health care, education and housing; minimum wage regulations and equal pay legislation.
Imperfect information
Equity
1.3 Self-regulation
Bear in mind that in many markets the participants (especially the firms) may decide to maintain a system of voluntary self-regulation, possibly in order to try to avert the imposition of government controls. Self-regulation often exists in the professions (eg the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), the Law Society, the British Medical Association and other professional bodies).
182
8: Public policy and competition Part B The market system and the competitive process
(b)
(c)
1.5 Deregulation
Deregulation can be defined as the removal or weakening of any form of statutory (or voluntary) regulation of free market activity. Deregulation allows free market forces more scope to determine the outcome. There was a shift in policy in the 1980s in the UK and in the USA towards greater deregulation of markets, in the belief that this would improve efficiency. Indeed, many politicians and commentators believed that it was overregulation of British industry that was largely responsible for Britain's comparatively uncompetitive and inefficient performance in the preceding years. A rational assessment of deregulation should weigh the potential social benefits against the social costs. If there will be a net gain to society, we can say that the deregulation should proceed. It would be simplistic to contend that all regulation is detrimental to the economy. As we have seen, where there is a clear case of market failure, then state regulation may be required.
In some industries, liberalisation could have certain disadvantages. (a) (b) (c) Loss of economies of scale. If increased competition means that each firm produces less output on a smaller scale, unit costs will be higher. Lower quality or quantity of service. The need to reduce costs may lead firms to reduce quality or eliminate unprofitable but socially valuable services. Need to protect competition. It may be necessary to implement a regulatory regime to protect competition where inherent forces have a tendency to eliminate it, for example if there is a dominant firm already in the industry, such as BT in telecommunications in the UK. In this type of situation, effective regulation for competition will be required, ie there will need to be regulatory measures aimed at maintaining competitive pressures, whether existing or potential.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 8: Public policy and competition
183
(b) (c)
(d)
A further instance of liberalisation was the introduction of compulsory competitive tendering into public sector organisations. Both local authorities (eg refuse collection, office cleaning and management of leisure facilities) and health authorities (eg hospital cleaning, laundry and catering) have had to contract out the supply of these services, where private sector firms have offered to provide the services at a lower price than their own internal producers.
(b) (c)
The UK government, like many other governments of developed countries, has carried out a policy of denationalisation. British Gas, BT, the regional water authorities and much of the electricity industry have been among the enterprises which have been privatised. Many of the utility industries which have been privatised are still subject to regulations though; for example, the price increases they can impose are limited to the rate of retail price inflation (RPI) minus a specified percentage. The Private Finance Initiative A fourth type of privatisation has been established in the UK in recent years. The Private Finance Initiative (PFI) enlists private sector capital and management expertise to provide public services at reduced cost to the public sector budget. The capital aspect of the scheme has been particularly welcome to government as it allows for expansion of public services without an increase in the Public Sector Net Cash Requirement.
184
8: Public policy and competition Part B The market system and the competitive process
A typical PFI contract would involve a consortium of private companies which undertakes to design, finance, build and manage a facility such as a school or hospital over a long term contract, typically 30-60 years. The consortium accepts the risk of the project and takes its returns in the form of periodic fees. Because they usually involve the provision of services, PFI contracts tend to be very complex in order to ensure that performance standards are rigorously defined. Perceived advantages of PFI (a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) Government is able to finance improved provision of goods and services for the public without increasing its borrowing. Risks are transferred to the private sector. Private sector qualities of efficiency and innovation are brought into the public sector. Public projects will be more expensive because a private company cannot borrow as cheaply as the government. There is often no real transfer of risk, as the government will be forced to support projects that suffer financial failure, or bail out the private companies which are managing them. Cost savings have been made to the detriment of quality of service. For example, in the UK, there have been claims that the standard of cleaning in NHS hospitals has deteriorated after cleaning contracts were awarded to private companies.
Criticisms of PFI
(b) (c)
Part B The market system and the competitive process 8: Public policy and competition
185
(d)
State-owned industries can be run in a way that protects employment, as was the case in the UK coal industry, for instance. The problem with this is that the taxpayer is effectively subsidising technical inefficiency. Surpluses from state-run industries can be used for public welfare rather than private wealth. However, the problem here is that points (a) and (d) above tend to preclude the creation of surpluses.
(e)
(b) (c)
The contention that privatisation will lead to efficiency improvements is based on a number of assumptions. The most important assumption is that privatisation will place the industry in a market subject to competitive pressures approaching the perfectly competitive ideal. In practice, however, there are few examples of perfectly competitive markets and the likelihood is of restricted competition between a small number of large firms, with a degree of inefficiency persisting. If there are no legal restrictions, it is also possible that state monopolies will merely become private monopolies with even less regard than before for the consumer. Another assumption of the privatisation analysis is that there are no economies of scale. Where there are significant economies of scale there may be a natural monopoly, with room in the market for one firm only, and monopoly may be productively more efficient than a market with competing firms. It is believed that management and working practices will be changed under private sector control. Management will become largely free of interference from the government, working practices should become more efficient and trade union power may be reduced. It is claimed that with the central objective of profit maximisation, privatised firms will be responsive to the wants of consumers, as revealed by market research and signalled by the operation of the price mechanism. The profit objective induces firms to innovate and to seek out new markets, a process which promotes the efficient allocation of resources. Where privatisation increases competition, the greater competition is likely to make firms produce output more cheaply and to sell it at a lower price. Nationalised organisations have often acted as monopolists, with the consequences of higher prices and lower output characteristic of non-competitive markets.
186
8: Public policy and competition Part B The market system and the competitive process
The example of British Telecom (BT) in the UK can be used to illustrate the attempt to encourage competition along with privatisation. Firstly, BT's pricing is regulated by a 'Retail Prices Index minus x percent' formula. Secondly, a relatively small competitor, Mercury, a subsidiary of Cable and Wireless, was licensed to compete for part of BT's activities. However, these were relatively minor restrictions on a company with great market power (although since the mid-1990s, new operators have been entering as competitors in the market). The alternative strategy adopted in the USA for the telecommunications giant AT&T was to break down its operations into smaller units which could compete with one another. Privatisation alone is often not sufficient to improve the performance of a monopoly and other steps may need to be taken to increase competition. On the other hand, improvements to the competitive environment might equally be achieved without privatisation.
Question
Can you identify three possible benefits of privatisation?
Benefits of privatisation
Answer
Any three of: Improved efficiency of production in privatised companies Reduces bureaucracy and political interference in the industries concerned, so producers have greater economic freedom Private companies have a more profit-oriented management culture Encourages wider share ownership
Part B The market system and the competitive process 8: Public policy and competition
187
You should understand the various arguments in favour of public (or 'nationalised') ownership of production concerning public goods, merit goods and natural monopoly. You should also be aware of the efficiency arguments against public ownership.
(b)
(ii)
(iii) (iv)
188
8: Public policy and competition Part B The market system and the competitive process
(v)
The government can protect employment and reduce social costs related to unemployment. This argument was used to justify keeping 'uneconomic' coal mines open in the UK. If the mines were closed, as free market economics would dictate, this would reduce production, but it would also increase unemployment and the related costs of unemployment benefits and social unease. Nationalised industries may also promote a fairer distribution of wealth, since economic surpluses can be reinvested for the benefit of society rather than being related as profit by capitalist entrepreneurs.
(vi)
(c)
It can allow monopolies or oligopolies to operate, but try to control their activities in order to protect the consumer. For example, it can try to prohibit the worst forms of restrictive practice, such as price cartels. Or it may set up regulatory 'consumer watchdog' bodies to protect consumers' interests where conditions of natural monopoly apply, as in the recently privatised utility industries of the UK.
Control over markets can arise by firms eliminating the opposition, either by merging with or taking over rivals or stopping other firms from entering the market. When a single firm controls a big enough share of the market it can begin to behave as a monopolist even though its market share is below 100%. Several firms could behave as monopolists by agreeing with each other not to compete. This could be done in a variety of ways for example by exchanging information, by setting common prices or by splitting up the market into geographical areas and operating only within allocated boundaries. In a perfect monopoly, there is only one firm that is the sole producer of a good that has no closely competing substitutes, so that the firm controls the supply of the good to the market. The definition of a monopoly in practice is wider than this, because governments seeking to control the growth of monopoly firms will probably choose to regard any firm that acquires a certain share of the market as a potential monopolist.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 8: Public policy and competition
189
The breakeven output (QBE) is greater than it would have been under a profit maximising monopolist (QPM) and price is lower (PBE versus PPM). However, the public sector monopoly is still neither technically or allocatively efficient. For technical efficiency to be achieved, output quantity would need to be QT, so that the firm is producing at the lowest point on its average cost curve. A second option would be for a nationalised industry to produce at the level of allocative efficiency (Price = MC) but this could cause it to make a loss, if marginal cost (and therefore price) are less than average cost. However, nationalised monopolies do still have the option to discriminate on price to increase profits. In the UK, when railway services were run by a nationalised company British Rail price discrimination was applied to charge commuters different (higher) fares to leisure travellers.
In the UK, there are various pieces of legislation in relation to competition policy. The Competition Act (1980) defined anti-competitive activities, and established a procedure for investigating them through the Office of Fair Trading (OFT). If the OFT was unable to negotiate with a firm to stop the offending activity within two months, it could refer the uncompetitive activity to the Monopolies and Mergers Commission (MMC). If the MMC ruled that the activity is 'against the public interest' then it could refer it to the Department of Trade to prohibit it. The MMC was replaced by the Competition Commission (CC) in 1999. The Companies Act (1989) introduced more preventative legislation, by requiring companies which were planning to merge to notify the OFT of their intentions in advance of the merger. In this way, the OFT has the chance to refer potentially uncompetitive mergers to the MMC (now CC) before they actually take place. The Competition Act (1998) sought to strengthen UK competition law by introducing the presumption that anticompetitive arrangements are necessarily against the public interest and so should be illegal. Prior to this legislation, the presumption was that restraints on competition should be allowed unless they were found to be against the public interest. Now, any agreements or business practices which have a damaging effect on competition are outlawed. The 1998 Act made the prohibition of the abuse of a dominant market position by a firm the key tool for dealing with anti-competitive conduct by monopolies. The Competition Act (1998) also created the Competition Commission as the successor to the MMC.
190
8: Public policy and competition Part B The market system and the competitive process
The Enterprise Act (2002) refined the focus of the CCs work so that public interest tests on uncompetitive activity are replaced by tests specifically about competition issues. Under this Act, criminal sanctions for operating a cartel are introduced to deter agreements to fix prices, share markets, or limit production. Alongside competition legislation, the UK government also established specific industry regulators to monitor the activities of private companies in industries which had previously been nationalised. For example, OFTEL was established to regulate the telecommunications market, while OFGAS regulates the gas industry. The regulators have two roles, both of which are designed to promote competition. First, they can impose price caps and performance standards on the firms in their industries. Second, they can demand the removal of barriers to entry which stop new firms entering the market, for example requiring BT to allow potential new entrants to the telephone market to have access to its network.
Part B The market system and the competitive process 8: Public policy and competition
The interpretation of the public interest leads to conflicts in many cases. For example, actions which enhance competition and consumer sovereignty may conflict with the objective of allowing firms to be large enough to take advantage of competitive conditions in the international economy. (a) The CC may agree to a merger, but set conditions which are designed to protect consumers, or it may require that some assets be sold by the merged enterprise in order to prevent a dominant market position being established in a particular area of its operations. The CC will consider whether any excessive profits have been made. In the Roche Products case for example, a return on capital of 70% was deemed to be evidence of excessive pricing. In another case, Pedigree Petfoods, 44% was held to be not excessive. The CC will also see whether there is on the face of it a high degree of interdependence between a small number of firms. This evidence could be in the form of parallel pricing, predatory pricing or price discriminating policies, sometime prevalent in oligopolies in which there are say only four or five firms. A firm carrying out 'anti-competitive' practices will not be favoured. An example of this could be 'socially unproductive advertising', where firms in a dominant position have huge advertising spends with the objective of building a barrier over which firms unable to spend a lot on advertising cannot climb. If the merger involves any anti-competitive distribution policies such as single supplier agreements, it could be opposed. The CC will wish to avoid splitting up large companies, thus depriving them of economies of sale. The CC may also throw out applications if they could aggravate unemployment in an area in which unemployment is already significantly high. The CC will be mindful to protect the needs of merging firms to secure adequate returns for enterprise, risk taking, innovation, improved efficiency research and development, and the need to compete with multinational firms on a global scale. Supernormal profits will not in themselves be a reason to refer merger proposals.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
The conflicts between objectives present one problem for the CC, while another problem is that governments may be motivated by other political and economic considerations in deciding whether to adopt CC recommendations. Note the CC can only make recommendations: for their recommendation to be enacted they need ministerial approval from Government.
Chapter roundup
Market failure is said to occur when the market mechanism fails to result in economic efficiency, and therefore the outcome is sub-optimal. You should understand the various arguments in favour of public (or 'nationalised') ownership of production concerning public goods, merit goods and natural monopoly. You should also be aware of the efficiency arguments against public ownership.
Quick quiz
1 2 3 4 5 6 In what circumstances might government regulation of markets have an economic justification? What different forms can privatisation take? Why might a government wish to control monopolies? How might a government be able to control monopolies? What cases may the Competition Commission investigate? Which one of the following statements is incorrect? A B C D 7 Privatisation can be a means of widening share ownership Privatising a public sector industry will permit economies of scale Denationalisation provides a source of money for the government Privatising a public sector industry is likely to make it more responsive to the profit motive
Which of the following are arguments in favour of a policy of privatisation? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D It reduces X-inefficiency because competition is always introduced It raises useful short term funds for the government It encourages a more profit-oriented management culture (i) and (ii) (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii) All of them
Part B The market system and the competitive process 8: Public policy and competition
193
There are arguments both for and against monopolies. Monopolies are detrimental to the public interest when they are inefficient in their allocation of resources and their operations generally. They may also be objected to on the grounds that they charge higher prices, and hence earn higher profits, than would be possible in a competitive market; and they restrict choice. Governments can regulate monopolies, particularly their prices and the quality of their goods and services; prevent them from developing; break them up; or take them into public ownership. The Director General of Fair Trading may ask the Competition Commission (CC) to investigate if any firm or group of firms controls 25% or more of the market, or the Secretary of State may do the same if any proposed takeover or merger would create a firm that controlled 25% or more of the market. The CC may also investigate proposed mergers where the assets involved exceed 70 million in value. The Commission will then investigate the proposed merger or takeover and recommend whether or not it should be allowed to proceed. B Privatisation often leads to smaller firms as public sector monopolies are broken up into smaller companies. Although privatisation may be seen as a way of increasing competitiveness, it does not do so through promoting economies of scale. Setting off nationalised industries can raise useful funds for the government, and private companies are likely to have a more profit-oriented management culture than state-owned monopolies. However, competition is not always introduced following privatisation. A firm could simply be transferred from being a state-owned monopoly to being a private sector monopoly: this would not reduce X-inefficiency.
4 5
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers 36 37
Page 434
194
8: Public policy and competition Part B The market system and the competitive process
195
196
Topic list 1 Functions of money and the flow of funds 2 The need for financial intermediation 3 Firms 4 Governments 5 The flow of funds 6 Finan cial markets 7 The main financial intermediaries 8 The insurance market
Learning outcomes C(i) C(i) C(i) C(i) C(ii) C(ii) C(ii) C(iii)
Syllabus references C(1), (2), (3) C(1), (2), (3) C(1), (2), (3) C(1), (2), (3) C(1), (2), (3) C(4) C(5) C(9)
Ability requ ired Comprehension Comprehension Comprehension Comprehension Comprehension Comprehension Comprehension Comprehension
197
Within an economy, some people, firms and organisations will have money which is surplus to their needs, and others will have less money than they need for their spending requirements. Credit involves lending money, and the transfer (usually in return for interest payments) of money from surplus units to deficit units. Financial intermediaries, such as banks and building societies, make the provision of credit much easier, by taking deposits from savers and re-lending to borrowers.
(b)
(c) (d)
Throughout history, different economies have used many different items as money. Some have tended to work better than other, and those that best performed the function of money had certain key characteristics.
(b)
198
Divisibility. To be generally accepted as a medium of exchange, money needs to be exchangeable for both large items and small items. Transportability. Similarly, because transactions can take place at many different locations, money must be easily portable from one location to another. Stable value. Money must retain a stable value and purchasing power otherwise it cannot act as a store of value or a standard of deferred payment. Not easily counterfeited. Money that is easily counterfeited would quickly lose its value in exchange because anyone could create their own money.
The most important function of money is usually considered to be as a medium of exchange. And another important characteristic associated with this is liquidity: the ease with which a financial asset can be turned into a form that can be used as a medium of exchange. However, one function of money which has caused most problems within economies is the requirement to act as a store of value, and to retain a stable value. Money can only do this if there is no inflation. Inflation, by definition, leads to a decline in the purchasing power of money, and thereby means that money cannot perform its functions of storing value and acting as a standard of deferred payment. This will consequently make it less acceptable as a medium of exchange. Therefore inflation, especially high inflation or hyper-inflation, will undermine the qualities of money and the workings of the financial system. Inflation is also a secondary reason (behind interest rates) why an investor will prefer to receive a payment of a fixed amount of money today rather than an equal amount in the future. This is known as the time value of money presumption.
199
Question
What are the four main functions of money?
Functions of money
Answer
To act as a medium of exchange To act as a store of value To provide a unit of account To provide a standard of deferred payment.
Within each of these three sectors, there is a continual movement of funds, payments and receipts on a short-term, medium and long-term basis.
Key terms
The role of financial intermediaries such as banks and building societies in an economy is to provide the means by which funds can be transferred from surplus units in the economy to deficit units. Financial intermediaries develop the facilities and financial instruments which make lending and borrowing possible.
200
This is the rationale for the financial intermediaries (such as banks) who provide the link which enables money to be transferred from savers to borrowers. This transfer process is known as financial intermediation.
2.1 Households
FAST FORWARD
Credit for households comes from a variety of sources including credit agreements, bank loans and mortgages. Households and individuals receive income from employment, savings and investments, and social security and pensions. They will need to use these to finance both their short term needs for food, shelter and clothing and also their longer term needs such as buying a house or buying a car. However, the timings of the inflows are unlikely to match the expenditures. Therefore households will need to develop ways of dealing with this lack of synchronisation. They can do this in a number of ways. Time Frame Short term (routine transactions) Ways to deal with lack of synchronisation Medium term (infrequent purchases of more expensive items, such as cars or holidays) Long term (for example, buying a house, or retirement planning) Retain cash in hand to meet day-to-day expenditure needs Use short term credit functions, such as credit cards and bank overdrafts Make savings in periods of net surplus (when receipts exceed payments) in order to finance periods of net deficit Save over a period of time prior to expenditure, for example using a deposit account at a bank Borrow money to fund the purchase and then repay over a period of time, for example through taking out a bank loan, or through hire purchase or lease finance arrangements. Need very long-term financial instruments, for example mortgages or pension funds Mortgages are loans used to acquire an asset, typically a property. The asset is conveyed to the lender as security for the loan and ownership only passes to the buyer once the mortgage is repaid in full.
In all of the time frames, the households use financial intermediaries to provide the facilities they need to match their income with their expenditure.
3 Firms
Businesses, like households, will find that flows of payments and receipts rarely match. A business will have receipts from several sources, which might include sales, investment income and proceeds from the disposal of non-current assets. A firm's outlays include the need to finance working capital, pay wages and salaries, rent and utility bills. For its medium and long term needs the company will need to purchase assets such as premises, machinery and equipment. In order to achieve profit and function as a going concern, most companies will need funding over and above the contribution by shareholders.
201
The need for finance for firms arises for two reasons. First, production takes place before products are sold. A firm has to finance production (labour, raw material, inventory) before any receipts accrue and therefore needs funds in the form of working capital in order to operate. This type of finance is a bridging type and is short term. A second reason for a firm to need funds is for investment purposes. Like individuals, businesses that need to expand or replace their plant and equipment may need funds far in excess of the income that the company earns from its activities. These types of funds are typically long-term. Businesses have three main sources of long-term finance: Equity capital (through issuing shares) Internally generated funds (retained profits) Debt capital (such as bank loans and corporate bonds)
A company must have capital to carry out its operations. Many companies start in a small way, often as family businesses, then grow to become public companies, which can invite the public to subscribe for shares. New capital enables the firm to expand its activities and achieve the advantages of large-scale production. Credit may be short-term, medium-term or long-term. The length of credit ought to match the life of the assets they finance, and should not exceed the asset's life. (a) The amount of short-term credit taken by a firm should be limited by considerations of liquidity. The firm must have the cash to pay creditors on time, and so short-term credit should not become excessive in relation to current assets, which are short-term sources of cash. The amount of long-term credit is effectively measured by the gearing ratio, which should remain at an acceptable level.
(b)
Principal sources of short-term capital (a) Credit agreements allow businesses to borrow money for the immediate purchase of goods or services and to pay for them over an extended period of time. These agreements take a variety of forms including bank loans, overdraft facilities, credit card, trade credit, hire purchase and lease finance. Bank overdrafts are a short-term facility which allow businesses to borrow money up to an agreed limit. The bank will charge interest on the amount overdrawn, but the overdraft can be a valuable means of overcoming a short-term cash flow problem or working capital shortage. Bills of exchange are a means of one business providing credit to another business for a short period, usually for 3 months. The lender makes up the bill for a specified sum payable at a future date and the borrower accepts the bill by signing it. Once the loan has been made there may be secondary trading in the bill, that is the loan will be sold on to a third party. The bill will be bought from the drawer at a discount form the face value of the loan, this discount representing an interest charge on the amount owed. Commercial Paper Banks and companies with good credit ratings raise funds by issuing unsecured promissory bearer notes that can be interest-bearing or discounted. These notes usually have short lives of up to 270 days. Retained cash. A business can also solve the short term mismatch of payments and receipts (the cash flow problem) by retaining a reserve of cash in its bank accounts to use in periods where expenditure exceeds income.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
202
Principal sources of long-term capital (a) Issued share capital. Share capital might be in the form of ordinary shares (equity) or preference shares. Bear in mind that only the ordinary shareholders are owners of the company, and preference shares are comparatively rare. Retained profits and other reserves. Retained profits are profits that have been kept within the company, rather than paid out to shareholders as dividends. These provide a source of internally generated funds. Borrowing and long-term loans. Companies borrow from banks and from private or institutional investors. Investors might purchase debt securities issued by the company. The company promises to repay the debt at a date in the future, and until then, pays the investors interest on the debt. Debt capital includes debentures and, for larger companies, eurobonds and commercial paper. Debentures and other loan stock are long-term loans, the terms of which are set out in a debenture trust deed. Debentures issued by large companies are traded on the stock market. Bonds are financial securities issued by government or businesses to provide them with long-term borrowing. The bonds bear a fixed nominal (or coupon) rate of interest. The market in secondary dealings for bonds involves selling the bonds at various prices in order to keep the effective interest rate in line with current interest rates. Eurobonds are bonds sold outside the jurisdiction of the country in whose currency the bond is denominated. (d) Venture capital. Venture capitalists are prepared to finance risky ventures such as start ups. Because they accept a high degree of risk (with many of their ventures producing little or no return) they require a very high return from the ones that do succeed. They also require a clear exit route that allows them to realise their capital, such as a public flotation issue of shares.
(b) (c)
Question
What are the main types of long-term funding for businesses?
Answer
The four main sources of long-term funding are: Equity (share capital) Retained profits (internally generated funds) Debt (borrowing) Venture capital
Finance and financial intermediaries You should have noted that, in general, there are two sources of finance: debt and equity. However, be aware that in some circumstances firms can obtain mezzanine finance which, in effect, combines aspects of both debt and equity finance. Although the financing is initially given as a loan (debt capital), the lender has the rights to convert to an equity interest in the company if the loan is not paid back in time and in full.
203
The main source of external lending to companies, both long and short-term, is the banks. New debenture (loan) stock is not often issued by companies to raise new funds because this stock must compete with government loan stock (gilts) to attract investors, and because they are higher risk, company debentures must generally offer a higher rate of interest than the interest rate on gilts.
Disadvantages (a) (b) Shareholders' expectation of dividends may present a problem, particularly for a public company quoted on the Stock Exchange. Insufficient earnings may be available.
204
capital providers take a more adventurous approach, although it should be noted that some of the venture capital organisations have been set up by the large institutional investors.
4 Governments
4.1 Government payments and receipts
FAST FORWARD
During any given period of time governments need to spend money on outlays of a short, medium and long-term nature. To pay for these outlays governments collect taxes.
Medium and long term: Investment on infrastructure such as building roads, schools and hospitals. (b) Transfer payments These are payments made for which the government received no goods or services in return. Examples include: (i) (ii) (iii) Unemployment and welfare payments Other social security payments State pension
Indirect taxes on expenditure or sales taxes whereby consumers pay a tax on their consumption of goods and services. In the UK, the main sales taxes are excise duties on tobacco, alcohol and petrol and value added tax. Social security contributions In the UK these are a fixed percentage of a worker's salary up to a certain ceiling and they are matched by contributions from the employer (national insurance contributions).
(c)
205
(d)
Other revenues One of the main elements of this category is income from government corporations such as the Post Office in the UK. In the UK, the proportion of total revenues coming from this source has fallen after the privatisations of the late 1980s and early 1990s.
The government budget deficit is the difference between government expenditures and revenues in any one period, normally a year referred to as a fiscal year. A fiscal year is the period over which the government revises its revenue and expenditure plans. Government expenditure is very unlikely to be equal to government revenues in each fiscal year, and so a government is likely to have either a budget surplus or a budget deficit. When revenues exceed outlays there is a budget surplus. When outlays exceed revenues there is a budget deficit.
Key terms
206
The deficit can therefore be represented as Budget deficit = government expenditures government revenues = government purchases (P) + transfers (TR) + net interest (INT) government revenues (T) = P + TR + INT T When governments spend more than they raise in taxes and therefore incur a budget deficit, they have to borrow. Governments borrow by issuing debt. In the UK, government debt is referred to as gilt edged securities. These will be discussed later.
The government deficit in any one fiscal year represents the new borrowing that the government needs to undertake. It is important to understand the distinction between government deficit and government debt. The government deficit represents the excess of government spending over government revenues in any one period. As such, the government deficit is a flow concept, just like the profit and loss is a flow concept in the financial statements of a company. In any one year, the budget deficit represents the amount of new borrowing that the government must undertake. Government debt is the accumulation of government deficits over time and represents all the debt issued to fund the deficits. Since deficits in the UK are funded by issuing government bonds (known as gilts), government debt is the total outstanding amount of gilts issued.
. The second way of bringing together surplus and deficit units is through a financial intermediary. The intermediary provides a service to both the surplus unit and the deficit unit, by accepting surplus funds and making these funds available to a deficit unit.
207
The main advantage of financial intermediation is that it provides a way of channelling funds for large and small economic units. For example, a person might deposit savings with a bank, and the bank might use its collective deposits of savings to provide a loan to a company. The two methods of channelling funds are shown schematically below.
INDIRECT FINANCE
Funds
Funds
Funds Borrowers-Spenders Borrowers-Spenders 1. 1. Firms Firms 2. 2. Government Government 3. 3. Households Households 4. 4. Overseas Overseas
Lenders-Savers Lenders-Savers
1. 1. 2. 2. 3. 3. 4. 4. Households Households Firms Firms Government Government Overseas Overseas
Funds
Funds
DIRECT FINANCE
Figure 1 Flow of funds in an open economy, showing the role of financial intermediation In the next sections we shall discuss the main financial intermediaries and financial markets in the financial system.
An intermediary is a go-between, and a financial intermediary is an institution which channels funds from savers to borrowers, by obtaining deposits from lenders and then re-lending them to borrowers. Intermediaries can, for example, provide a link between savers and investors. Financial intermediaries are institutions which channel funds from savers to borrowers. In doing so, the intermediaries provide a link between savers and borrowers, meaning that individual savers and borrowers do not have to make individual arrangements between themselves. In the UK, we can identify three different groups of financial intermediaries: (a) (b) (c) Banks Building societies Insurance companies, pension funds, unit trust companies and investment trust companies
All of these are supervised by the central bank which, in the UK, is the Bank of England. In spite of competition from building societies, insurance companies and other financial institutions, banks arguably remain the major financial intermediaries in the UK.
208
Although we will use the UK market as an example on various occasions in this chapter, you do not need to know any specific details about UK financial markets for your assessment. The assessment will test your understanding of the principles of business economics, rather than the detail of any individual financial market. Benefits of financial intermediation (a) Ease of saving. Financial intermediaries provide obvious and convenient ways in which a saver can save money. Instead of having to find a suitable borrower for his money, the saver can deposit his money with a financial intermediary that offers a financial instrument to suit his requirements. So the financial intermediary acts as a conduit to channel funds from net savers to net borrowers. It also pays interest on the savings so the saver earns a return on his money. Source of funds. They provide a ready source of funds for borrowers. Even when money is in short supply, a borrower will usually find a financial intermediary prepared to lend some. Intermediaries are an efficient, and often cost-effective, source of money for borrowers. Aggregates. They can package up the amounts lent by savers and lend on to borrowers in bigger amounts (a process called aggregation). Without aggregation, a borrower would either have to find a lender who is parped to lend the amount he wants to borrow, or else would need to use a number of different lenders in order to raise the amount of funds he wants to borrow. Maturity transformation. Financial intermediaries bridge the gap between the wish of most lenders for liquidity and the desire of most borrowers for loans over longer periods. They do this by providing investors with financial instruments which are liquid enough for the investors' needs and by providing funds to borrowers in a different longer term form (for example, mortgages). This process of managing the different time preferences of savers and borrowers is known as maturity transformation. Provided that the financial intermediary is itself financially sound, the lender's capital is secure. Bad debts would be borne by the financial intermediary in its re-lending operations. Risk transformation. An individual saver may not wish to lend to an individual borrower, considering that borrower to be a bad debt risk. However, the financial intermediary can borrow from a number of different savers and then provide funds to the borrowers with minimal risk to any single saver. This is known as risk transformation.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e) (f)
It is important that you know the various benefits of financial intermediation. They can be tested very easily in multiple choice questions.
What do we mean by long-term and short-term capital? (a) (b) By short-term capital, we mean usually capital that is lent or borrowed for a period which might range from as short as overnight up to about one year, and sometimes more. By long-term capital, we mean capital invested or lent and borrowed for a period of about five years or more, but sometimes less.
209
(c)
There is a grey area between long-term and short-term capital, which is lending and borrowing for a period from about 1-2 years up to about 5 years (medium-term capital).
There are a large number of different types of financial instrument for businesses to choose from when looking to raise finance. However, businesses should always try to match the time-scale of the instrument to the funding needs, so that short-term instruments are used for short-term (working capital) financing requirements, and long-term instruments are used to fund long-term investments, or acquisitions. The table below shows a summary of the main financial instruments. Time scale Short Term Financial Instruments Short-term bank loans and overdrafts Trade credit (ie purchasing goods on credit) Bills of exchange Commercial paper Leasing and hire purchase Long Term Equity finance Ordinary shares Preference shares (which are hybrid securities with characteristics of both debt and ordinary shares) Convertible securities (these also combine debt and equity, with the debt-holder having an option to convert to equity). Bonds Debentures (loans secured by fixed or floating charges over a firm's property or assets).
Primary and secondary markets A primary market is a market for new securities issues where the security is purchased direct from the issuer. A company's new shares are issued by an issuing house with the help and advice of a stockbroker. A company can also offer a rights issue on a primary market. This allows existing shareholders to subscribe for new shares in proportion to their existing shareholding. A secondary market is a market where the instruments are brought and sold by investors after they have been issued. This is important because it makes shares more liquid. Exchanges Most financial markets are organised as exchanges in which trading takes place either face to face or most commonly electronically. Examples of exchanges include the London Stock Exchange and the New York Stock Exchange. Over-the-Counter Markets Shares and other financial instruments are also bought and sold outside the supervised and regulated official exchanges in the over-the-counter (OTC) markets. OTC market prices are negotiated rather than set by auction, as is the case in most stock exchanges. In the USA, OTC market prices are reported via the National Association of
210
Securities Dealers Automatic Quotation System (NASDAQ). Most OTC trading deals with shares that are not quoted on any public stock exchange.
6 Financial markets
FAST FORWARD
Firms may obtain long-term or medium-term capital as share capital or as loan capital. Debentures, loan stock, bonds and commercial paper are all types of loan capital. In this section we discuss short-term instruments which can be traded in the money markets, and long-term instruments such as bonds and shares.
(c)
211
Other markets include the local authority debt market, the finance house market, the inter-company market and the sterling commercial paper market. The growth of these markets has reflected the increased deregulation of the financial markets. A distinction is sometimes made between the primary market and all the other money markets which are referred to collectively as the parallel money markets or 'unofficial' markets.
(c)
Alongside the main market, the London Stock Exchange also contains the Alternative Investment Market (AIM), which opened in 1995. The AIM is a market where smaller companies which cannot meet the more stringent requirements needed to obtain a full listing on the Stock Exchange can raise new capital by issuing shares. Like the Stock Exchange main market, the AIM is also a market in which investors can trade in shares already issued. It is regulated by the Stock Exchange. The UK Stock Market also includes EDX London Ltd which is a derivatives exchange managed by the LSE. The price of shares on a stock market fluctuate up and down. (a) (b) The price of shares in a particular company might remain unchanged for quite a long time; alternatively, a company's share price might fluctuate continually throughout each day. The general level of share prices, as measured by share price indices such as the All-Share Index and the FTSE 100 Index, may go up or down each minute of the day.
212
Figure 1. Impact of changes in demand on share prices In essence, share prices on a stock market reflect the equilibrium between supply and demand in the same way that any other prices do. For example, if a company announces very good results, demand for its shares may increase (an outward shift in its demand curve) causing share prices to rise (as in Figure 1). Equally, a company may wish to issue new shares to generate extra capital. This new share issue represents an outward shift in the supply curve, and so, ceteris paribus, will lead to a fall in share price (as illustrated in Figure 2).
Figure 2. Impact of a new share issue on share prices The indices of share prices on the Stock Exchange act as indicators of the state of investor confidence in the country's economy. For example, if investors believe that interest rates are too low to curb inflation, they may sell shares and move their funds to other countries, causing a decline in share prices. Although in theory a stock market should be an example of a perfectly competitive market, with large numbers of buyers and sellers reacting to perfect knowledge, in practice this is not the case. Factors which are not related to the market itself such as concerns about political instability or general confidence in the economy will affect share prices. Therefore the share price of a company may not truly reflect the value or performance of that company.
Question
Share prices
From your reading of the business pages of the newspapers (which should be a central feature in anyone's study of economics) what factors have you noticed as having an influence on share prices?
213
Answer
Share prices respond to: (a) (b) (c) Factors related to the circumstances of individual companies eg news of a company's annual profits, or a proposed takeover bid Factors related to the circumstances of a particular industry eg new government legislation or regulations for an industry, such as new laws on pollution controls or customer protection measures Factors related to the circumstances of the national economy eg optimism about economic growth, changes in interest rates, the latest official figures for the balance of trade, or price inflation
You should be aware of the types of factors set out in the Question above, but detailed knowledge of theories of share price behaviour is not expected.
214
Foreign exchange markets serve to finance international trade, but also allow companies to manage their foreign exchange risk and deal in foreign exchange so that they can benefit from changes in exchange rates. Funds available on the international capital markets can, like funds available on other markets, be grouped by timescale. Timescale Short Medium Long (> 5 years) Category of funds Eurocurrency Eurocredit Eurobonds Used for Funding working capital requirements Working capital and investment purposes Investment purposes and funding acquisitions
Note: Eurocurrency does not simply refer to deposits made in Euros. Eurocurrency refers to any currency deposited by companies or governments into banks outside their own country. For example, a deposit denominated in US dollars residing in a UK bank is a Eurocurrency deposit. (The same rules apply for Eurocredits and Eurobonds).
Financial intermediaries include banks and institutional investors such as pension funds, investment trusts and unit trusts. Having discussed the main financial markets and the instruments traded in those markets we can now turn in this section to the financial intermediaries.
7.1 Banks
Banks are major providers of credit. Banks create money when they give credit (through the 'credit multiplier' effect as we will see later), and so bank lending has two aspects which are important for the economy.
The growth of credit and hence expenditure in the economy Increases in the money supply
Banks lend money that has been deposited with them by customers. A bank is effectively a go-between, or intermediary, between the initial lender and the ultimate borrower.
215
(d)
(e) (f)
216
The role of financial intermediaries in capital markets is illustrated in the diagram on the next page.
Capital markets Demand for funds comes from... INDIVIDUALS (eg housing/consumer goods finance) INTERMEDIARIES Banks Building societies Insurance companies and pension funds Unit trust/investment trust companies Stock exchanges GOVERNMENT (budget deficit) Venture capital organisations GOVERNMENT (budget surplus) Suppliers of funds INDIVIDUALS (as savers and investors)
Insurance companies act as intermediaries by bringing together units which want to shed risk and uncertainty together with units which are prepared to take the risk at a price. Insurance companies, like banks, perform an intermediation role, but they transfer risk rather than funds. The insurance market brings together units that want to shed risk (and uncertainty about future outcomes) and units which are prepared to take the risk at a price. There are different types of risk that economic units face and like financial intermediaries insurance companies provide a range of risk transfer instruments to cater for these different types of risk.
Key terms
An insurance contract or policy is an instrument through which risk is transferred from one unit to another, at a price which is determined to a large extent by demand and supply.
Risks associated with everyday life can be mitigated or eliminated through insurance. Individuals, firms and governments face uncertainty in all spheres of their activity.
217
All the uncertainties relating to the above, (for example death, relating to longevity above), unemployment relating to uncertainty of earnings, can have serious repercussions on an individual's life. The repercussions can be mitigated or completely eliminated by taking insurance. There are two categories of insurable risk: Risk of events that will occur (eg death) assurance (eg life assurance) Risk of events that may occur (eg fire) insurance (eg fire insurance)
Question Answer
Uncertainty
The use of a car involves uncertainty. Think of ways in which this uncertainty can be mitigated or eliminated.
By buying insurance we can mitigate or completely eliminate the uncertainty relating to our own use of the car. If the car is stolen it will be replaced or, if it is damaged, insurance can cover the cost. Whether we mitigate or completely eliminate the risk will depend on the premiums we will be prepared to pay. Breakdown services such as the AA or RAC mitigate risks of high recovery and roadside repair costs.
Businesses also face a number of risks they may wish to insure against, for example: Fire Flooding Consequential loss (ie the loss of earnings which result if a business's premises are damaged, for example, by fire or flooding) Public liability Employers' liability Theft
Insurance claims are contingent claims. The insured party benefits only if something adverse happens. A business that provides insurance known as the 'insurer' agrees to take on a risk on behalf of the business or individual concerned known as the 'insured'. The insurer does this by providing the insured with an insurance contract, also known as a policy. In this contract, the insurer will state what risks it has agreed to insure against, and how much it will pay to the insured party if the risk happens. Insurance contracts will only benefit the insured party if something adverse happens for which he has taken cover. Because the insured party will benefit only if a particular contingency occurs, claims are referred to as contingency claims. This is why the level of insurance varies among individuals. The level of insurance that different individuals
218
take depends on their degree of aversion to risk and the price of the insurance product. The task of calculating risks is complex, and is carried out by actuaries, who specialise in these risk analyses.
The insurance industry is organised in two main types of company: (a) (b) (a) General insurance companies Life companies. General insurance companies cover all risks other than the risk of death. Examples include: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) Motor insurance Household insurance Property Accident Liability (vi) (vii) Marine Aviation Public liability Employer's liability Professional liability
The above are only examples and do not provide an exhaustive list. (b) Life Companies insure against the possibility of death. Life insurance is sometimes referred to as 'life assurance'.
Many large corporations which face a multitude of risks for which there is a regulatory obligation to insure have set up their own insurance companies. An example is BP which has set up its own insurance company to cover a large part of its everyday risk. These companies are called captive insurance companies.
8.6 Re-insurance
FAST FORWARD
Sometimes the underwriter wants to share some of the risk and he will do this by a process of re-insurance whereby he passes a risk to another insurer in exchange for part of the premium. The nature of risk is such that the ultimate liability may be too big for an individual insurance company.
219
The costs involved in a large natural catastrophe for instance could completely wipe out the assets of a single insurance company. For this reason insurance companies themselves take insurance against their own exposure to the risk they undertake through what is referred to as re-insurance.
(b) (c)
Diversification of life insurance contracts Over recent years, the life assurance industry has launched a number of products to make this type of insurance more attractive. Many life insurance products, although they retain an element of life cover, are essentially savings policies rather than protection policies. Endowment assurance pays out a sum on death or on maturity of the policy, and has often been used as a way of saving to pay off a mortgage. Such policies may be with profits sharing in the longterm performance of the life companys funds or the returns on the investment element of the policy may be linked to the performance of specific unit-linked funds. With single premium bonds, a single lump sum is allocated to one or more funds.
220
Chapter roundup
Within an economy, some people, firms and organisations will have money which is surplus to their needs, and others will have less money than they need for their spending requirements. Credit involves lending money, and the transfer (usually in return for interest payments) of money from surplus units to deficit units. Financial intermediaries, such as banks and building societies, make the provision of credit much easier, by taking deposits from savers and re-lending to borrowers. Credit for households comes from a variety of sources including credit agreements, bank loans and mortgages. A company must have capital to carry out its operations. Many companies start in a small way, often as family businesses, then grow to become public companies, which can invite the public to subscribe for shares. During any given period of time governments need to spend money on outlays of a short, medium and long-term nature. To pay for these outlays governments collect taxes. The government budget deficit is the difference between government expenditures and revenues in any one period, normally a year referred to as a fiscal year. The government deficit in any one fiscal year represents the new borrowing that the government needs to undertake. An intermediary is a go-between, and a financial intermediary is an institution which channels funds from savers to borrowers, by obtaining deposits from lenders and then re-lending them to borrowers. Intermediaries can, for example, provide a link between savers and investors. Firms may obtain long-term or medium-term capital as share capital or as loan capital. Debentures, loan stock, bonds and commercial paper are all types of loan capital. Financial intermediaries include banks and institutional investors such as pension funds, investment trusts and unit trusts. Insurance companies act as intermediaries by bringing together units which want to shed risk and uncertainty together with units which are prepared to take the risk at a price. Risks associated with everyday life can be mitigated or eliminated through insurance. Insurance claims are contingent claims. The insured party benefits only if something adverse happens. The insurance industry is organised in two main types of companies (a) (b) General insurance companies Life companies.
Sometimes the underwriter wants to share some of the risk and he will do this by a process of re-insurance whereby he passes a risk to another insurer in exchange for part of the premium.
221
Quick quiz
1 2 3 List the main sources of credit available to businesses. What is meant by 'maturity transformation'? The functions of commercial financial intermediaries include all the following except: A B C D 4 Maturity transformation Reduction of transactions costs Aggregation Gilt issuing
A 'money market' is best defined as: A B C D A market where organisations raise any form of finance A market where organisations raise long-term finance A market where organisations raise short-term finance A market where Treasury Bills are traded
Advantages of obtaining a stock market listing include all the following except: A B C D Better access to capital markets Ability to make share for share deals Ability to liquidate holdings Greater public scrutiny
A money market financial intermediary is best defined as: A B C D An institution which matches surplus funds holders to deficit funds units. An institution which operates on the Stock Exchange, matching buyers and sellers of stocks and shares. An institution which allows firms to obtain equipment from suppliers by providing leasing or hire purchase finance. An institution which acts as a buffer between the Bank of England and the rest of the UK banking system.
In order for an asset to act as money, it must be: A B C D A note, coin or cheque Legal tender Generally acceptable A perishable commodity
222
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Insurance provides cover against risks that may occur; assurance provides cover against risks that will occur.
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers 38 42
Page 435
223
224
Introduction
In this chapter, we look more closely at three issues. First, we discuss the role of the banks in the financial system and in particular how they create credit and provide liquidity. Secondly we discuss the role of the central bank, and how it influences the functioning of the financial system. Finally we discuss the structure of yields of the various instruments that trade in the financial markets. The three areas are intertwined because the monetary policy of a government, operated through its central bank, influences the behaviour of banks by influencing their credit creation activities, and affects the level and structure of financial yields by setting short run interest rates. As both banks and financial markets are the major sources through which firms and individuals raise capital, the central bank can have a potent impact on the financial markets and the real economy.
Topic list 1 Credit creation and the banking system 2 The role of the central bank 3 Yield on financial instruments
225
Banks (and building societies) create credit when they lend or grant overdrafts, and their activities thus contribute significantly to the increase in the money supply. In practice, the size of the credit multiplier is restricted by 'leakages' and by central bank controls over the liquidity and capital structure of banks.
(c)
Question
Bank's assets
In a retail bank's statement of financial position, which one of the following items do you think would constitute the largest asset? (a) (b) (c) Customers' overdrafts and bank loans Customers' deposits Land and buildings
Answer
The answer is (a). Item (b) is not an asset of the bank it is a liability (a sum of money owed by the bank to its customers). It might be tempting to choose item (c), if you think about the large number of branches owned by the retail banks, but in fact the value of this asset is dwarfed by the banks' lending.
226
(b)
Providing a place for individuals, firms and government to store their wealth. Banks compete with other financial institutions to attract the funds of individuals and firms. The banks then hold the money in two main types of account: (i) (ii) Current accounts Deposit accounts
Lending money in the form of loans or overdrafts. Acting as financial intermediaries by accepting deposits and lending, and in doing so transforming the risk characteristics and maturity characteristics of the lending. Providing customers with a means of obtaining foreign currency, or selling foreign currency, whenever they require it. Banks play a central role in the foreign exchange markets.
The banks also provide a wide range of other commercial services to customers which facilitate trade for the banks' corporate customers. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) Advising and assisting companies, for example advising firms in a takeover bid and assisting companies to issue shares on the stock market. Providing assistance to exporters and importers, for example helping exporters to obtain payment from buyers abroad, and helping importers to pay for goods they buy from foreign suppliers Leasing Debt factoring services Executorship and trustee services Acting as insurance brokers for insurance companies by selling some insurance policies Selling insurance policies of their own, notably life assurance policies Selling pensions Share registration and share dealing services Unit trust business Giving investment advice
227
228
The second company then decides to pay the $800 into the bank (step 3). So the bank is now holding $1,000 in cash, but has accepted total deposits of $1,800. On the basis of the 20% cash ratio, the bank only needs to be holding $360 (20% $1,800) as cash. Accordingly (step 4), the bank lends $640 to another customer seeking a loan. Bank's liabilities (= customer deposits) (1) (2) (3) $1,000 deposit $1,000 deposit $1,000 deposit $800 deposit $1,000 deposit $800 deposit Bank's assets (= cash or loans to customers) $1,000 cash $200 cash $800 loans $200 cash $800 loan $800 cash $200 cash $800 loan $160 cash $640 loan
(4)
The bank can continue with this process of depositing and lending as long as the cash ratio is maintained. However, even by the end of step (4) in our simple example, we can see that, through the process of credit creation, the bank now has deposits of $1,800 compared to the initial deposit of $1,000. So, it has 'created' an extra $800. Ultimately, if the bank kept on lending, applying the 20% cash ratio, total deposits would rise to $5,000 (the initial $1,000 plus an extra $4,000 'created').
The relationship of the total deposits resulting from an initial deposit to that initial deposit is known as the credit multiplier (or deposit multiplier).
The smaller the cash ratio or credit multiplier, the bigger the total of the deposits that a given amount of cash will be able to support and hence the larger the money supply. If a bank decides to keep a cash reserve ratio of 10%, and it receives additional deposits of $1,000, the total increase in bank deposits will be $1,000 10% = $10,000.
229
Note, however, that this 'increase' of $10,000 includes the $1,000 initially deposited. Be careful not to double count the amount of the initial deposit.
Question
Suppose that all the commercial banks in an economy operated on a cash reserve ratio of 20%. How much cash would have to flow into the banks for the money supply to increase by $80 million?
Answer
Call the extra cash $C. Then:
C 20%
C
= 80 + C = 20% (80 + C)
0.8C C
= 16 = $20 million
If an extra $20 million is deposited, the total money supply will rise to $20 million 20% = $100 million. This includes the initial $20 million, so the increase is $80 million.
In practice, the amount of money a bank can create will be considerably less than the multiplier we have calculated. There are constraints on the growth of a bank's deposits (and on the growth of the deposits of all banks in total).
Cash leaks out of the banking system into less formal accumulations. Customers might not want to borrow at the interest rates the bank would charge. Banks should not lend to high-risk customers without good security.
A cash ratio or similar fractional reserve system might be imposed on banks by the government. The People's bank of China (the central bank in China) uses changes in reserve requirements as a tool for helping to control inflation (by controlling the money supply in the economy). It raised the reserve requirement nine times during 2007.
230
A bank's minimum capital requirement is set in relation to its 'risk assets' and is calculated as: 'Weighted risk assets' x trigger ratio'. 'Weighted risk assets' represent the banks assets weighted by category, according to the level of credit risk associated with that category. The trigger ratio is the minimum acceptable level for a bank's capital base relative to its weighted risk assets. The Basel II Agreement set it at 8% minimum, although the Bank of England sets target ratios with each bank individually, and these tend to be around 9% for a commercial bank. In other words, to support $200m of weighted risk assets, a bank requires a minimum $18m capital .
Question
Capital adequacy
A bank has a trigger ratio of 8% on its weighted risk assets. If the bank wants to support $150m of weighted risk assets, what is the minimum level of capital it must have?
Answer
$12m Minimum level of capital required = weighted risk assets trigger ratio $150m 8% = $12m
In the light of the crisis which afflicted the banking systems of many countries in 2008-09, the Basel Committee met in September 2009 to review a comprehensive set of measures to strengthen the regulation, supervision and risk management of the banking sector. It is expected that the Committee's proposals will result in higher capital and liquidity requirements, and less leverage on the banking system. As well as creating a framework to control liquidity and bad debt exposure, the Basel II agreement also sought to improve controls over the banking process. It introduced a new supervisory review process which required financial institutions to have their own internal processes to assess their capital needs and appoint supervisors to evaluate their overall risk profile, to ensure that they hold adequate capital. It also aimed to improve market discipline by requiring banks to publish certain details of their risks, capital and risk management.
You will not be required to calculate a banks weighted risk assets. However, you need to be aware that there are controls in place to regulate how much it can lend.
231
transactions. This is done by transferring funds between the bank accounts of Barclays and Lloyds, which they keep with the Bank of England (as 'operational deposits'). A bank might also need to have some 'near liquid' assets which it can turn into liquid assets quickly, should it find itself with a need for more liquidity. Near-liquid assets earn relatively little interest. A bank will try to keep the quantity of such assets it holds to a safe minimum. Note that, in general, the most profitable assets are the least liquid. (c)
Security. People deposit their money with banks because they are regarded as stable and secure institutions. A bank might lend to some high-risk customers, and suffer some bad debts, but on the whole, a bank will be expected to lend wisely and securely, with a strong likelihood that the loans will be repaid in full and with interest. If it did not, people might put their money somewhere else instead, not with the bank. This is why banks usually give careful consideration to the reliability of the borrower. Often, in doubtful cases, they will ask for security for a loan or overdraft. Security means that in the event of a default on loan repayments by the borrower, the bank can realise the security by selling the secured asset or assets and using the sale proceeds to pay off the debt.
Cash Balance with Bank of England Market loans Bills of exchange Investments Advances Miscellaneous
232
The triple aspects of bank lending profitability, liquidity, and security are evident in a commercial bank's asset structure. (a) About 0.5% to 2% or so of a retail bank's assets might be till money (notes and coin) and deposits with the central bank (the Bank of England in the UK). Most of these assets are held to meet the need for immediate liquidity, and they earn no interest. Some assets are 'near-liquid' which means that they can quickly be converted into liquid deposits. The most important near-liquid assets are loans to the money markets and other money market securities. But near-liquid assets also include bills of exchange and gilt-edged security investments. Near-liquid assets market loans, bills of exchange and gilt-edged security investments might represent around 25% to 30% of a retail bank's assets. (c) The biggest returns are earned by banks on their longer term illiquid assets ie their overdrafts and bank loans to customers. Advances to customers are the biggest proportion of a retail bank's assets (usually about 70%) and the rate of interest on the loans varies according to the perceived risk of the customer as well as current interest rates. Banks' assets include the normal type of fixed assets found in any large organisation eg property and equipment. However, the value of these operational assets is small in relation to the size of loans, even for the big clearing banks.
(b)
(d)
In the UK, the sterling sight and time deposits of the retail banks account for most of their liabilities. Most sterling deposits are provided by the UK private sector (individuals and firms). Other currency deposits are the other main type of liability, consisting of deposits held by customers of UK banks in US dollars, euros and so on. In the UK, there are no exchange control regulations currently in operation, and so private individuals as well as commercial firms and financial institutions are allowed to maintain foreign currency accounts. The bulk of other currency deposits, however, are held by overseas customers of UK banks.
Key terms
M0 (narrow money): Notes and coins in circulation plus the commercial banks operational deposits with the Bank of England (central bank). M4 (broad money): M0 plus sterling deposit accounts with banks and building societies.
Other less important definitions used include M1, M2 and M3 which all contain M0 but are differentiated by the type of deposits they include.
233
The central bank has various functions. These include acting as a banker to the central government and to the commercial banks. In the UK, the Bank of England has responsibility for controlling sterling inflation by setting interest rates. The examiner has stated that, where possible, references to institutions will be to generic types (eg central banks) rather than to particular national institutions. You might be able to make use of your knowledge of institutions in any country in answering questions, but the questions will not be about the specific institutions of any individual country. A central bank is a bank which acts on behalf of the government. The central bank for the UK is the Bank of England. The Bank of England ('the Bank') is a nationalised corporation run by a Court of Directors, consisting of the Governor, Deputy Governor, and some Executive Directors and part-time Directors.
Functions of the Bank of England (as the UKs central bank)
(a)
Monetary stability. The Bank's most important function is maintaining monetary stability in the economy. Since May 1997, the Bank has had operational responsibility for setting interest rates at the level it considers appropriate in order to meet the government's inflation target.
The central bank can also control short-term interest rates by buying or selling government stock in the money market. Such activity is known as open market operations. (b) The bank also has a key role in maintaining the stability of the financial system. In exceptional circumstances, this may require it to act as a lender to the banking system (lender of last resort). When the banking system is short of money, the Bank of England will provide the money the banks need at a suitable rate of interest. This function was demonstrated in a high profile case in Autumn 2007 when the Northern Rock building society applied to the Bank for financial assistance and the funds needed to cover its immediate liabilities. It acts as a banker to the commercial banks. All commercial banks keep a bank account with the Bank of England. This enables the cheque clearing system to operate. At the end of each day the net balances on each bank's accounts with all the other banks are settled through their clearing accounts at the central bank. The funds which banks hold with the central bank act as a liquid reserve for the commercial bank, and are controlled by the fractional reserve ratio. It acts as banker to the central government and holds the 'public deposits'. It is the central note-issuing authority in the UK it is responsible for issuing bank notes in England. It is the manager of the National Debt ie it deals with long-term and short-term borrowing by the central government and the repayment of central government debt. It is the manager of the Exchange Equalisation Account (ie the UK's foreign currency reserves). It acts as advisor to the government on monetary policy.
(c)
Supervision of the banking system in the UK is the responsibility of the Financial Services Authority. This supervision includes ensuring the banks have sufficient capital to cover any business losses (for example, bad debts) and sufficient liquidity to meet customers' day-to-day requirements for cash.
234
(b)
The process whereby this is done currently is known as open market operations by the Bank. This simply describes the buying and selling of eligible bills and other short-term assets between the Bank and the short-term money market.
Open market operations provide the Bank of England (or other central banks) with a method of control over shortterm interest rates. They are thus an important feature of the government's monetary policy, which the Bank implements on its behalf. When bills are bought and sold, they are traded at a discount to their face value, and there is an implied interest rate in the rate of discount obtained. Discounts on bills traded in open market operations have an immediate influence on other money market interest rates, such as the London Inter-Bank Offered Rate (LIBOR), and these in turn influence the 'benchmark' base rates of the major banks. Because the eligible bills and other assets which the Bank of England acquires in its money market operations are short-term assets, a proportion mature each day. The market is then obliged to redeem these claims and must seek further refinancing from the bank. This continual turnover of assets gives the Bank of England the opportunity to determine the level of interest rates day by day.
235
Through its open market operations, a central bank will either buy government stock from commercial banks or sell government stock to them. If the central bank buys government stock, the commercial banks will get extra money in return for the stocks they have sold to the central bank. Therefore, the supply of money will increase, and the banks' ability to create credit through the credit multiplier will also increase. In effect, this increase in the supply of money should make money cheaper (reduce interest rates). Conversely, if the central bank wants to reduce the supply of money through its open market operations (and thereby raise interest rates), it will look to sell government stocks. In buying the stocks, the commercial banks' money base will be reduced, as will the level of credit they can subsequently create through the credit multiplier.
236
In practice, there is a variety of interest rates. To make a profit, institutions that borrow money to re-lend, or that accept deposits which they re-lend (eg banks) must pay lower interest on deposits than they charge to customers who borrow.
(a) (b)
If some interest rates go up, for example the banks' base rates, it is quite likely that other interest rates will move up too, if they have not gone up already. Similarly, if some interest rates go down, others are likely to follow them and move down too.
A central bank affects the general level of interest rates through its influence on short term interest rates. A yield is a general term to describe the return from an investment. It is calculated by expressing the return as a percentage of the market price of the investment. Note this means that yields for bonds are inversely related to bond prices. That is, as the price of the bond falls, the yield % will rise. For example, a $100 bond with a $10 return gives a yield of 10%. But if the bond price falls to $80, yield will be 12.5% (10/80). The yield will remain at $10 because it is referenced to the nominal value of the bond rather than the current price of the bond.
You must remember that yields and interest rates are linked, and you should be able to calculate the impact that changes in interest rates have on changes in yields.
The real value of income from investments is eroded by inflation. The real rate of interest can be calculated by using the formula below. 1 + money rate = 1 + real rate 1 + inflation rate
Nominal rates of interest are rates expressed in money terms. For example, if interest paid per annum on a loan of $1,000 is $150, the rate of interest would be 15%. The nominal rate of interest might also be referred to as the money rate of interest, or the actual money yield on an investment. Real rates of interest are the rates of return that investors get from their investment, adjusted for the rate of inflation. The real rate of interest is therefore a measure of the increase in the real wealth, expressed in terms of buying power, of the investor or lender. Real rates of interest are lower than nominal rates when there is price inflation. For example, if the nominal rate of interest is 12% per annum and the annual rate of inflation is 8% per annum, the real rate of interest is the interest earned after allowing for the return needed just to keep pace with inflation.
The relationship between the inflation rate, the real rate of interest and the money rate of interest is: (1+ real rate of interest) (1+ inflation rate) = 1+ money rate of interest
237
We may rearrange this to find the real rate of interest in the example above. 1 + money rate = 1 + real rate 1 + inflation rate 1.12 = 1.037 1.08 The real rate of interest is thus 3.7%. The real rate of interest is commonly measured approximately, however, as the difference between the nominal rate of interest and the rate of inflation. In our example, this would be 12% 8% = 4%.
FAST FORWARD
Provision of finance brings risk, which will be reflected in the interest charged.
Commercial paper (short term debts issued by a company) can be issued at a discount from the face value, or it can be issued in interest bearing form. The investor is getting the same rate of return regardless of whether the commercial paper is purchased on a discounted or interest bearing basis.
238
On a discounted basis, the investor pays less than the face value or principal amount of the commercial paper and receives the full face at maturity. The quoted discount rate of interest is the discount amount expressed as a percentage of the maturing face amount. On a interest bearing basis, the investor pays for the full face value of the commercial paper and receives the face value plus accrued interest at the time of maturity. The quoted discount or interest rate is converted to a yield to calculate the interest at maturity. This conversion is simply a restatement of the discount rate as a percentage of the initial proceeds rather than the maturing amount.
Yield on Treasury bills
Treasury bills (T-bills) are purchased by investors at less than face value and are redeemed at maturity at face value. The difference between the purchase price and the face value of the bill is the investor's return. The following formula is used to determine the discount yield for T-bills that have three- or six-month maturities:
y= F -P F 360 M
F = = face value P = purchase price M = maturity of bill. For a three-month T-bill (13 weeks) use 91, and for a six-month T-bill (26 weeks) use 182 360 = the number of days used by banks to determine short-term interest rates
3.4.1 Example
What is the discount yield for a 182-day T-bill, auctioned at an average price of $9,719.30 per $10,000 face value?
Solution
y= F -P F 360 M = 10,000 - 9,719.3 10,000 360 182 = 0.0555
The discount yield is 5.55% When comparing the return on investment in T-bills to other short-term investment options, the investment yield method can be used. This yield is alternatively called the bond equivalent yield, the coupon equivalent rate, the effective yield and the interest yield. The yield on a Treasury bill varies according to the method of computation. The discount method relates the investor's return to the face value, while the investment method relates the return to the purchase price of the bill. The discount method tends to understate yields relative to those calculated using the investment method. The following formula is used to calculate the investment yield for T-bills that have three- or six-month maturities: Investment yield = y =
F -P 365 P M
Note that the investment yield method is based on a calendar year: 365 days, or 366 in leap years.
3.4.2 Example
What is the investment yield of a 182-day T-bill, auctioned at an average price of $9,719.30 per $10,000 face value?
239
Solution
y= F P P
365 M
365 182
= 0.0579
Yield calculations on bonds aim to show the return on a gilt or bond as a percentage of either its nominal value or its current price. There are three types of yield calculation that are commonly used, the nominal or flat yield, the current or running yield and the yield to maturity or redemption yield:
Nominal or flat Yield
This is derived by dividing the annual coupon payment by the par value or nominal value of the bond. Nominal yield = C F
3.5.1 Example
If the nominal value of a bond is $100 and the bond pays 4% what is the nominal yield on the bond?
Solution
Nominal yield = 4 100
= 0.04 or 4%
This is calculated by dividing the annual coupon income on the bond by its current market price. Running yield = C P
3.5.2 Example
If the market price of the $100 bond dropped to $96, what is the current yield on the bond?
Solution
Running yield = 4 96
= 0.0417 or 4.17%
Redemption Yield
The yield to maturity or redemption yield, is the rate of return investors earn if they buy the bond at a specific price (P) and hold it until maturity. Mathematically the yield to maturity ( r) is the value that makes the present value of all the coupon payments equal to the purchase price.
240
Interest rates reflect a number of things, including inflation, risk, demand for finance and government monetary policy. A normal yield curve slopes upward. Interest rates on any one type of financial asset will vary over time. In other words, the general level of interest rates might go up or down. The general level of interest rates is affected by several factors. (a)
The need for a real return. It is generally accepted that investors will want to earn a 'real' rate of return on their investment, that is, a return which exceeds the rate of inflation. The suitable real rate of return will depend on factors such as investment risk. Uncertainty about future rates of inflation. When investors are uncertain about what future nominal and real interest rates will be, they are likely to require higher interest yields to persuade them to take the risk of investing, especially in the longer term. Changes in the level of government borrowing. When the demand for credit increases, interest rates will go up. A high level of borrowing by the government, is likely to result in upward pressure on interest rates. Higher demand for borrowing from individuals. If individuals want to borrow more, for example because they feel confident about their level of future earnings, then interest rates will also tend to rise (as the demand for credit rises). Monetary policy. Governments (or the central banks acting on their behalf) control the level of interest rates in order to control inflation. Interest rates abroad. An appropriate real rate of interest in one country will be influenced by external factors, such as interest rates in other countries and expectations about the exchange rate.
(b)
(c) (d)
(e) (f)
Longer term financial assets should in general offer a higher yield than short-term lending. There are several reasons for this. (a) The investor must be compensated for tying up his money in the asset for a longer period of time. If the government were to make two issues of 9% Treasury Stock on the same date, one with a term of five years and one with a term of 20 years (and if there were no expectations of changes in interest rates in the future) then the liquidity preference of investors would make them prefer the five year stock. The concept of liquidity preference is that, if all other things are equal, investors will prefer to hold money (liquidity) rather than bonds or other investments. As an extension of this, it follows that investors will initially prefer short term (more liquid) investments over longer term ones. (b) The only way to overcome the liquidity preference of investors is to compensate them for the loss of liquidity; in other words, to offer a higher rate of interest on longer dated stock.
241
(c)
There is a greater risk in lending longer term than shorter term for two reasons. (i)
Inflation. The longer the term of the asset, the greater is the possibility that the rate of inflation will increase, so that the fixed rate of interest paid on the asset will be overtaken by interest yields on new lending now that inflation is higher. Uncertain economic prospects. The future state of the economy cannot be predicted with certainty. If an organisation wishes to borrow money now for, say, 15 years, there is no certainty about what might happen to that organisation during that time. It might thrive and prosper or it might run into economic difficulties for one reason or another.
(ii)
Investors will require a higher return to compensate them for the increased risk. (d) Note, however, that two other factors also affect the cost of borrowing. (i) (ii) The risk associated with the perceived ability of the borrower to fulfil the terms of the loan Whether or not the loan is secured by a mortgage on an asset
Notice that our yield curve in Figure 1 measures the percentage yield on an asset, and remember that yields rise when the market prices of the stocks falls. One possible reason for the market prices of stocks falling is that markets for shares are bullish and so investors are looking to buy shares (either for capital growth or to earn dividends) instead of holding stocks.
242
3.9.1 Example
Consider the following information on a share: Current dividend per share Market price of share What is the dividend yield? $0.2 $5.0
Solution
Dividend yield = 0.2 Dividend = = 0.04 = 4% Market price 5
As ordinary equities have no maturity and the dividend payments are not constant, it is difficult to calculate a return similar to the yield to maturity. However, approximate measures can be derived if we make assumptions about the dividends. Two such assumptions are normally made. First that the dividend paid is constant forever at level D. In this case if the price is P, the return on equities is given by the dividend yield since with no growth in dividend payments there will be no growth in the value of the firm. The second assumption made is that dividends grow at constant rate 'g'. In this case the rate of return is given by kE = D (1+ g)+ g P = = = = rate of return on equity dividend paid share price dividend growth rate
Where KE D P g
3.9.2 Example
To illustrate, assume the following values for the expected growth, current dividends and current market price: g = 0.05 D = $0.06 P = $2 Calculate the rate of return on equity.
Solution
k =
E
0.06 2
243
P0 P1
D0 D1
Quantity
244
(c) (d)
Ordinary shares, on the other hand, have uncertain dividend payments and uncertain selling prices, that makes the holding period return uncertain.
Another aspect of risk that should be taken into account is credit risk. A corporate bond for example may pay fixed coupons but it may have a high risk of bankruptcy in which case even the coupon payment is rendered uncertain.
Taking these characteristics into account it is accepted that the ranking of securities in terms of risk is as follows. Treasury Bills
Low Risk
Government Bonds
Corporate Bonds
Equities
High Risk
Since individuals are exposed to varying degrees of risk when invest in financial assets, it follows that investors will demand a higher compensation for the higher risk. The relationship between risk and return is thus positive and the determination of the precise relationship between risk and return is the object of financial theory. The accepted relationship between risk and return is shown in the diagram below.
Return
Risk
The return on any asset could be seen as made up of two components: (a) (b) the return from an asset which is free of risk such as government bond (a risk free asset) and an additional return, referred to as the risk premium which represents the compensation for bearing the risk.
245
Chapter roundup
Banks (and building societies) create credit when they lend or grant overdrafts, and their activities thus contribute significantly to the increase in the money supply. In practice, the size of the credit multiplier is restricted by 'leakages', and by central bank controls over the liquidity and capital structure of banks. The central bank has various functions. These include acting as a banker to the central government and to the commercial banks. In the UK, the Bank of England has responsibility for controlling sterling inflation by setting interest rates. In practice, there is a variety of interest rates. To make a profit, institutions that borrow money to re-lend, or that accept deposits which they re-lend (eg banks), must pay lower interest on deposits than they charge to customers who borrow. The real value of income from investments is eroded by inflation. The real rate of interest can be calculated by using the formula below. 1 + money rate = 1 + real rate 1 + inflation rate Provision of finance brings risk, which will be reflected in the interest charged. Interest rates reflect a number of things, including inflation, risk, demand for finance and government monetary policy. A normal yield curve slopes upward.
246
Quick quiz
1 2 3 4 Define the credit multiplier. What three aims must a commercial bank keep in balance? List the likely functions of a central bank. If the banking system has liquid reserves of $225bn and seeks to maintain a reserve ratio of 13%, what will broad money supply be? A B C D 5 A B C D 6 7 $17bn $1,731bn $2,925bn $292,599bn Leakages of cash out of the banking system A reduced reserve ratio Low demand for loans Prudent lending operations
The ability of the banks to create credit is constrained by all the following except:
What is the purpose of capital adequacy rules? A $100 bond which pays 4% currently has a market price of $90. What is the current yield on the bond? A B C D 3.6% 4% 4.44% 5% An expected rise in company profits A fall in share prices in other international stock markets A fall in interest rates (i) and (ii) (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii) (i), (ii) and (iii)
Which of the following would be likely to lead to a rise in share prices on a stock market? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D
247
4 5 6
Capital adequacy rules are designed to ensure that banks have enough capital to cover their risk assets after allowing for the risk of potential bad debts. C B Current yield = 4 = 4.44% 90
7 8
A rise in company profits will encourage people to buy shares, so demand for shares will rise and their prices will also rise: meaning (i) is correct. A fall in share prices in one market tends to lead to falls in share prices in other markets around the world because stock markets are linked. So (ii) is not correct. Interest rates and share prices move in opposite directions. If interest rates are falling, people will look to buy shares instead of bonds, so this increased demand for shares will mean share prices rise. So (iii) is correct.
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
43 47
436
248
249
250
Topic list 1 National income accounting 2 Key measures of national economic output 3 The circular flow of income in the economy 4 The three approaches to national income accounting 5 Interpretation of national income accounting information
Learning outcomes D (i), D (ii) D (i), D (ii) D (i), D (ii) D (i), D (ii) D (i), D (ii)
251
For the assessment, you need to develop an understanding of how the economy functions as a whole and the way in which government policy operates. A basic understanding of the concept of the economy as a system, and an appreciation of the way the economy performs in terms of employment (unemployment), output and prices (inflation) are essential. You should also be aware of the debates within economics about the nature of the macroeconomy, particularly where this affects the conduct of government economic policy.
National income accounting is the system through which economic activity on a national scale is measured.
National income accounting can be viewed from these three different aspects. (a) Output The firms (or government departments and corporations) which produce the goods or services in the national economy
252
(b)
(c)
Expenditure The people or organisations that spend money to buy the goods and services such as consumers (or households), the government and foreign buyers (the overseas sector)
Question
Factors of production
Before proceeding, recall from Chapter 1 what the factors of production are, and what reward is earned by each.
As we shall see later on, the three approaches to the creation of economic wealth give rise to three ways of measuring national economic output: The expenditure approach The income approach The value added approach (also called the output approach)
The identity is illustrated diagrammatically below: Three approaches to measuring the same thing
The diagram illustrates the circular flow of money round the economy. In its simplest form, the national income accounting model shows that, if there are no leakages from the system, the income people receive, equals the amount they spend on goods and services (expenditure) which is in turn equal to the prices of all the goods and services produced (output). Official national income accounts show each approach to the measurement of economic activity (ie the output account, the income account and the expenditure account) as a separate account. In practice, the figures from the three methods differ, so an averaging procedure is often used to determine the overall figure.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 11: National income accounting
253
There are three key measures of national economic output. National income Gross national product (GNP) Gross domestic product (GDP)
Question
National output
The three terms above are often encountered in news reports, and yet are often only vaguely understood. Jot down what you think is the meaning of each, and review what you have written once you come to the end of the chapter.
National income is also called net national product. (a) (b) The terms income and product are just two different aspects of the same circular flow of income. The term net means 'after deducting an amount for capital consumption or depreciation of capital assets'. (We shall return to this point later.)
254
product therefore refers to the total value of income/production from economic activity within the UK. GDP is the most appropriate measure for assessing the productivity of an economy.
Key terms
Gross domestic product: the value of the goods and services produced by an economy in a given period. Gross national product: GDP plus income accruing to domestic residents from investments abroad less income accruing to foreign residents from investments in the domestic economy.
National income is GNP minus an allowance for depreciation of the nation's capital.
255
to view the situation without these distortions and convert GDP at market prices to gross value added at basic prices (which used to be known as GDP at factor cost). Thus Gross value added (GVA) at basic prices = GDP at Market prices Indirect taxes + Subsidies
GVA at basic prices and GDP at factor cost are the same measure, although GVA at basic prices is now the official term. A number of questions still refer to GDP at factor cost, so do not be confused if you see either term.
Question
Which of the following will cause a rise in national income? A B C D An increase in capital consumption (depreciation) A rise in imports A rise in subsidies A rise in indirect taxes
Answer
D A rise in indirect taxes. National income is measured at market prices which are increased by the indirect taxes.
The first column shows Gross Value Added (GVA) which is the output measure of GDP. Adding indirect taxes and subtracting subsidies produces GDP at market prices. Adding the net income from abroad to GDP (column 2) results in the Gross National Income (column 3). Finally, subtracting capital consumption from the Gross National Income results in the National Income at market prices (column 4).
these are not paid out as income to investors), plus transfer payments, net interest and dividends (since these are paid to investors).
There is a circular flow of income in an economy, which means that expenditure, output and income will all have the same total value.
Productive resources
FIRMS
HOUSEHOLDS
Figure 1 Circular flow of income Households earn income because they have provided the factors of production which enable firms to provide goods and services. The income earned is used as expenditure on these goods and services that are made. (a) (b) The total sales value of goods produced should equal the total expenditure on goods, assuming that all goods that are produced are also sold. The amount of expenditure should also equal the total income of households, because it is households that consume the goods and they must have income to afford to pay for them.
At this stage we are assuming there are no withdrawals from, or no injections into, the circular flow of income.
257
(b)
(c) (d)
There are withdrawals from the circular flow of income (savings, taxation, import expenditure) and injections into the circular flow (investment, government spending, export income). Our simplified diagram of the circular flow of income in Figure 1 needs to be amended to allow for two things. Withdrawals (W) from the circular flow of income Injections (J) into the circular flow of income
Key terms
Withdrawals: movements of funds out of the cycle of income and expenditure between firms and households. Injections: movements of funds in the other direction Withdrawals (W) from the circular flow of income (a) (b) (c) Savings (S). Households do not spend all of their income. They save some, and these savings out of income are withdrawals from the circular flow of income. Taxation (T). Households must pay some of their income to the government, as taxation. Taxes cannot be spent by households. Imports (M). When we consider national income, we are interested in the economic wealth that a particular country is earning. (i) (ii) (iii) Spending on imports is expenditure, but on goods made by firms in other countries. The payments for imports go to firms in other countries, for output created in other countries. Spending on imports therefore withdraws funds out of a country's circular flow of income.
Be aware that saving is different from investment; saving simply means withdrawing money from circulation. Think of it as cash kept in a money box rather than being put into a bank to earn interest. Injections (J) into the circular flow of income (a) Investment (I). Investment in capital goods is a form of spending on output, which is additional to expenditure by households. Just as savings are a withdrawal of funds, investment is an injection of funds into the circular flow of income, adding to the total economic wealth that is being created by the country.
258
(b)
Government spending (G). Government spending is also an injection into the circular flow of income. In most mixed economies, total spending by the government on goods and services represents a large proportion of total national expenditure. The funds to spend come from either taxation income or government borrowing. Exports (X). Firms produce goods and services for export. Exports earn income from abroad, and therefore provide an injection into a country's circular flow of income.
(c)
The economy is said to be in equilibrium when injections (J) equal withdrawals (W). So written out in full, equilibrium is reached in an economy when: I Investment + + G Government spending + + X Exports = = S Savings + + T Taxation + + M Imports
However, if injections are greater than withdrawals (J > W) the level of national income will rise. Equally, if withdrawals are greater than injections (W > J) then the level of national income will fall.
Saving (S)
Taxation (T)
Government sector
Foreign sector
259
(ii)
(b)
The income approach. This approach measures the income of individuals from employment and from self-employment, the profits of firms and public corporations and rent on property. (Interest earnings will be included within the profits of companies or the income of individuals.) The value added or output approach. This approach is to measure the value added by all activities which produce goods and services, that is their net output in the period. However, we must take the incremental value added at each stage of production to avoid double counting. (One firm's output might become another firm's input, so if gross totals were used the gross value would be over-stated.)
(c)
Question
We stated above that, in the expenditure approach to measuring national income, expenditures by firms are excluded to avoid double counting. Think carefully about this and ensure that you understand exactly what is meant by it. Jot down an explanation.
Answer
Firms buy goods and services which become costs of the goods or services that they produce and sell themselves. If we included expenditure by firms, we would be double-counting the value of the wealth created by the suppliers of raw materials and components, and the providers of services to other firms.
It will be useful to look at some simplified examples which illustrate the three approaches to measuring national income.
260
The country's government taxes the labour force $2,000 and the company $3,000. The firm's sales of $20,000 are to three types of customer. (a) (b) (c) Domestic consumers spend $11,000. This $11,000 is the post-tax wages earned by the labour force ($7,000) plus the $4,000 in dividends earned by the company's shareholders. The government spends the $5,000 it has raised in taxes. Foreign buyers spend $4,000.
Solution
As we have seen, there are three ways of calculating national income. (a) The expenditure approach Consumers' expenditure Government expenditure Add exports Subtract imports GDP (b) The income approach Income from employment (here pre-tax wages) Gross (pre-tax) profit of the firm GDP The income is measured before deducting tax. (c) The value added or output approach Output of firm at sales value Less cost (sales value) of goods or services purchased from outside firms GDP $ 20,000 (4,000) 16,000 $ 11,000 5,000 16,000 4,000 20,000 (4,000) 16,000 $ 9,000 7,000 16,000
The cost of goods and services purchased from outside firms here just the imported materials of $4,000 has to be subtracted so as either to avoid the double-counting of output, or to remove the value of output produced by firms in other countries.
261
Note how market prices in the official figures above are converted to factor cost by adjusting for taxes and subsidies.
Note: Transfer payments (such as income support or state pensions) need to be excluded from government expenditure, because the government is effectively only transferring these payments from taxpayers to the recipients. Features of expenditure approach (a) (b) (c) Accounts broken down by purchaser Inserts estimated expenditure on non-traded outputs (eg imputed rent) to balance with output approach Adjusted for balance of trade and for market to factor cost.
262
(d) (e)
Useful for detecting trends in spending patterns (for example, public versus private sector, or consumption versus investment). May inflate the real value of national income. Certain public expenditure (eg defence) is not really adding value and some economists argue that such expenditure leads to an overestimate of national income.
Interest earned by individuals and companies on any investments they hold is included in the first two figures. These income components do not include two elements. (a) (b) Income from government pensions or social security payments which are transfer payments. Any value for work done by individuals for no monetary reward, such as housework done by housewives or do-it-yourself home improvements are activities for which no money value can be given, and so are not economic activities.
Transfer payments are payments such as state pensions and benefits that are made by government, where the recipient does not make any contribution to output in return. They are payments which involve the transfer of wealth, rather than a reward for creating new economic wealth. Transfer payments do not lead directly to any increase in marketable output of goods and are therefore excluded from the income figures.
263
Features of income approach (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Accounts broken down by source of income (eg employed vs self-employed) Counts all incomes gross of tax (ie pre-tax) Ignores transfer payments (payments for no productive efforts, eg welfare benefits grants) to avoid double counting Adjusted for imputed values (eg rent from owner-occupied houses) Useful for detecting trends in employment patterns (for example, shift from paid employment to selfemployment) May understate national income if income from self-employed work is not declared, or if income is earned through the black economy
Question
Which of the following is or are transfer payments? (a) (b) Salaries paid to Members of Parliament Incapacity benefit
Transfer payments
Answer
(a) (b) MPs' salaries are not transfer payments. MPs are like any other employees they just happen to be employed by the Government. This falls within the category of social security payments, which are transfer payments. The recipient receives the benefit, but is not making any contribution to output in return.
264
Alternatively, rather than adding the incremental value at each stage of the production process, we could measure the total value of just the final output. The two figures will be the same. Features of output approach (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Accounts broken down by industrial sector Useful in showing trends in contribution to national income from different sectors of the economy (agriculture, manufacturing, services etc). No statistical discrepancy adjustment. The remaining two accounts made to balance to the output account by having balancing figures inserted. May understate the real output of the economy because it will exclude output which is not sold for a market price (for example, DIY or housework). The value of some goods and services (eg education, health care) have to be estimated because they do not have a market price.
Question
The following data relates to the economy of a country over a one year period. Consumers' expenditure General government final consumption Gross domestic fixed capital formation Value of physical decrease in inventories Exports of goods and services Imports of goods and services Taxes on expenditure Subsidies Net income from abroad Capital consumption Required Calculate the following from the above data. (a) (b) (c) Gross value added at basic prices (GDP at factor cost) Gross national product (GNP) at factor cost National income at factor cost $m 18,400 4,540 4,920 20 6,450 6,240 2,760 300 210 1,750
265
Answer
The calculation below also shows GDP and GNP at market prices, although these are not required in the exercise. Consumers' expenditure General government final consumption Gross domestic fixed capital formation Value of physical decrease in inventories Total domestic expenditure Exports Imports GDP at market prices Net property income from abroad GNP at market prices GDP at market prices (see above) Factor cost adjustment Taxes on expenditure Subsidies Gross value added at basic prices (GDP at factor cost) Net property income from abroad GNP at factor cost Capital consumption National income at factor cost $m 18,400 4,540 4,920 (20) 27,840 6,450 (6,240) 28,050 210 28,260 28,050 (2,760) 300 25,590 210 25,800 (1,750) 24,050
National income or GNP per head of the population gives an indication of the trend over time in a country's standard of living, because GNP is measured consistently from year to year, whatever the weaknesses of the measurement system that is used.
266
To see if there has been any real change in the level of activity we must deduct any influence due to inflation. The standard method for turning money GDP or GNP into real measures is to use what is called the GDP deflator in order to take inflation out of the figures. In terms of measuring domestic income and comparing it year on year, real GDP is a more relevant measure. The real GDP is calculated by using a price index referred to as the GDP deflator. This measures the level of base prices as a proportion of a selected base year, which is measured as 100 on the scale. The real GDP for a year, on the same basis as the base year, can be calculated by adjusting the nominal GDP for inflation over the period, as follows. Real GDPnow = Nominal GDPnow Where GDPdbase = GDP deflator in the base year (= 100) GDPdnow = GDP deflator for current year Note that the GDP deflator is not the same as the consumer price index (CPI). The CPI focuses only on a relatively narrow basket of consumer goods, whereas the GDP deflator aims to take account of all goods in the economy. Generally, the CPI is more commonly used. It measures the impact of rising prices on the income of consumers. However, the GDP deflator is more used as an economy-wide measure.
GDPdbase GDPdnow
Solution
Real GDP = 6,000
100 130
= 4,615
National income has serious limitations as a measure of economic wealth and welfare. Nonetheless, it remains an important indicator.
Nonmarket production
Work done where no charge is made will not be included in GDP. This will include, for example, housework, gardening, DIY etc. This makes comparisons of GDP over time less meaningful, particularly since women now do more market production, which is included in GDP, along with the previous household chores. The household
267
chores may take less time with time-saving appliances, the cost of which is again included as part of GDP. In the past, there were more hours of unpaid labor in the house that were not included in GDP. As a result, GDP tends to overstate the output of developed countries compared to less developed countries.
The underground economy
Transactions in the underground economy are not reported, typically for tax evasion or other illegal purposes, understating GDP.
Leisure and human costs
Increased leisure time and improved safety conditions at work, for example, are not reflected in GDP.
Quality variation and new goods
Improvement in the quality of goods (eg dental treatment) and new goods not previously available (such as i-Pods and MP3 players replacing CD players) are not taken into account. The failure to allow for increased quality tends to result in inflation being overstated.
Economic 'bads'
Harmful side effects, such as pollution, are ignored in GDP. In addition, for example, costs of rebuilding houses after flooding or earthquakes, is treated as national income for the year, even though this quite clearly is a cost rather than being a benefit.
268
National income statistics are an indicator of changing living standards in a country over time. Increases in real national income per head over time will indicate rising living standards. Note that real (rather than nominal) figures have to be used to allow for the impact of inflation on the headline figures. Similarly, per capita figures need to be used to adjust for the impact of changes in population size. However, although the overall average real national income per head may have increased over time, this increase may not be evenly distributed across everyone in a country. So policy makers need to be aware of the distribution of income within the economy. Similarly, they need to be aware of the ways in which national income figures may be distorted. For example, if government expenditure increased to fund a war effort, this would increase national income, but it would not indicate an increased standard of living or an increase in the level of economic welfare.
Between countries
Comparing national incomes between countries provides an indicator of differences in economic development and growth. However, again the overall picture may be distorted by the distribution of income within an economy. For example, the oil-rich countries of the Middle East have relatively high average incomes per head, but the wealth is very unevenly distributed across their populations. In order to compare national income figures across countries, the figures also need to be converted into a common currency. However, the figures may still be distorted by movements in exchange rates rather than underlying national income. Finally, there may be non-economic considerations which may influence people's living standards, and which make it difficult to compare living standards through GDP figures alone.
Quality of life indicators such as crime, or education Political system and stability Climate and geographical infrastructure such as transport networks
However, despite these limitations, national income statistics can still be a useful indicator for firms when they are considering international expansion either in respect of sales and marketing growth, in terms of relocating production facilities overseas.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 11: National income accounting
269
Chapter roundup
National income accounting is the system through which economic activity on a national scale is measured.
There are three key measures of national economic output. National income Gross national product (GNP) Gross domestic product (GDP)
There is a circular flow of income in an economy, which means that expenditure, output and income will all have the same total value. There are withdrawals from the circular flow of income (savings, taxation, import expenditure) and injections into the circular flow (investment, government spending, export income). Our basic model of circular flow means that Output = Expenditure = Income. GDP can therefore be measured by focusing on output, income or expenditure. To see if there has been any real change in the level of activity we must deduct any influence due to inflation. The standard method for turning money GDP or GNP into real measures is to use what is called the GDP deflator in order to take inflation out of the figures. National income has serious limitations as a measure of economic wealth and welfare. Nonetheless, it remains an important indicator.
270
Quick quiz
1 Which of the following are withdrawals from the circular flow of income? (a) (b) (c) (d) 2 3 Exports Savings Investment Government spending
Define the income approach to measuring income. Which of the following define GNP at factor cost? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D Consumers' total expenditure on domestically produced goods and services The value of total output produced domestically plus net property income from abroad, minus capital consumption The total income received by residents in a country in return for factor services provided domestically and abroad (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii) (iii) only (i) and (ii)
Fill in the gaps in the following proforma for calculating national income: Consumption + + + Government expenditure Gross domestic capital formation Exports Imports (i) + Taxes Subsidies (ii) + Net property income from abroad (iii) Capital consumption (iv)
5 6
What is capital consumption? What is the equilibrium point of national income in an open economy?
271
5 6
The allowance for depreciation on an economy's capital assets which is deducted from GNP to calculate national income (or net national product). I Investment + + G Government spending + + X Exports = = S Savings + + T Taxation + + M Imports
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
4852
436
272
Macroeconomic theory
Introduction
In macroeconomics, we are looking not at individual spending decisions, investment decisions, pricing decisions, employment decisions, and output decisions but at spending, investment, price levels, employment, output and income in the economy as a whole. Broadly speaking, macroeconomists divide into two camps when looking at macroeconomic decisions: the Keynesians and the monetarists. These two camps have had differing ideas about how national income can be made to grow, how full employment can be achieved, and how booms and slumps of trade cycles can be smoothed out. Keynes argued that the economy should be managed by controlling aggregate demand, and in this chapter we will study the basic elements of the Keynesian model for national income determination and equilibrium.
Topic list 1 The Keynesian approach 2 Aggregate demand analysis: consumption, savings an d investment 3 The multiplier and the accelerator 4 Aggregate supply analysis 5 The determination of national income 6 The business cycle
273
The Keynesian model provides a way of explaining how national income is determined, and how national income equilibrium is reached.
Key terms
Aggregate demand (AD) means the total demand for goods and services in the economy. Aggregate supply (AS) means the total supply of goods and services in the economy. Aggregate Supply depends on physical production conditions the availability and cost of factors of production and technical know-how. However, Keynes was concerned with short-run measures to affect the economy, and he also wrote in a period of high unemployment when there was obviously no constraint on the availability of factors of production. His analysis therefore concentrated on the demand side, and how aggregate demand could be managed.
274
(including income from property abroad) (including money paid as income to residents in other countries for property they hold in the country)
Alternatively, government investment spending on capital items can be included in G leaving I to represent investment by firms only.
Key term
Demand management policies involve the manipulation of total national expenditure (E) by influencing C, I, G or net exports (X M). If we ignore capital consumption, we can equate GNP with national income. This is what we shall do in our analysis of the Keynesian model.
Keynes argued that for an equilibrium to be reached in the national income, not only must AD = AS, but also total planned withdrawals from the circular flow of funds must be equal to total planned injections. Thus, for equilibrium: W = J, and so M + T + S = X + G + I In the long term W will always equal J. (a) The difference between the value of imports M and the value of exports X is the balance of payments deficit (or surplus). Even in the short term, this difference must be balanced by borrowing (or lending abroad), as we shall see in a later chapter. The difference between government spending and taxation can only be made up by government borrowing. Loans are eventually repaid. In the long run, savings will also equal investments, even though the people who save and the firms who invest are not the same.
(b) (c)
However, although W and J will be equal retrospectively and in the long run, it does not follow that planned J and planned W will equal each other in the short run, since injections and withdrawals are made by different people. This frustration of plans in the short run causes national income to change over time. The imbalance between J and W creates factors which can make the level of national income change. Keynes argued that the imbalance between planned withdrawals and planned injections explained trade cycles the fluctuations in national income which give rise to booms and slumps which prevent an economy from settling down at an equilibrium level.
275
Consumption expenditure depends on income. It might be possible for a government to take measures to boost aggregate demand in the economy, although some price inflation will probably result. When there is inflation in the economy, measures could be taken to suppress aggregate demand.
2.2 Savings
There are two ways of saving. One is to hold the income as money (banknotes and coin, or in a current bank account). The other way is to put money into some form of interest-bearing investment. In the long run, there is no reason for people to hold banknotes or keep money in a current bank account, unless they intend to spend it fairly soon. If this is so, income that is not spent will be saved and income that is saved will, eventually, be invested. (The people who put their money into interest-bearing savings are not making any investment themselves in capital goods, but the institutions with whom they save will use the deposits to lend to investors and so indirectly there will be a real increase in investment when people save money in this way.)
Question Answer
The amount that people save will depend on: (a) (b)
What do you think are the main factors influencing the amount that people will save?
How much income they are getting, and how much of this they want to spend on consumption How much income they want to save for precautionary reasons, for the future (for example, to pay unexpected bills)
276
(c)
Interest rates. If the interest rate goes up we would expect people to consume less of their income, and to be willing to save and invest more.
We can therefore conclude that in conditions of equilibrium for national income: Y = C+S and, Y = C + I and so, I = S In the short run, however, savings and investment might not be equal and so there might not be equilibrium.
Question
A household's disposable income has increased from $200 to $250 per week, and consumption has increased from $180 to $220. What is the household's marginal propensity to consume?
Answer
0.8
In our analysis (ignoring G, T, X and M) saving and consumption are the only two uses for income, so MPC + MPS must = 1. Taking autonomous and non-autonomous consumption together, we can say that a household's expenditure in a given period is made up of 2 elements:
(a) (b)
A fixed amount (a) which is the autonomous consumption. A further constant percentage of its income (b% of Y) representing the MPC.
Figure 1 shows how autonomous and non-autonomous consumption combine to give total consumption. The gradient of the consumption function (C) reflects the MPC.
277
The 45o line Y = C maps the points where income = consumption (expenditure), and therefore where average propensity to consume (APC) is 1. If C > Y then we are witnessing dis-saving, and APC is greater than 1: ie Consumption > 1. Income
Where Y > C then a household is making savings over and above their consumption. APC is less than 1.
Similarly, a national economy as a whole will spend a fixed amount, a, plus a constant percentage (b%) of national income Y. We can then state the overall consumption function as C = a + bY. The marginal propensity to consume (MPC) will be represented by the gradient b, because it is the proportion of an extra $1 earned that is spent as consumption. The average propensity to consume (APC) will be the ratio of consumption to income: C a + bY Y = Y For example, suppose an individual household has fixed spending of $100 per month, plus extra spending equal to 80% of its monthly income. When its monthly income is $800, its consumption will be: $100 + 80% of $800 = $740 When its monthly income is $1,000 its consumption will be: $100 + 80% of $1,000 = $900 Because the household's marginal propensity to consume is 80%, consumption has increased by $160 following a rise in income of $200.
Question
(a) (b) When its income is $800 When its income is $1,000
Using the above figures, calculate the household's average propensity to consume:
278
Answer
(a) (b) APC = APC = 740 = 92.5% 800
900 = 90% 1,000
Note: If MPC < APC an increase in income will lead to a reduction in APC. But if MPC > APC an increase in income will lead to an increase in APC.
Changes in the marginal propensity to consume and the marginal propensity to save will involve a change of preference by households between current consumption and saving for future benefits. A cause of such a change might be a change in interest rates, which makes the investment of savings more or less attractive than before.
(b)
(c)
(d) (e)
(f)
Among the determinants of the MPC are taste and attitude. If a household believes that saving is a virtue it will save as much as possible and spend as little as possible. In the economy as a whole, a general belief in the value of thrift may mean that the MPC is low. Nowadays, however, the prestige attached to the possession of consumer goods may have overcome the admiration for thrift, making the MPC higher than it once was.
279
(b) (c)
(d)
(e)
The rate of interest on capital The marginal efficiency of capital (MEC) invested. (We will look at MEC in more detail later, but it is the rate of return at which the NPV of a project is zero.) Expectations about the future and business confidence, including expectations about future cash flows and profit flows arising from the investment The strength of consumer demand for goods Opportunity cost of investment
280
The demand for funds to invest by firms and the willingness of investors to lend their savings for investment (the supply of funds) should adjust to one another through the price mechanism of the interest rate. (a)
Higher interest rates should make firms less willing to invest, because the marginal efficiency of capital will have to be higher to justify the higher interest cost. However, firms cannot always cut their investment plans quickly and at short notice.
Higher interest rates should have two other effects. (i) (ii) (b) They will tempt individuals to consume less of their income and save more, with a view to investing it. They will also tempt individuals to invest more of their savings that is, to hold less cash and more interest-bearing investments.
An investment involves the acquisition of more fixed capital (buildings, machinery, plant and equipment) or inventories of goods and so on. The importance of the interest rate for investment should therefore be apparent in the marginal efficiency of capital. Firms should go on adding to their capital provided that the marginal efficiency of capital exceeds the interest rate, which is its marginal cost.
(b)
Investment can be in either the public or the private sector of the economy, although the money to finance the investment might need to come from different sources. (a)
Private sector investment will come from retained profits, new issues of shares, or borrowing. However, in an economic recession profits might be low, and investors might lack confidence in a recovery, so that new share issues may be difficult on a large scale. Public sector investment might be financed by higher taxation, or by an increased deficit between government income and expenditure, that is, a higher public sector net cash requirement (PSNCR).
Public sector spending should have socially valuable spin-off effects, such as improved roads, sewers and public buildings. However, a high PSNCR, meaning large government borrowings, might force up interest rates in the capital markets and crowd out private sector investment, by making it too expensive for firms to borrow and invest profitably. (Keynesian economists deny that such crowding out takes place, however.)
281
There are two additional reasons why investment is very important. (a) The act of investment represents consumption forgone now in order to increase the capacity to produce, and therefore to consume, in the future. It is through investment (or lack of it) that the future shape and pattern of economic activity is pre-determined. The growth rate of the economy is determined not only by the technological progress or the increases in the size and quality of the labour force but also by the rate at which the capital stock is increased or replaced. Investment represents an addition to the existing capital stock. If that addition is greater than the amount by which the capital stock depreciates, then the capital stock of the economy is growing and so is the capacity of the economy to produce more goods and services. Hence investment is an important determinant of the long-term growth rate of an economy.
(b)
We can illustrate the relationship between investment and national income as in Figure 2. For the moment, we assume that we are dealing with a closed economy (no imports or exports) and with no government intervention (no taxation or subsidies). We also assume that investment is constant (autonomous) and not related to national income levels. Aggregate demand (AD) in the economy is represented by C + I. The economy will be in equilibrium where aggregate demand equals the output of the economy, or aggregate supply (AS). When AD > AS, national income will need to rise to restore the equilibrium position. This can be achieved through new injections into the economy through investment. We can see this at Y1 where AD > AS, but I > S. However, the excess of investment over savings (I > S) will provide the injection necessary for the economy to grow and restore equilibrium, at YE. At this equilibrium point, savings and investment are equal. Because we are looking at a closed economy with no government intervention, saving is the only withdrawal and investment is the only injection. Therefore, at the equilibrium point injections equal withdrawals.
282
Where Q is the anticipated annual inflow, r is the interest rate, and n is the time period when the inflow will occur. From this we can see that the PV will vary inversely to interest rates, meaning that if interest rates increase, the PV of the investment will fall, ceteris paribus.
283
Interest rate
MEC
Quantity of investment
Changes in national income begin with a small change in expenditure, leading to an even larger eventual change in national income, due to the multiplier effect.
Key term
The ratio of the total increase in national income to an initial injection is called the multiplier. Multiplier = Total increase in national i ncome Initial increase in national income
The multiplier can be defined as a measure of the effect on total national income of a unit change in a component of aggregate demand: I, G or X. Multiplier values can therefore be measured specifically for each of these separately.
284
Investment multiplier =
Eventual change in national income Initial change in investment spending Eventual change in national income Initial change in government spending
However, although we have identified that a 'snowball effect' has been created, it will not continue indefinitely, because at each stage a proportion of the extra income is lost through withdrawals (savings). In this example, the initial increase in income of $200 will result in a final increase in national income of $2,000. The multiplier is 10.
Note that at the new equilibrium, savings of $200 equal the initial increase in expenditure of $200 but national income has risen $2,000.
285
If the marginal propensity to consume were 80%, the marginal propensity to save would be 20% and the multiplier would only be 5. Because people have saved more of their extra income than they would have done if MPS had been 10%, the total increase in national income through extra consumption will be less.
286
it will set off a general expansionary process, and the eventual rise in national income will exceed the initial increase in aggregate demand. This can have important implications for a government when it is planning for growth in national income through a demand management policy, using levels of taxation and government expenditure to influence levels of aggregate demand in the economy. By an initial increase in expenditure, a government can 'engineer' an even greater increase in national income, (provided that the country's industries can increase their output capacity), depending on the size of the multiplier.
(c)
Whereas the multiplier in a closed economy is the reciprocal of the marginal propensity to save, the multiplier in an open economy, taking into account government spending and taxation, and imports and exports, will be less. This is because government taxation and spending on imports reduces the multiplier effect on a country's economy. For an open economy: 1 Multiplier = s + m + t Where s is the marginal propensity to save m is the marginal propensity to import t is the marginal propensity to tax ie the amount of any increase in income that will be paid in taxes. The multiplier as defined in this way may still be represented as below. Multiplier = 1 1 , but this is now the same as (reflecting the impact of withdrawals as a whole). 1- MPC MPW
For example, if in a country the marginal propensity to save is 10%, the marginal propensity to import is 45% and the marginal propensity to tax is 25%, the size of the multiplier would be: 1 1 0.1+ 0.45 + 0.25 = 0.80 = 1.25
287
3.8 Changes in equilibrium national income and the multiplier: a graphical representation
It is possible to show the multiplier effect in the form of a diagram.
The multiplier is a vital part of macroeconomic theory. You should understand this diagram clearly and must also be confident you can apply the formula for calculating the multiplier. In Figure 4, the horizontal axis represents national income (Y). The vertical axis represents planned or desired expenditure. The national economy is in equilibrium when actual output (which is the same as national income) is equal to desired expenditure. This occurs at any point along the 45 line Y=E. On to this basic picture we have superimposed two other lines. (a) The lower is the consumption function we described in Section 2. This consists of autonomous expenditure (a), which occurs even when income is zero, plus the proportion of income which is spent in accordance with the marginal propensity to consume (bY). Desired expenditure within the economy is not limited to consumption; we must also consider the injections, government spending (G), investment (I), and net exports (X-M). If we assume these are constant, total actual expenditure for any level of national income is shown by the upper line E = C + G + I + (X M).
Planned Expenditure (E) Y=E E = C + G + I + (X - M) C = a + bY
(b)
Equilibrium national income in Figure 4 is at Ye, where Y = E = C + G + I + (X M). But what will happen if the economy has unemployed resources at national income Ye, and total expenditure is increased that is, if C, G, I or (X M) increases? By how much will national income increase? This is shown in Figure 5.
288
Y=E E2 E1
45
Y1
Figure 5 Multiplier effect
Y2
If injections increased (for example, through an increase in government spending or extra exports) then there would be a shift upwards in the E curve from E1 to E2. In Figure 5, the equilibrium level of income has now increased from Y1 to Y2. Notice however that the increase in the level of income from Y1 to Y2 is bigger than the increase in injections (E1 to E2). In other words, total national income has increased by more than the amount of the initial increase in expenditure, and this is a portrayal of the multiplier effect.
However, there are several important factors that limit the significance of the multiplier. (a) (b) (c) It is relevant to a demand-deficient economy with high unemployment of resources. If there is full employment, any increase in demand will lead to inflation rather than a growth in the economy. The leakages from the circular flow of income might make the value of the multiplier very low. This is relevant to the UK, for example, where there is a high marginal propensity to import. There may be a long period of adjustment before the benefits of the multiplier are felt. If a government wants immediate action to improve the economy, relying on demand management and the multiplier could be too slow. The consumption function in advanced economies is probably more volatile than Keynes believed. If consumption is unpredictable, measures to influence national income through the multiplier will be impossible to predict too.
(d)
289
Changes in national income can be explained partially by the accelerator principle, which is the mechanism by which changes in investment spending are proportionally greater than changes in consumption spending, and therefore investment spending is more susceptible to bigger upturns and downturns.
Key term
Accelerator principle: the theory that investment changes disproportionately in response to change in output.
The accelerator principle assumes that if there is a small change in the output of consumer goods, there will be a much greater change in the output of capital equipment required to make those consumer goods. This change in production of capital equipment (investment spending) speeds up the rate of economic growth, or slump. A numerical example might help to illustrate this principle. Suppose that a firm makes biscuits and has 100 ovens in operation. The life of each oven is 5 years. (a) (b) If the demand for biscuits is constant, on average, 20 ovens must be replaced each year. If the demand for biscuits now rises by, say, 10% the firm will need 110 ovens in operation. During the first year of the increase, the demand for ovens will be 30 units (instead of the 20 which it would have bought under its usual replacement cycle). This is made up of replacement of 20 ovens and an extra requirement of 10 ovens to bring the total to 110.
So a 10% rise in demand for consumer goods results in a 50% rise in demand for capital goods in the short term. This is an example of the accelerator at work! The accelerator principle indicates how, when the demand for consumer goods rises, there will be an even greater proportional increase in the demand for capital goods. This speeds up growth in national income. (a) If demand for biscuits now remains constant at the new level, annual replacement of capital equipment will average 22. There is consequently the danger that there will be over-capacity in the oven-making industry because the short-term peak demand of 30 ovens per annum is not maintained. This means that unless the rate of increase in consumer demand is maintained, over-capacity in capital goods industries is likely to occur.
(b)
290
The extent of the change in investment depends on two things. (a) (b) The size of the change in consumer demand The capital-output ratio. This is the ratio of capital investment to the volume of output, in other words how much capital investment is needed to produce a quantity of output. For example, if the capital output ratio is 1:3, it would need capital investment of $1 to produce an extra $3 of output per year and so if demand went up by say, $3 billion, it would need an extra $1 billion of investment to produce the extra output to meet the demand. Accelerator theory assumes firms maintain a constant capital/output ratio.
Note: Accelerator theory also assumes that firms replace worn out capital each year (replacement investment). Total investment therefore equals additional investment required to meet additional demand plus replacement investment.
Aggregate supply determines the way aggregate demand influences inflation and unemployment.
So far in this chapter we have concentrated on issues related to aggregate demand, but it is important to remember that the equilibrium level of national income is determined by both aggregate supply and aggregate demand. The aggregate supply curve shows the amount of goods and services that producers in the economy would supply at a price level. It expresses the ability of the economy to produce goods and services. The aggregate supply curve can take a number of shapes. The aggregate supply curve will be flat if supply can increase without raising the price level. This could be the case when there are idle resources in the economy. However, the aggregate supply curve will usually be upward sloping, for the reasons applying to the microeconomic supply curves mentioned in earlier chapters. A higher price means that it is worthwhile for firms to hire more labour and produce more because of the higher revenue-earning capability. So at the macroeconomic level, an increasing price level implies that many firms will be receiving higher prices for their products and will increase their output. In the economy as a whole, supply will at some point reach a labour constraint, when the entire labour force is employed. When there is full employment, and firms cannot find extra labour to hire, they cannot produce any more, even when prices rise, unless there is some technical progress in production methods. The aggregate supply curve will therefore rise vertically when the full employment level of output is reached
Equilibrium national income is determined using aggregate supply and aggregate demand analysis.
291
Keynes argued that a national economy will reach equilibrium where the aggregate demand curve and aggregate supply curve intersect (AD = AS). The value of the aggregate demand and supply model is that it allows us to show the impact of changes in AD or AS on output and price level; hence (un)employment and inflation. We can assume that the level of employment in a country will be a function of the level of national income, so 'output' on the model will also be an indicator of employment.
Prices AD AS The economy reaches full employment level, and so cannot produce more real output of goods and services
YF
Figure 6 Equilibrium national income, using aggregate supply and aggregate demand analysis
Figure 6 illustrates that the equilibrium level of national income will be at the intersection of the AD curve and AS curves ie at Y. The difference between the equilibrium national income Y and the full employment national income YF shows how much national income could be increased with the resources at the economy's disposal. Y therefore represents the level of satisfied demand in the economy. (Note that the aggregate demand function assumes constant prices.) Two points follow on immediately from this initial analysis. (a) (b) Equilibrium national income Y might be at a level of national income below full employment national income YF. On the other hand, the AD curve might cut the AS curve above the point at which it becomes vertical, in which case the economy will be fully employed, but price levels will be higher than they need to be. There will be inflationary pressures in the economy.
292
A country will usually continue to seek economic growth, but to achieve a real increase in living standards rather than simply to cause inflation, both AD and AS curves in Figure 7 will now have to shift to the right.
AS
293
If you are not sure about this point, a simple numerical example might help to explain it better. Suppose that in Ruritania there is full employment and all other economic resources are fully employed. The country produces 1,000 units of output with these resources. Total expenditure (that is, aggregate demand) in the economy is 100,000 Ruritanian dollars, or 100 dollars per unit. The country does not have any external trade, and so it cannot obtain extra goods by importing them. Because of pay rises and easier credit terms for consumers, total expenditure now rises to 120,000 Ruritanian dollars. The economy is fully employed, and cannot produce more than 1,000 units. If expenditure rises by 20%, to buy the same number of units, it follows that prices must rise by 20% too. In other words, when an economy is at full employment, any increase in aggregate demand will result in price inflation. The Keynesian argument is that if a country's economy is going to move from one equilibrium to a different equilibrium, there needs to be a shift in the aggregate demand curve. To achieve equilibrium at the full employment level of national income, it may therefore be necessary to shift the AD curve to the right (upward) or the left (downwards).
The diagram at Figure 8 and the accompanying ideas are important for your assessment.
In Figures 8 and 9 we showed how changes in aggregate demand could affect the economy. However, there may also be changes in aggregate supply. For example, a major rise in raw material prices or labour costs could lead to a reduction in supplies, as could a fall in productivity due to technological problems.
294
5.5 Stagflation
In the 1970s there was a problem with stagflation: a combination of unacceptably high unemployment and unacceptably high inflation. One of the causes was diagnosed as the major rises in the price of crude oil that took place. The cost of energy rose and this had the effect of rendering some production unprofitable. The supply curve shifted to the left as a result, leading to a rise in prices and a contraction in output. The way changes in aggregate supply lead to stagnation is illustrated in Figure 10.
Figure 10 Stagflation
National income falls and both prices and unemployment rise. Any long term major increase in costs (a price shock) is likely to have this effect. Conversely, there could be situations where the supply curve shifts outwards. For example, deliberate supply-side government policies such as tax reductions or subsidies would lead to an expansion of output and lower prices. Equally, the supply curve could be shifted to the right following improvements as a result of technological change, or due to falls in the cost of inputs such as energy and raw materials.
Trade cycles are explained in Keynesian economics as the combined effect of the multiplier and the accelerator.
Recession Depression
Recovery Boom
Recession tends to occur quickly, while recovery is typically a slower process. Figure 11 below can be used to help explain the phases of a business cycle.
reduced and business failures will occur as firms find themselves unable to sell their goods. Production and employment will fall. The general price level will begin to fall. Business and consumer confidence are diminished and investment remains low, while the economic outlook appears to be poor. Eventually, in the absence of any stimulus to aggregate demand, a period of full depression sets in and the economy will reach point B.
Output Actual output D A C B Trend in output
Time
296
Governments will be keen to prevent inflation becoming too high and may look to control aggregate demand by increasing taxes or raising interest rates. It can be argued that wide fluctuations in levels of economic activity are damaging to the overall economic well-being of society. The inflation and speculation which accompanies boom periods may be inequitable in their impact on different sections of the population, while the bottom of the trade cycle may bring high unemployment. Governments generally seek to stabilise the economic system, trying to avoid the distortions of a widely fluctuating trade cycle. Whereas in a recession they will try to bolster aggregate demand, during a boom they will try to keep it in check through raising taxation or interest rates, and by reducing public expenditure.
It is important that you can not only recognise the characteristics of each phase of the business cycle, but also the appropriate policy for a government to employ at each stage.
297
Chapter roundup
The Keynesian model provides a way of explaining how national income is determined, and how national income equilibrium is reached.
Consumption expenditure depends on income. It might be possible for a government to take measures to boost aggregate demand in the economy, although some price inflation will probably result. When there is inflation in the economy, measures could be taken to suppress aggregate demand.
Changes in national income begin with a small change in expenditure, leading to a larger eventual change in national income, due to the multiplier effect. Changes in national income can be explained partially by the accelerator principle, which is the mechanism by which changes in investment spending are proportionally greater than changes in consumption spending, and therefore investment spending is more susceptible to bigger upturns and downturns.
Aggregate supply determines the way aggregate demand influences inflation and unemployment. Equilibrium national income is determined using aggregate supply and aggregate demand analysis. Trade cycles are explained in Keynesian economics as the combined effect of the multiplier and the accelerator.
298
Quick quiz
1 2 3 4 If total national expenditure is E, what is the equation used to show how E is calculated? What are the marginal propensity to consume and the marginal propensity to save? How might a government try to influence the volume of investment by firms? Injections into the economy are: A B C D 5 Consumption and Investment Investment and Government Expenditure Investment, Government Expenditure and Export Demand Consumption, Investment, Government Expenditure and Export Demand
If a consumption function has the formula C = 750 + 0.4Y where is Y the change in national income, and injections are 500, then equilibrium national income will be at: A B C D 833 1,250 2,083 3,125
If the MPC is greater for the poor than the rich then a redistribution of national income in favour of the rich will: A B C D Raise savings out of a given income Increase the multiplier Decrease the MPS Stimulate import demand
A deflationary gap occurs when: A B C D Aggregate demand is insufficient to buy up all the goods and services the company is capable of producing. Aggregate demand is more than sufficient to buy up all the goods and services produced by an economy. A government attempts to spend its way out of recession. A government is cutting its level of expenditure.
8 9
What is the multiplier effect? In an aggregate demand and supply diagram, what would be the consequences if the aggregate supply curve shifted inwards? A B C D Prices would rise and national income would rise Prices would fall and national income would rise Prices would fall and national income would fall Prices would rise and national income would fall
10
In an economy, the marginal propensity to consume is 0.85. What is the multiplier in that economy?
299
4 5 6 7 8 9
1 1 = 0.15 1- 0.85
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
5355
438
300
Topic list 1 Inflation and its consequences 2 Unemployment 3 Unemployment and inflation
301
High rates of inflation are harmful to an economy. Inflation redistributes income and wealth. Uncertainty about the value of money makes business planning more difficult. Constantly changing prices impose extra costs.
1.1 Inflation
Key term
Inflation is the name given to an increase in price levels generally. It is also manifest in the decline in the purchasing power of money. Historically, there have been very few periods when inflation has not been present in national economics. We discuss below why high rates of inflation are considered to be harmful. However, it is important to remember that deflation (falling prices) is normally associated with low rates of growth and even recession. It would seem that a healthy economy may require some inflation. This is recognised in the current UK inflation target of 2%, and the European Central Bank's target of 2%. Certainly, if an economy is to grow, the money supply must expand, and the presence of a low level of inflation will ensure that growth is not hampered by a shortage of liquid funds.
(b)
(c)
(d)
302
(e)
Consumer behaviour People may stockpile goods fearing price increases later. This could create shortages for other people who haven't already stockpiled themselves.
303
Demand pull inflation arises from an excess of aggregate demand over the productive capacity of the economy. Demand pull inflation: inflation resulting from a persistent excess of aggregate demand over aggregate supply, due to constraints on supply in the economy, for example if full employment levels have been reached. Demand pull inflation occurs when the economy is buoyant and there is a high aggregate demand, in excess of the economy's ability to supply. (a) (b) (c) Because aggregate demand exceeds supply, prices rise. Since supply needs to be raised to meet the higher demand, there will be an increase in demand for factors of production, and so factor rewards (wages, interest rates, and so on) will also rise. Since aggregate demand exceeds the output capability of the economy, it should follow that demand pull inflation can only exist when unemployment is low. A feature of inflation in the UK in the 1970s and early 1980s, however, was that high inflation occurred alongside high unemployment.
Key term
There are two main causes of demand pull inflation. Fiscal. Government policies affect aggregate demand in an economy. For example, an increase in government spending or a reduction in taxes and interest rates will raise demand in the economy. However, if supply is relatively inelastic and expands to meet the increased demand, the result will be higher prices rather than the economic growth the government had intended. Credit. If levels of credit extended to customers increase, expenditure is likely to follow suit. In this case, inflation is likely to be accompanied by customers increasing their debt burdens. Traditionally Keynesian economists saw inflation as being caused by Demand pull factors. However, they now accept that Cost push factors are involved as well.
Cost push inflation arises from increases in the costs of production. Cost push inflation occurs where the costs of factors of production rise regardless of whether or not they are in short supply, and where the rise in costs is not matched by an increase in productivity. This appears to be particularly the case with wages.
Key term
Cost push inflation: inflation resulting from an increase in the costs of production of goods and services, e.g. through escalating prices of imported raw materials or from wage increases. In this context it is important to distinguish between exogenous and endogenous factors. Exogenous factors are things that cause inflation without being related to the level of aggregate demand in the economy. Endogenous factors are directly related to the level of aggregate demand in the economy. Therefore, if wages rise even though the demand for labour has not increased, the wage rises are an exogenous factor which causes cost plus inflation.
304
Key terms
Quantity theory of money: theory which argues that changes in the level of prices are caused predominantly by changes in the supply of money. The quantity theory of money is expressed as: MV = PT (the Fisher equation) Where M = money supply V = velocity of circulation (the average number of times money is used in a year) P = the average price of each transaction T = the number of transactions in a year The equation is, in effect, restating the idea from national income accounting that national output must be equal to national income. MV must be equivalent to PT because they are two ways of measuring the same transactions. However, monetarists also make some key assumptions when applying the quantity theory of money. Monetarists assume that the velocity of circulation is constant in the short run, and so are the number of transactions in a year. Therefore changes in price must be a function of money supply in the economy. In other words, P = f (M). Therefore if money supply grows at a faster rate than the level of output in the economy, then price levels will rise (inflation). Keynesians, by contrast, challenge these assumptions. They do not accept that the velocity of circulation is constant or that the number of transactions remain constant, and argue that the relationship between the money supply and inflation is far more complex than the monetarists claim.
305
Question
According to the Fisher equation, if an economy's money supply increases, what will happen to the level of prices in that economy?
Answer
The increase in the money supply will lead to an increase in price levels in the future.
2 Unemployment
FAST FORWARD
The monetarist concept of a stable equilibrium implies that with zero price inflation, there is a natural optimal level of unemployment, and a rate of economic growth and balance of trade position from which the economy will not deviate. Monetarism focuses on economic stability in the medium to long term, which can only be achieved by abandoning short-term demand management goals.
Number of unemployed 100% Total workforce The number of unemployed at any time is measured by government statistics. If the flow of workers through unemployment is constant then the size of the unemployed labour force will also be constant.
Flows into unemployment are:
(a)
Members of the working labour force becoming unemployed (i) (ii) (iii) Redundancies Lay-offs Voluntary quitting from a job
(b)
People out of the labour force joining the unemployed (i) (ii) School leavers or university graduates without a job Others (for example, carers) rejoining the workforce but having no job yet
Unemployed people finding jobs Laid-off workers being re-employed Unemployed people stopping the search for work
In the UK, the monthly unemployment statistics published by the Office for National Statistics (ONS) count only the jobless who receive benefits. The ONS also produce figures based on a quarterly survey of the labour force known as the International Labour organisation measure (ILO measure) that provides seasonally adjusted monthly data. This figure is considered to be more useful because it is also an internationally comparable measure.
306
It is inevitable that some unemployment is caused not because there are not enough jobs to go round, but because of the friction in the labour market (difficulty in matching quickly workers with jobs), caused perhaps by a lack of knowledge about job opportunities. These are imperfections in the labour market. In general, it takes time to match prospective employees with employers, and individuals will be unemployed during the search period for a new job. Frictional unemployment is temporary, lasting for the period of transition from one job to the next. This occurs in certain industries, for example building, tourism and farming, where the demand for labour fluctuates in seasonal patterns throughout the year and where staff are often employed on temporary contracts. This occurs where long-term changes occur in the conditions of an industry. It is likely to result from either a long-term fall in demand for the good or service, or from changes in production methods which mean that labour-intensive production is replaced by capitalintensive production (technology). A feature of structural unemployment is high regional unemployment in the location of the industry affected. This is a form of structural unemployment, which occurs when new technologies are introduced. (a) (b) Old skills are no longer required. There is likely to be a labour saving aspect, with machines doing the job that people used to do.
Seasonal
Structural
Technological
With automation, employment levels in an industry can fall sharply, even when the industry's total output is increasing.
307
Comments
Past experience has shown that domestic and foreign trade go through cycles of boom, decline, recession, recovery, then boom again, and so on. (a) (b) During recovery and boom years, the demand for output and jobs is high, and unemployment is low. During decline and recession years, the demand for output and jobs falls, and unemployment rises to a high level. Keynes introduced the concept of 'demanddeficient' unemployment to illustrate that unemployment was a result of insufficient aggregate demand in the economy.
Cyclical unemployment can be long-term, and a government might try to reduce it by doing what it can to minimise a recession or to encourage faster economic growth.
Real wage unemployment
This type of unemployment is caused when the supply of labour exceeds the demand for labour, but real wages do not fall for the labour market to clear. This type of unemployment is normally caused by strong trade unions which resist a fall in their wages. Another cause of this type of unemployment is the minimum wage rate, when it is set above the market clearing level. Some people argue that real wage unemployment is a type of voluntary unemployment. This occurs when people are unwilling to work at existing wage rates.
Voluntary
Seasonal employment and frictional unemployment will be short-term. Structural unemployment, technological unemployment, and cyclical unemployment are all longer term, and therefore more serious for an economy. The causes of unemployment can be summarised as follows:
Category Demanddeficient Comments
A fall in demand for goods and services means that the equilibrium level of output below the full employment position. The fall in aggregate demand could come from a fall in consumer expenditure; a fall in business investment (which will reduce aggregate demand); a decline in exports, or a fall in government expenditure. In the 2008/09 recession, many governments have been faced with demand-deficient unemployment. As a result, they have adopted expansionary fiscal and monetary policies (eg lowering interest rates) to try to boost aggregate demand and reduce the extent of demand-deficient unemployment.
Structural change
The demand for labour falls as a result of a significant change in the structure of an industry. This may result from:
Technological change (with machines and computers replacing people) Shifts in the industry (for example, the decline in manufacturing industry in developed countries as it was relocated to cheaper, developing countries).
Note that service industries have now replaced manufacturing industries as the major source of employment in developed countries. This is indicative of structural change. New industries replace the declining ones, and provide new employment opportunities provided the labour force have the skills required.
308
Comments
In these situations, the aggregate supply curve shifts to the left, creating an equilibrium level of national income below the level of full employment. This shift could come from trade unions demanding higher wages for their members, labour market regulations such as minimum wage rates, or social security systems which allow workers to be better off by not working than working. Workers may also effectively be excluded from the labour market due to poor education and a lack of skills. It is possible that a rise in the cost of imported goods (particularly oil) could also lead to supply side unemployment. A steep rise in oil prices would raise production costs across an economy, and so could cause the aggregate supply curve to shift to the left. This leftward shift will lead to an increase in unemployment.
You need to be familiar with all the different types and causes of unemployment for your assessment.
(b)
A government can try several options to create jobs or reduce unemployment. (a) (b) (c)
Spending more money directly on jobs (for example hiring more civil servants) Encouraging growth in the private sector of the economy. When aggregate demand is growing, firms will probably want to increase output to meet demand, and so will hire more labour. Encouraging training in job skills. There might be a high level of unemployment amongst unskilled workers, and at the same time a shortage of skilled workers. A government can help to finance training schemes, in order to provide a 'pool' of workers who have the skills that firms need and will pay for. Offering grant assistance to employers in key regional areas Encouraging labour mobility by offering individuals financial assistance with relocation expenses, and improving the flow of information on vacancies
(d) (e)
Other policies may be directed at reducing real wages to market clearing levels. (a) (b) Abolishing 'closed shop' agreements, which restrict certain jobs to trade union members Reviewing minimum wage regulations, to assess whether the level set for the minimum wage is preventing employers taking on new staff.
309
Question
Match the terms (1), (2) and (3) below with definitions A, B and C. (1) (2) (3) A B C Structural unemployment Cyclical unemployment Frictional unemployment
Types of unemployment
Unemployment arising from a temporary difficulty in matching unemployed workers with available jobs Unemployment occurring in the downswing of an economy in between two booms Unemployment arising from a long-term decline in a particular industry
Answer
The pairings are (1) C, (2) B and (3) A.
There appears to be a connection between the rate of inflation and unemployment. The Phillips curve has been used to show the relationship between wage inflation and unemployment.
310
(a)
To eliminate a deflationary gap and create full employment. A small initial increase in government spending will start off a multiplier-accelerator effect, and so the actual government spending required to eliminate a deflationary gap should be less than the size of the gap itself. To eliminate an inflationary gap and take inflation out of the economy. This can be done by reducing government spending, or by increasing total taxation and not spending the taxes raised.
(b)
Keynesians accept that reductions in unemployment can only be achieved if prices are allowed to rise: reducing unemployment goes hand in hand with allowing some inflation.
Key term
Phillips curve: a graphical illustration of the inverse relationship which historically existed between the rate of wage inflation and the rate of unemployment.
Note the following two points about the Phillips curve. (a) The curve crosses the horizontal axis at a positive value for the unemployment rate. This means that zero inflation will be associated with some unemployment; it is not possible to achieve zero inflation and zero unemployment at the same time. The shape of the curve means that the lower the level of unemployment, the higher the rate of increase in inflation.
(b)
311
The existence of a relationship between inflation and unemployment of the type indicated by the Phillips curve suggests that the government should be able to use demand management policies to take the economy to acceptable levels of inflation and unemployment. This re-emphasises the argument of Keynesian economists that in order to achieve full employment, some inflation is unavoidable. If achieving full employment is an economic policy objective, a government must therefore be prepared to accept a certain level of inflation as a necessary evil. The Phillips curve indicated that a government had to make a choice between inflation or unemployment. Price stability and full employment could not both be achieved together. However, the Phillips curve relationship between inflation and unemployment broke down at the end of the 1960s when Britain began to experience rising inflation at the same time as rising unemployment (stagflation). But by the 1980s the relationship between inflation and unemployment had re-appeared, although at a higher absolute level of unemployment. The Phillips curve could be re-plotted, but it had shifted to the right. This was largely due to cost push pressures on inflation.
Inflation
P P
PC PC
U
Figure 2 Shift in the Phillips curve
Unemployment
Cost push pressures had shifted the Phillips curve from PC to PC1. If the government did not try to influence the level of aggregate demand, prices would rise to P1 and unemployment to U1. But if the government tried to bring down unemployment to U again, this would create demand pull inflation, increasing the general price level to P2. Once again though, this Phillips curve relationship appeared to break down in the 1990s where a number of Western countries enjoyed low unemployment alongside relatively low inflation. However, the recession in the Western countries in 2008-09 is once again showing a pattern of rising unemployment alongside falling inflation.
312
vertical Phillips curve, and there are inflationary expectations which reflect the rates of inflation that workers expect in the future.
Figure 3 illustrates why. The economy is initially in equilibrium with unemployment of U, and with very low inflation (PE0). The government tries to boost aggregate demand in the economy, and this reduces unemployment to U1. However, it also creates excess demand in the labour market which prompts wage inflation. This wage inflation in turn becomes price inflation, so workers are no better off in real terms than they were before the wage rise. In this case, the labour supply and hence unemployment returns to its previous level: U. Therefore the economy has found a new equilibrium with higher inflation (PE1) and the original unemployment (U), because the price expectations in the market mean that the equilibrium rate of unemployment can now only be achieved at this higher rate of (wage) inflation. In effect, the short-run Phillips curve has shifted outwards from PC to PC1. These shifts in the short-run Phillips curves illustrate that a cycle of wage inflation has been created, but note that long term unemployment rate remains the same (at U on Figure 3). This means that governments can no longer base policies on the simple trade off between inflation and unemployment as proposed in the original Phillips curve. Moreover, instead of trying to eradicate unemployment, governments need to accept that there is a natural rate of unemployment in the economy, and that this will also be the level at which inflation rates will be stable. This natural rate of unemployment is called the non-accelerating inflation rate of unemployment (NAIRU), the level at which the rate of inflation is stable. (The NAIRU is also sometimes referred to as the natural rate hypothesis). NAIRU is a logical extension of the expectations-augmented Phillips curve, and is represented by U in Figure 3.
Inflation Impact of attempts to reduce unemployment PE2 NAIRU
PE1 PE0 PC PC
1
PC
Unemployment
313
The table below shows a summary of unemployment and inflation figures in the UK.
Year 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 Unemployment, millions 1.6 2.3 2.8 2.9 2.6 2.3 2.1 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.1 1.0 1.0 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 Inflation (RPI) % 9.4 5.9 3.8 1.6 2.5 3.4 2.4 3.2 3.4 1.5 3.0 1.8 1.7 2.9 1.3 2.8 3.2
These figures illustrate that, since the early 1990s, the UK has experienced both falling unemployment and falling inflation. In terms of NAIRU, it seems that the natural rate of unemployment was falling to a level round about 1.0 million, and lower rates of inflation were compatible with lower rates of unemployment than had previously been the case. There are a number of factors which have led to this lower natural rate of unemployment:
Structural unemployment has fallen Although the number of manufacturing jobs has continued to fall, this has been at a much lower rate than in the 1970s and 1980s, so the effects of the decline of traditional manufacturing industries are less marked now. Education and training Improved levels of education and training have helped reduce the impact of structural unemployment. In addition, the strong performance of the service industries has given workers who had previously lost their jobs but who re-trained better opportunities to find jobs. Beneficial impact of supply side reforms UK Government schemes such as the New Deal programme launched in 1997 have been aimed at young people and other groups which were having difficulties finding a job. Reforms of the tax and benefits system (especially reductions in entitlements to unemployment payments and the introduction of working tax credits system) have also led to an increased efficiency in the operation of the labour market. Increased flexibility of working arrangements the growth of part-time employment, in particular, has provided new opportunities for people who would otherwise not have been working at all. Reduction in militancy and union power as trade union membership and power has declined, wage pressure on the labour market has declined. Economists generally believe that increased trade union power leads to higher unemployment, as unions demands raise the cost to employers of employing workers.
314
Chapter roundup
High rates of inflation are harmful to an economy. Inflation redistributes income and wealth. Uncertainty about the value of money makes business planning more difficult. Constantly changing prices impose extra costs.
Demand pull inflation arises from an excess of aggregate demand over the productive capacity of the economy. Cost push inflation arises from increases in the costs of production.
The monetarist concept of a stable equilibrium implies that with zero price inflation, there is a natural optimal level of unemployment, and a rate of economic growth and balance of trade position from which the economy will not deviate. Monetarism focuses on economic stability in the medium to long term, which can only be achieved by abandoning short-term demand management goals. There appears to be a connection between the rate of inflation and unemployment. The Phillips curve has been used to show the relationship between wage inflation and unemployment.
Quick quiz
1 2 3 What is the Phillips curve? Name two types of short-term unemployment and two types of long-term unemployment. Which one of the following is least likely to occur in a recession? A B C D 4 An increase in inflation rates An increase in unemployment levels An increase in government spending An improvement in the balance of trade
Which one of the following is NOT an effect of inflation in an economy? A B C D Prices convey less information so rational decision making becomes harder The purchasing power of people on fixed incomes is reduced The balance of trade weakens as imports become more expensive Consumer behaviour will be distorted as consumers attempt to anticipate price changes
Structural unemployment is best defined as unemployment caused by: A B C D Lack of knowledge about job opportunities in the market The long term decline of particular industries Minimum wage rates being set above the market clearing wage The insufficient level of aggregate demand in the economy as a whole
315
4 5
C B
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
5660
438
316
Macroeconomic policy
Introduction
The previous chapter analysed the main macroeconomic phenomena such as inflation and unemployment. In this chapter we present an overview of the goals of macroeconomic policy in relation to these phenomena, and concentrate on three broad types of policy: fiscal policy, monetary policy and supply side policies. First we consider the role of fiscal policy in affecting aggregate demand, and we look at the different types of taxes which can be used as part of fiscal policy. Next we present alternative theories of how the money supply and interest rates affect the aggregate demand and discuss the conduct of monetary policy. Then we examine the effectiveness of macroeconomic policy in controlling inflation and unemployment. Finally we discuss supply side policies that affect aggregate supply, in contrast to monetary and fiscal policies that affect aggregate demand.
Topic list 1 Government policies and objectives 2 Fiscal policy 3 Monetary theory 4 Monetary policy 5 Effectiveness of macroeconomic policy 6 Supply side policy 7 Summary of macroeconomic policies
317
Macroeconomic policy objectives relate to economic growth, inflation, unemployment and the balance of payments.
Key terms
Fiscal policy relates to government policy on taxation, public borrowing and public spending. Monetary policy is concerned with government policy on the money supply, the monetary system, interest rates, exchange rates and the availability of credit. Fiscal and monetary policy attempt to attain the macroeconomic policy objectives by influencing aggregate demand in an economy. Supply Side policies, on the other hand, attempt to the attain the macroeconomic policy objectives by shifting the aggregate supply curve in an economy.
2 Fiscal policy
FAST FORWARD
Fiscal policy provides a method of managing aggregate demand in the economy via taxation and government spending.
318
form the taxes should take and which sectors of the economy (firms or households, high income earners or low income earners) the money should come from. This formal planning of fiscal policy is usually done once a year and is set out in the Budget. The two components of the budget which the government determines and through which it exercises its fiscal policy are: (a) Expenditure. The government, at a national and local level, spends money to provide goods and services, such as a health service, public education, a police force, roads, public buildings and so on, and to pay its administrative work force. It may also, perhaps, provide finance to encourage investment by private industry, for example by means of grants. Revenues. Government expenditure must be financed, so the government must generate income. Most government income comes from taxation, although some income is obtained from direct charges to users of government services such as National Health Service charges.
(b)
A third element of the fiscal policy is: (c) Borrowing. To the extent that a government's expenditure exceeds its income it must borrow to make up the difference. The amount that the government must borrow each year is now known as the Public Sector Net Cash Requirement (PSNCR) in the UK. Its former name was Public Sector Borrowing Requirement (PSBR). Where the government borrows from has an impact on the effectiveness of fiscal policy.
Key term
The public sector net cash requirement (PSNCR) is the annual excess of spending over income for the entire public sector not just the central government.
319
(b)
It can increase demand indirectly by reducing taxation and so allowing firms and individuals more aftertax income to spend (or save). (i) (ii) Cuts in taxation can be matched by cuts in government spending, in which case total demand in the economy will not be stimulated significantly, if at all. Alternatively, tax cuts can be financed by more government borrowing.
Just as aggregate demand in the economy can be boosted either by more government spending or by tax cuts (in both cases leading to a higher PSNCR), so too can demand in the economy be reduced by cutting government spending or by raising taxes, and using the savings or higher income to cut government borrowing. Expenditure changes and tax changes are not mutually exclusive options, of course. A government has several options. (a) (b) (c) (d) Increase expenditure and reduce taxes, with these changes financed by a higher PSNCR Reduce expenditure and increase taxes, with these changes reducing the size of the PSNCR Increase expenditure and partly or wholly finance this extra spending with higher taxes Reduce expenditure and use these savings to reduce taxes
When a government's income exceeds its expenditure, and there is a negative PSNCR or Public Sector Debt Repayment (PSDR), we say that the government is running a budget surplus. When a government's expenditure exceeds its income, so that it must borrow to make up the difference, there is a PSNCR and we say that the government is running a budget deficit.
Key terms
Budget deficit: Government expenditure exceeds government revenue from taxation income. Budget surplus: Government expenditure is less than government revenue from taxation income.
320
boom will slow down the growth of money GNP and so take some inflationary pressures out of the economy.
1 The size of the multiplier, remember, is s + m + t where t is the marginal rate of taxation. (d)
To cause certain products to be priced to take into account their social costs. For example, smoking entails certain social costs, including the cost of hospital care for those suffering from smoking-related diseases, and the government sees fit to make the price of tobacco reflect these social costs.
In a similar way, taxes could be used to discourage activities which are regarded as undesirable. (e) (f)
To redistribute income and wealth. Higher rates of tax on higher incomes will serve to redistribute income. UK inheritance tax goes some way towards redistributing wealth. To protect industries from foreign competition. If the government levies a duty on all imported goods much of the duty will be passed on to the consumer in the form of higher prices, making imported goods more expensive. This has the effect of transferring a certain amount of demand from imported goods to domestically produced goods.
Equity. People should pay according to their ability. Certainty. The tax should be well-defined and easily understood by all concerned. Convenience. The payment of tax should ideally be related to how and when people receive and spend their income (eg PAYE is deducted when wages are paid, and sales tax is charged when goods are bought). Economy. The cost of collection should be small relative to the yield.
Taxes can also be categorised according to the percentage of income which is paid as tax by different groups in society. (a) A regressive tax takes a higher proportion of a poor person's salary than of a rich person's. Television licences (the annual licence fee people have to pay in the UK to watch television) are an example of
321
regressive taxes since they are the same for all people. Sales taxes (such as VAT) are also regressive because they are the same for all people, regardless of a person's income. Therefore, as their income rises, the tax represents a smaller percentage of a person's income. (b) A proportional tax takes the same proportion of income in tax from all levels of income. So an income tax with a basic rate of tax at 22% is a proportional tax, (although it then becomes a progressive tax if higher income earners have to pay a higher rate than this basic rate). A progressive tax takes a higher proportion of income in tax as income rises. Income tax as a whole in the UK is progressive, since the first part of an individual's income is tax-free due to personal allowances and the rate of tax increases in steps from 22p in 1 (basic rate) to 40p in 1 (higher rate) as taxable income rises.
(c)
FAST FORWARD
Direct taxes have the quality of being progressive or proportional. Income tax is usually progressive, with higher rates of tax charged on higher bands of taxable income. Indirect taxes can be regressive, when the taxes are placed on essential commodities or commodities consumed by poorer people in greater quantities.
(a)
They are levied according to the ability of individuals to pay. Individuals with a higher income are more able to afford to give up more of their income in tax than low income earners, who need a greater proportion of their earnings for the basic necessities of life. If taxes are to be raised according to the ability of people to pay (which is one of the features of a good tax suggested by Adam Smith) then there must be some progressiveness in them. Progressive taxes enable a government to redistribute wealth from the rich to the poor in society. Such a redistribution of wealth will alter the consumption patterns in society since the poorer members of society will spend their earnings and social security benefits on different types of goods than if the income had remained in the hands of the richer people. Poorer people are also likely to have a higher marginal propensity to consume than richer people, so leaving more income in the hands of the poorer people is likely to increase aggregate demand in the economy as a whole. Indirect taxes tend to be regressive and progressive taxes are needed as a counter-balance to make the tax system as a whole more fair.
(b)
(c)
(a) (b)
In an affluent society, there is less need for progressive taxes than in a poorer society. Fewer people will live in poverty in such a society if taxes are not progressive than in a poorer society. Higher taxes on extra corporate profits might deter entrepreneurs from developing new companies because the potential increase in after-tax profits would not be worth the risks involved in undertaking new investments. Individuals and firms that suffer from high taxes might try to avoid or evade paying tax by transferring their wealth to other countries, or by setting up companies in tax havens where corporate tax rates are low. However, tax avoidance and evasion are practised whether tax rates are high or low. High taxes will simply raise the relative gains which can be made from avoidance or evasion.
(c)
(d)
When progressive taxes are harsh, and either tax high income earners at very high marginal rates or tax the wealthy at high rates on their wealth, they could act as a deterrent to initiative. Skilled workers might leave the country and look for employment in countries where they can earn more money.
322
(b)
In the case of a regressive tax, a greater proportionate tax burden falls on those least able to afford it. The main disadvantage of a regressive tax is that it is not fair or equitable. The main advantage of a regressive tax is that it is often relatively easy to administer and collect. This is the case with the TV licence in the UK, for example. However, a regressive tax could still be expensive to collect.
Question
Taxation types
Below are details of three taxation systems, one of which is regressive, one proportional and one progressive. Which is which? Income before tax Income after tax $ $ System 1 10,000 8,000 40,000 30,000 System 2 System 3 10,000 40,000 10,000 40,000 7,000 28,000 9,000 38,000
Answer
Tax paid on low income % 20 30 10 Tax paid on high income % 25 30 5 Nature of tax
A government must decide how it intends to raise tax revenues, from direct or indirect taxes, and in what proportions tax revenues will be raised from each source. A direct tax is paid direct by a person to the Revenue authority. Examples of direct taxes in the UK are income tax, corporation tax, capital gains tax and inheritance tax. A direct tax can be levied on income and profits, or on wealth. Direct taxes tend to be progressive or proportional taxes. They are also usually unavoidable, which means that they must be paid by everyone.
323
An indirect tax is collected by the Revenue authority from an intermediary (a supplier) who then attempts to pass on the tax to consumers in the price of goods they sell, for example, as with VAT in the UK. Indirect taxes are of two types:
A specific tax is charged as a fixed sum per unit sold. An ad valorem tax is charged as a fixed percentage of the price of the good.
324
The Laffer curve (named after Professor Arthur Laffer) illustrates the effect of tax rates upon government revenue and national income. In the hypothetical economy depicted in Figure 2 a tax rate of 0% results in the government receiving no tax revenue irrespective of the level of national income. If the rate is 100% then nobody will work because they keep none of their earnings and so once again total tax revenue is zero. In our example, at 25% tax rates the government will achieve a total tax take of $30bn; the same as the revenue they enjoy tax at rates of 75%. By deduction, the level of national income when taxes are 25% must be $120bn compared with only $40bn if taxes are 75%. High taxation appears to operate as a disincentive and reduce national income. The government will be keen to identify the tax rate 'Tr' which maximises revenue, and it will not want to set taxes higher than that, because if it does the taxes become a disincentive to work.
Three consequences flow from this Laffer curve analysis. (a) (b)
High rates of taxation act as a disincentive to work and accordingly reduce output and employment, because people will substitute leisure for work. This is known as the disincentive effect.
Governments cannot always expect to increase tax revenue by increasing tax rates. There appears to be a crucial tax rate beyond which the fall in national income resulting from the erosion of incentives and effort outweighs the increased tax rate. In Figure 2 the maximum tax revenue is Tx, at average tax rate Tr. If tax rates are above Tr, the government can increase tax revenues by cutting tax rates. There will always be two tax rates available which can yield the same total tax revenue: one associated with a high level of national income and another associated with a lower level. In consequence, governments committed to high government expenditure need not necessarily be associated with high rates of tax. Taxes could be set at the lower of the two rates and earn just the same amount of revenue as if they had been set at the higher amount.
(c)
In addition the following arguments can be made against high tax rates. When income tax is levied at a high rate, it could act as a disincentive to work. The idea of the marginal tax rate is important here. This is the rate of tax paid on an extra unit of income. The marginal tax rates facing economic agents are often important in determining how tax affects a decision to work or not. For example, is it worth taking a higher paid job or working overtime if the majority of the additional income you earn will have to be paid over as tax? The importance of this from a government's perspective is that if it sets the tax rate too high, tax yield will fall because workers will choose to have leisure time instead of working. In this case, the tax is no longer efficient. Another danger of setting income tax too high is that it could encourage a 'brain drain'. If a country has high marginal rates of taxation, this might cause a migration of highly skilled and therefore highly paid workers to countries with tax regimes that are more favourable for them. This means that the country with the high tax rates not only loses the potential tax revenue from these high earners, but it also loses their valuable skills. High marginal tax rates, by narrowing the differentials in the after-tax pay of skilled and unskilled labour, may reduce the incentive to train and thereby cause a shortage of skilled labour. High marginal tax rates may also be seen as creating a 'poverty trap'. For example, if people are not working, they receive unemployment benefit. Once they find a job they will no longer receive their unemployment benefit, but will have to pay tax on their income instead. If tax rates are felt to be too high there would be little incentive for an unemployed worker to accept a low paid job. However, if direct taxes are lower, then workers will be more likely to accept the job because their post tax income will be higher. High marginal rates of tax could encourage tax avoidance (finding legal loopholes in the tax rules so as to avoid paying tax). In the UK, high tax rates led to a growth of making income payments-in-kind by way of fringe benefits, for example, free medical and life insurance, preferential loans and favourable pension rights. The tax authorities responded to this by bringing an increasing number of fringe benefits into the tax net for example, the private use of a company car. In some cases individuals and companies may resort to tax evasion, which is the illegal non-payment of tax. Employed people have limited scope for tax evasion, because of the pay as you earn (PAYE) tax system in the UK. Undoubtedly, the self-employed have a greater ability to evade tax by failing to declare earnings. If evasion becomes widespread the cost of enforcing the tax laws may become very expensive. Reductions in tax liability may encourage workers to accept lower wage increases, and this will mean there is less inflationary pressure from high wage claims.
326
Question
Indirect tax
The burden of an indirect tax must either be borne by the producer or passed on by the producer to consumers. If a producer feels able to pass on the whole of the burden, what can you deduce about the elasticity of demand for his product?
Answer
Demand for the product must presumably be inelastic, at least in the opinion of the producer. Otherwise he would fear to pass on the tax burden by increasing his prices as this would lead to a fall in demand.
The effectiveness of indirect taxation is likely to depend on price elasticity of demand. If a good is price inelastic, then sales will not fall much when the tax is included in the price. By contrast, if a sales tax is added onto a good with elastic demand, demand will fall significantly following the increase in price. Consequently, the amount of indirect tax revenue generated is likely to be higher when imposed on a good with inelastic demand than on one with elastic demand. This is another reason (alongside health issues) whey indirect taxes are imposed on alcohol and cigarettes because they have price inelastic demand. Indirect taxation is a relatively flexible instrument of economic policy. The rates of indirect taxes may be changed to take effect immediately. For example, in the UK, in an attempt to boost aggregate demand in the economy, the government announced the rate of sales tax (VAT) would be reduced from 17.5% to 15% on 1 December 2008, and this change was introduced immediately. In the case of direct taxes, more notice must be given to the taxpayer. Indirect taxes can be cheap to collect. Traders and companies are required to act as collectors of value added tax in the UK, thus reducing the administrative burden on government. Indirect taxes do have disadvantages however. (a)
They can be inflationary. In the UK, a switch from direct tax to indirect tax in the budget of 1979, when VAT rates were increased, resulted in a large increase in the reported rate of inflation. When prices are rising the burden of ad valorem indirect taxes will naturally rise also. However, a specific indirect tax will only be inflationary if the rate at which it is applied is changed. Indirect taxes also tend to be regressive. A broadly levied indirect tax like VAT is likely to be quite regressive because the poorer members of the community spend a very much larger fraction of their income than very rich people. A system of indirect taxes on luxury goods would not be regressive, however.
(b)
327
(c)
Indirect taxes are not completely impartial in their application in other ways. For example, someone who seeks to relax with a cigarette in a pub is going to be much more heavily hit by indirect taxes than someone who likes walking. The differential taxes, moreover, prevent resources from being distributed optimally according to consumer preference. Unlike an income tax, indirect taxes change the relative price of goods. This means that consumers have to arrange their patterns of expenditure accordingly. This substitution may involve loss of satisfaction.
(d)
Like taxes on incomes, indirect taxes may be evaded by some. The so-called 'black economy', in which cash payments are made and income is not declared for tax purposes, is undoubtedly large and widespread in the UK, particularly in the self-employed sector.
(a)
If government spending is increased, there will be an increase in the amount of injections, expenditure in the economy will rise and so national income will rise (either in real terms, or in terms of price levels only; that is, the increase in national income might be real or inflationary). If government taxation is increased, there will be an increase in withdrawals from the economy, and expenditure and national income will fall. A government might deliberately raise taxation to take inflationary pressures out of the economy.
(b)
A government's 'fiscal stance' may be neutral, expansionary or contractionary, according to its effect on national income. (a) (b) (c)
Spending more money and financing this expenditure by borrowing would indicate an expansionary fiscal stance. Collecting more in taxes without increasing spending would indicate a contractionary fiscal stance.
Collecting more in taxes in order to increase spending, thus diverting income from one part of the economy to another would indicate a broadly neutral fiscal stance.
328
An increase in taxation by $T in Figure 3, without any matching increase in government expenditure, would reduce the aggregate expenditure in the economy from AD1 to AD2 and so the money value of national income would fall from Y1 to Y2. This would result in either a fall in real output or it would dampen inflationary pressures. Similarly, a reduction in taxation without any reduction in government spending would increase the money value of national income. This would either cause real output to increase, or it would lead to price rises and inflation.
If government raises taxes and government spending by the same amount, so that the budget remains in balance, there will be an increase in aggregate monetary demand. This is because tax payers would have saved some of the money they pay in increased tax while the government spends all of its revenue within the economy. This effect is called the balanced budget multiplier. Government spending, however, might create inflationary pressures. Fiscal policy must therefore be used with care, even to create new jobs.
(b)
Expansion and contraction of the economy are both subject to the effect of automatic stabilisers. There are two types: (i) (ii) Tax revenues that rise as national income rises. Nearly all taxes fall into this category. Government expenditures that fall as national income rises. Welfare payments associated with unemployment and low incomes make up the bulk of this category.
The effect of automatic stabilisers is to reduce the value of the multiplier, thus dampening the rate of both expansion and contraction. When the economy is in the process of recovering from a recession the effect of the automatic stabilisers is called fiscal drag.
When money is borrowed from abroad, the flow of funds in obtaining the money and in repaying the debt crosses national boundaries, and so there are implications for the balance of payments and the exchange rate of the domestic currency. Repaying a debt to foreign debtors also places a burden on society, because the money raised from taxes to service the debt must be paid abroad.
330
If the government kept its own spending at the same level, but reduced levels of taxation, it would also stimulate demand in the economy because firms and households would have more of their own money after tax for consumption or saving/investing. If the entire public sector had a balanced budget, the PSNCR would be nil. When there is an annual excess of income over expenditure, some of the National Debt can be repaid and so there is a Public Sector Debt Repayment. To reduce the size of the PSNCR, a government must either reduce its expenditure or raise its income from taxation. The sale of nationalised industries to the private sector is another source of funds. Keynesian economists argue the need for more government spending in a recession to boost demand in the economy and create jobs. An argument put forward is that it makes sound financial sense to use current revenues from taxation to meet current expenditures and interest payments on debt, but to use borrowing for capital expenditure needs. Since taxation revenue exceeds current spending, the argument concludes that the government should borrow more for capital spending. However, there needs to be a degree of caution here. If public expenditure is increased too much it is likely to place a considerable burden of taxation on companies and individuals in the future when the government looks to reduce the level of public debt.
Question
Government budget
Why might a government's budget vary from time to time, sometimes being in balance, sometimes in surplus and sometimes in deficit?
Answer
A budget deficit occurs where expenditure exceeds income and a budget surplus occurs where expenditure is less than income. In a mixed economy like that of the United Kingdom, the level of economic activity fluctuates depending upon where we are in the trade cycle. During the upturn in the trade cycle production is rising, firms and individuals earn more profits and wages so the government should collect more revenue. Unemployment should also fall during this period, and so government expenditure should fall. At this stage of the cycle, the budget may be in surplus. During the downturn of a trade cycle, the reverse applies. Profits and incomes fall and government revenue falls, but unemployment rises and government expenditure on unemployment benefit rises. There is then more likely to be a budget deficit. Keynes suggested that budget deficits should be used to help an economy out of recession. According to Keynes, unemployment was caused by a lack of aggregate demand in the economy. So if the government increased its expenditure, this would raise aggregate demand. Using Keynesian policies, a government may plan a budget deficit to boost aggregate monetary demand. Increased government expenditure might be on infrastructure such as roads, schools or the health service. Alternatively, taxes could be cut to increase consumers' disposable incomes. The objective would be to close the 'deflationary gap' that is seen to be preventing the economy reaching a level of full employment. Thus, variations in the budget balance can be the result of deliberate government budgetary policy.
331
(b)
The fiscal rules provide benchmarks against which the performance of fiscal policy can be judged. The Government will meet the golden rule if, on average over a complete economic cycle, the current budget is in balance or surplus. The Chancellor has stated that, other things equal, net debt will be maintained below 40% of GDP over the current economic cycle, in accordance with the sustainable investment rule. Such restrictions ultimately mean that if a government wants to sustain the level of public expenditure which is creating a budget deficit it will need to increase tax revenue to fund it (and the decision to raise taxation may not be very popular politically). Unfortunately, however, the recession which affected the UK from 2008 has meant that the government has not been able to follow the golden rule, because short-term government spending has exceeded tax revenues and public debt has risen above 40% of GDP.
332
The recession has meant that tax revenues have fallen (as output and incomes have fallen), but expenditure on unemployment benefits has risen. In addition, the government has attempted to boost aggregate demand in the economy by reducing VAT from 17.5% to 15%, which has made the budget deficit bigger. As a result, by the end of August 2009, public sector net debt had increased to 805 billion, which is over 57% of GDP. Some analysts have suggested that national debt will soon exceed 80% of GDP, double the original level set by the golden rule.
3 Monetary theory
FAST FORWARD
Monetary theory deals with the way changes in monetary variables affect the aggregate demand in the economy and its ultimate impact on prices and output. There are three theories of how the changes in the money supply are transmitted to the real economy: the quantity theory, the Keynesian theory, and the monetarist theory.
Key terms
The transactions motive. Households need money to pay for their day-to-day purchases. The level of transactions demand for money depends on household incomes. The precautionary motive. People choose to keep money on hand or in the bank as a precaution for when it might suddenly be needed. The speculative motive. Some people choose to keep ready money to take advantage of a profitable opportunity to invest in bonds which may arise (or they may sell bonds for money when they fear a fall in the market prices of bonds). There is an important contrast here with the classical quantity theory of money. The quantity theory assumes that the demand for money is governed by transactions only. By proposing two further reasons, Keynes strikes out into new territory. The precautionary motive is really just an extension of the transactions motive. However, the speculative motive for holding money needs explaining a bit further. (a) If individuals hold money for speculative purposes, this means that they are not using the money to invest in bonds. They are holding on to their savings for speculative reasons. Hence, savings and investment might not be in equilibrium, with consequences for changes in national income. (Remember that when we looked at national income accounting, we said that an economy would only be in equilibrium if savings equalled investments.)
333
(b)
The reason for holding money instead of investing in bonds is that interest rates are expected to go up. If interest rates go up, bond prices will fall. For example, if the current market price of bonds which pay 5% interest on face value is $100, and interest rates doubled to 10%, the market value of the bonds would fall, perhaps to $50. This is because the interest paid on a bond is fixed at a percentage of face value. The ratio between the income paid and the market value adjusts to the current prevailing interest rate by means of changes in the market value. So, if interest rates are expected to go up, any bonds held now will be expected to lose value, and bond holders would make a capital loss. Thus, it makes sense to hold on to money, for investing in bonds later, after interest rates have gone up. Keynes called such money holdings idle balances. What causes individuals to have expectations about interest rate changes in the future? Keynes argued that each individual has some expectation of a normal rate of interest. This concept of a normal interest rate reflects past levels and movements in the interest rate, and expectations of the future rate level, obtained from available market information.
(c)
Question
Following this Keynesian analysis, how would you expect an individual to act if: (a) (b) They think that the current level of interest is below the 'normal' rate? They think that the current level of interest is above the 'normal' rate?
Interest rates
Answer
(a) If someone believes that the normal rate of interest is above the current level, he will expect the interest rate to rise and will therefore expect bond prices to fall. To avoid a capital loss the individual will sell bonds and hold money. Conversely, if an individual believes that the normal rate of interest is below the current market interest rate, he will expect the market interest rate to fall and bond prices to rise. Hence he will buy bonds, and run down speculative money holdings, in order to make a capital gain.
(b)
Key term
Liquidity preference describes people's preference for holding on to their savings as money (in liquid form) rather than investing it.
Keynes argued further that people will need money to satisfy the transactions motive and precautionary motive regardless of the level of interest. It is only the speculative motive which alters the demand for money as a result of interest rate changes. (a) If interest rates are high, people will expect them to fall and will expect the price of bonds to rise. They will therefore purchase bonds in anticipation of a capital gain and will therefore have low liquidity preference. (That is, their demand for money is low because they prefer to hold bonds instead.) If interest rates are low but are expected to rise, this implies that bond prices are likely to fall. People will therefore hold liquid funds in order to be able to invest in bonds later on. Their liquidity preference will be high. (That is, their demand for money is high, because they would rather hold money than bonds.)
(b)
The conclusion is that the demand for money will be high (liquidity preference will be high) when interest rates are low. This is because the speculative demand for money will be high. Similarly, the demand for money will be low when interest rates are high, because the speculative demand for money will be low.
334
14: Macroeconomic policy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
Taking Keynes' points about the demand for money together, we can see that there is a minimum fixed demand for money (transactions and precautionary motives) and some demand for money that varies with interest rates (speculative motive). This can be shown as a liquidity preference curve (Figure 4). A minimum quantity of money is needed, regardless of interest rate, to satisfy the minimum demand arising from the transactions and precautionary motives for holding money. Beyond that, demand for money increases as interest rates fall.
Interest rate L Money supply (fixed)
Keynes' view on the determination of interest rates is, like the classical view, a market model. He argued that the level of interest rates is determined by the interaction of demand for and supply of money. While the liquidity preference curve may be thought of as a normal demand curve, with the rate of interest being the price of money, Keynes suggested that the money supply was fixed by government and therefore inelastic: a vertical supply curve, in other words, as shown in Figure 4. The quantity theory assumes that an increase in the money supply will automatically lead to an increase in aggregate demand. Since the economy is assumed to be operating at full employment and therefore not able to produce more goods and services, this increase in aggregate demand will cause a rise in the level of prices generally. Keynes took a different view. He said that an increase in the money supply would lead to a fall in interest rates. It is an important aspect of this theory, and a contrast with the quantity theory, that an increase in the money supply would not lead directly to an increase in aggregate demand. If there is an increase in the money supply, (from MS1 to MS2 in Figure 5), money capital will become cheaper and interest rates will fall from r1 to r2. There will be some increase in the level of investment spending, since it now becomes more profitable for firms to invest in new capital because of the fall in the cost of borrowing. The increase in investment, being an injection into the circular flow of income, causes some increase in the level of national income through the multiplier process. According to the Keynesians, therefore, a change in the money supply only indirectly affects the demand for goods and services (and hence the level of income), via a change in the rate of interest. This is called an indirect transmission mechanism.
335
Interest rates
Money supply
MS1
MS2
r1 r2 Liquidity preference
Quantity of money
The impact on the economy of the increase in the money supply therefore depends on the effect that the fall in interest rates produces. According to the Keynesian view, both investment demand and consumer spending are relatively insensitive to interest rate changes, that is, they are relatively interest-inelastic. The volume of investment depends heavily, Keynes argued, on technological changes and business confidence and expectations too. It follows that the increase in the money supply will have only a limited effect on aggregate demand and consequently relatively little effect on output and employment or on price levels. This view implies that the velocity of circulation, V, is not fixed, since a varying amount of money is held as investment in bonds. Keynesians therefore argue that monetary policy to control the money supply would have an effect on interest rates and changes in interest rates might in the longer term affect investment. In other respects, however, monetary policy would not really affect the economy and national income, because increases in the money supply would be neutralised by reductions in the velocity of circulation, leaving PT unaffected.
336
Individuals will have more money than they want. They will spend this excess money, buying not just 'bonds' (as Keynes believed) but also equities and physical goods. The greater demand for physical goods will boost expenditure in the economy (and so the money value of national income). However, a rapid increase in the money supply will increase spending at a faster rate than the economy will be able to produce more physical output. A rapid increase in the money supply will therefore inevitably be inflationary.
In conclusion, for monetarists, changes in the money supply cause changes in the money value of national income. Remember that Keynes believed there was only a weak link between changes in the money supply and changes in aggregate demand.
Question
According to monetarist economics, which of the following consequences will result from an increase in the money supply? 1 2 3 4 5 Households will have excess money. Households will use this money to buy more bonds, equities and physical goods. Interest rates will rise. The demand for money will respond to the change in interest rates. Expenditure in the economy will increase.
Answer
Consequences 1, 2 and 5 (but not 3 and 4) will result. According to monetarists, an increase in the money supply creates excess supply over demand. Households use the excess money to buy bonds (and so interest rates fall), equities and physical goods (and so expenditure in the economy rises). The demand for money is interest-rate inelastic, according to monetarists (but not according to Keynesians) and so this does not increase in response to any interest rate fall.
3.4 The monetarist view of money supply and inflation in the economy
Whereas Keynes argued that an increase in the money supply would merely result in lower interest rates, with no immediate effect on national income, Friedman and other monetarists argue that an increase in the money supply will lead directly and quickly to changes in national income and 'prices transactions' (PT), with the velocity of circulation (V) remaining fairly constant. In his analysis of the demand for money, Friedman argued that money is just one of five broad ways of holding wealth.
Money Bonds Equities Physical goods Human wealth
337
(Human wealth here is a special concept and may be ignored for the purpose of our analysis.) Each method of holding wealth brings some form of return or yield to the holder. (a) (b) (c) (d) The main yield from money is the convenience of having it when it is needed. This cannot be measured in money terms. The return on bonds is the interest plus any capital gain (or loss).
Equities should provide dividends and capital growth which keep ahead of the rate of inflation. Physical assets in this analysis, do not waste away through use, because assets which are consumed cannot be a store of wealth. There might be an increase in their capital value but the yield also includes the non-monetary return, such as the use of furniture, the enjoyment from paintings and so on.
Friedman argued that the demand for money is related to the demand for holding wealth in its other forms. While Keynes believed that if people did not want to hold money, they would invest it to earn interest, monetarists believe that they might also use it instead to buy equities or physical assets. Friedman argued that money gives a convenience yield but it is not an asset which is held for its own sake. It is a 'temporary abode of purchasing power' waiting to be spent on other types of financial or physical asset. The demand for money is therefore a function of the yield on money and the yield on other forms of holding wealth. Yield as defined here includes non-monetary yield such as convenience and enjoyment. Monetarists would argue, further, that the demand for money is fairly interest-inelastic. The demand for money is related to a transactions motive, but not to any speculative motive. An expected rise in interest rates might persuade individuals to sell bonds and buy other assets, but not to hold speculative money. Monetarists argue that, since money is a direct substitute for all other assets, an increase in the money supply, given a fairly stable velocity of circulation, will have a direct effect on demand for other assets because there will be more money to spend on those assets. If the total output of the economy is fixed, then an increase in the money supply will lead directly to higher prices. Monetarists therefore reach the same basic conclusion as the old quantity theory of money. A rise in the money supply will lead to a rise in prices and probably also to a rise in money incomes. (It is also assumed by monetarists that the velocity of circulation remains fairly constant, again taking a view similar to the old quantity theory.) In the short run, monetarists argue that an increase in the money supply might cause some increase in real output and so an increase in employment. In the long run, however, all increases in the money supply will be reflected in higher prices unless there is longer term growth in the economy.
(c) (d)
338
In the UK in 2009 we also saw how the central bank (the Bank of England) can increase the money supply directly through a programme of quantitative easing: in effect, introducing new money into the financial system. By August 2009 the Bank of England had authority from the Chancellor of the Exchequer for a 175bn quantitative easing programme, designed to provide a stimulus for the economy.
3.9 The transmission mechanism and imbalances between money supply and demand
Monetarists say that the connection between the demand for money, the money supply and national income can be explained by a direct transmission mechanism. Starting from a position of equilibrium holding of assets of all kinds, an increase in the money supply would leave individuals holding an excess of money balances. In order to restore the level of money holdings to its desired
339
level, individuals will substitute assets of all kinds for money: the demand for goods and services will increase, not just demand for financial assets. (a) The increase in the quantity of money means a fall in the rate of interest. This will not lead to an increase in the demand for money, according to the monetarists, because they believe that the demand for money is interest-inelastic. The increase in direct spending on goods and services will, however, lead to a rise in the level of money national income.
(b)
By assuming that money is a substitute for all assets, the monetarists conclude that variations in the money supply have a great influence on the level of national income. In terms of the classical quantity theory of money, if M goes up, and MV = PT, there will be an increase in PT, but this could mean an increase in either real output (T) or in prices and inflation (P). Suppose that the demand for money goes up, but the authorities stop the money supply from increasing, so that there is an excess demand for money. The transmission mechanism will work the other way. Households will sell bonds and equities and reduce consumption on other goods in order to acquire more money. Interest rates will go up. There will be a decline in total spending in the economy until money supply and demand are again in equilibrium. Since MV = PT, a decline in PT will have one of two effects. (a) (b) If the economy is operating below its full employment national income level, there will be a decline in T leading to even less output and so more unemployment. If the economy has an inflationary gap, there will be a decline in P, and inflation will be brought under control.
Friedman MVPQ Cash Bonds Equities Physical goods Human wealth Demand for money is interest-inelastic Spending on assets of all kinds up, AD up, prices up Direct Supply and demand of loanable funds
Assumptions
Only speculative demand varies; Money supply usually fixed Price of bonds up, interest rate falls, small rise in AD and prices Indirect, via interest rate Since money supply is fixed, ir depends on speculative demand for bonds
Effect if rise in money supply when economy at full employment Transmission mechanism Determination of interest rate
340
Question
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Counter-inflation policies
A government can help to counter demand pull inflation by reducing interest rates. True or false? A government can help to counter demand pull inflation by increasing sales taxes (such as VAT). True or false? A government can help to counter cost push inflation by increasing income tax rates. True or false? A government can help to counter cost push inflation by linking wage increases to productivity improvements. True or false?
Answer
(a) (b) (c) (d)
False. On the contrary, this would increase consumer borrowing and hence stimulate Demand pull inflation. True. This might increase total spending on goods and services inclusive of the tax, but spending net of tax will probably fall. False. Increasing direct taxation will reduce consumers' disposable income, but this is a measure aimed at countering Demand pull inflation, not Cost push inflation. True. This will reduce the unit costs of production.
Monetarists pointed to the high inflation of the mid-1970s as evidence in support of their views since very rapid monetary growth preceded the price inflation. However, later research suggested that soaring oil and commodity prices were the culprits. Falling commodity prices helped subsequently to reduce inflation.
341
4 Monetary policy
FAST FORWARD
Monetary policy focuses on the relationship between interest rates and the supply of money in an economy, and how the two of them together can influence aggregate demand.
(c)
Growth in the money supply, if it is a monetary policy target, should therefore be a medium-term target. When the UK government set targets for the growth of the money supply as a main feature of its economic policy strategy from 1980, it was consequently prepared to wait for some years to see any benefits from its policies and therefore set out its policy targets in a medium-term financial strategy.
payments. Companies will reduce inventory levels as the cost of having money tied up in inventory rises. Individuals should be expected to reduce or postpone consumption in order to reduce borrowings, and should become less willing to borrow for major purchases, such as house purchases. Although it is generally accepted that there is likely to be a connection between interest rates and investment (by companies) and consumer expenditure, the connection is not a stable and predictable one, and interest rate changes are only likely to affect the level of expenditure after a considerable time lag.
Other effects of raising interest rates
(a)
High interest rates will keep the value of a country's current higher than it would otherwise be. This will keep the cost of exports high, and so discourage the purchase of exports. This may be necessary to protect the balance of payments and to prevent 'import-cost-push' inflation. UK manufacturers have complained bitterly about this effect, and BMW cited it as one of the reasons for disposing of Rover in the year 2000. High interest rates will attract foreign investors into capital investments, and so high interest rates in the UK could generate capital inflows which help to finance the large UK balance of payments deficit.
(b)
The impacts of a rise in interest rates Impact Spending falls Investment falls Comment
Higher interest rates increase the cost of credit and thereby deter spending. The higher interest rates are, the more attractive it is to hold money rather than to spend it. The increased rate will increase the opportunity cost of investment and reduce the net present value of the investment. This will discourage firms from investing. The increased interest rates will make borrowing more expensive. Interest rates are the reward for capital, so a rise in interest rates will encourage overseas investors because of the increased rate of return relative to other countries. The inflow of foreign funds (above) increases the demand for currency and therefore increases the exchange rate. A rise in exchange rates will make exports more expensive, and imports cheaper. The impact this will have on the balance of payments current account will depend on the relative price elasticities of imports and exports.
Foreign funds are attracted into the country Exchange rate rises
This is the overall goal of an interest rate rise. The reduction in spending and investment will reduce aggregate demand in the economy. Higher exchange rates will force producers to make prices more competitive by cutting costs.
There is an inverse relationship between bond prices and the rate of interest.
An increase in interest rates will have a deflationary impact on the economy. Note, however, the potential conflicting objectives which monetary policy may face. A change in interest rates will have effects on both the domestic economy and on a country's international trade position (for example through exchange rate movements). It may be the case that the interest rate movement required for the domestic economy conflicts with that required to achieve a balance on the external current account. An important reason for pursuing an interest rate policy is that the authorities are able to influence interest rates much more effectively and rapidly than they can influence other policy targets, such as the money supply or the volume of credit.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 14: Macroeconomic policy
343
The economic situation in the UK in 2008/09 has highlighted some of the conflicting pressures on monetary policy. In the first half of 2008, the Bank of England's main concern was controlling inflation rates. Rises in the price of oil, coupled with rises in food prices, meant that the annual rate of inflation (Consumer Prices Index) rose to above 5% in September 2008, compared to the target rate of inflation of 2%. As a result, the Bank of England kept interest rates relatively high, with the base rate at 5%. However, in the second half of 2008 it became clear that the real threat to the economy was a severe recession, accompanied by the crisis in the global banking system, a surge in unemployment and a sharp fall in house prices. The threat of inflation had also receded by this time, not least because the slowdown in the global economy had reduced demand for oil and so oil prices had fallen significantly. Consequently, the Bank of England began a series of cuts in the base rate, so that it fell from 5% in September to 2% in December 2008, and in 2009 it was reduced further so that by March 2009 the base rate was 0.5%. By the first quarter of 2009, rather than being focused on controlling inflation, monetary policy was being used to try and stimulate aggregate demand in the economy.
(a)
If the exchange rate falls, exports become cheaper to overseas buyers and so more competitive in export markets. Imports will become more expensive and so less competitive against goods produced by manufacturers at home. A fall in the exchange rate might therefore be good for a domestic economy, by giving a stimulus to exports and reducing demand for imports. An increase in the exchange rate will have the opposite effect, with dearer exports and cheaper imports. If the exchange rate rises and imports become cheaper, though there should be a reduction in the rate of domestic inflation. A fall in the exchange rate, on the other hand, tends to increase the cost of imports and adds to the rate of domestic inflation.
(b)
When a country's economy is heavily dependent on overseas trade, as the UK economy is, it might be appropriate for government policy to establish a target exchange value for the domestic currency. However, the exchange rate is dependent on both the domestic rate of inflation and the level of interest rates. Targets for the exchange rate cannot be achieved unless the rate of inflation at home is first brought under control.
344
(b)
(c)
Items which are selected as monetary targets will also be indicators, but not all indicators are selected by the authorities as targets. There are a number of monetary indicators. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) The size of the money stock Interest rates such as the banks' base rate of interest, the Treasury bill rate and the yield on long-dated government securities The exchange rate against the US dollar, or the trade-weighted exchange rate index The size of the government's borrowing Government borrowing as a percentage of Gross Domestic Product
4.7 The interrelationship between targets: the money supply and interest rate targets
The authorities can set intermediate targets for the growth of the money supply, but to achieve their targets of growth it will be necessary to allow interest rates to adjust to a level at which the demand for money matches the size of the money supply. For example, a policy to cut the growth of the money supply might result in higher real interest rates. On the other hand, the authorities might set targets for the level of interest rates. If they do so, they must allow whatever demand for money there is to be met at that rate of interest by allowing the money supply to meet the demand. If they did not, interest rates would then rise above or fall below the target level. This means that the authorities can set a target for the money supply or a target for interest rates, but they cannot set independent targets for both at the same time.
Changing the level and/or structure of interest rates through open market operations Reserve requirements Direct controls, which might be either quantitative or qualitative Intervention to influence the exchange rate
345
C r
Where C is the initial increase in deposits r is the liquid assets ratio or reserve assets ratio D is the eventual total increase in deposits If the authorities wished to control the rate of increase in bank lending and building society lending, they could impose minimum reserve requirements ie a minimum value for r. The bigger the value or r, the lower size of the credit multiplier would be.
There are drawbacks to reserve requirements as a monetary policy instrument. (a) Unless the same requirements apply to all financial institutions in the country, some institutions will simply take business from others. For example, reserve requirements on UK banks but not on building societies would give the building societies a competitive advantage over the banks, without having any effect on the control of total credit/money supply growth. Similarly, restrictions on domestic financial institutions which do not apply to foreign banks would put the domestic financial institutions at a competitive disadvantage in international markets. This is one reason why international co-operation on the capital adequacy of banks (the Basel agreement) is an important step towards better regulation of financial markets.
(b)
346
(b)
Qualitative controls might be used to alter the type of lending by banks. For example, the government (via the Bank) can ask the banks to limit their lending to the personal sector, and lend more to industry, or to lend less to a particular type of firm (such as, for example, property companies) and more to manufacturing businesses.
To restrain lending To give priority to certain types of lending such as finance for exports or for investment Refuse other types of lending such as loans to private individuals
Moral suasion might therefore be a temporary form of control. As just one example, in 1989, the governor of the Bank of England 'advised' the banks to be wary of lending in such large amounts to property companies, thereby trying to influence banks' lending decisions without giving them directives or instructions.
347
A policy of low interest rates or the absence of any form of credit control might stimulate bank lending, which in turn would increase expenditure (demand) in the economy.
High interest rates might act as a deterrent to borrowing and so reduce spending in the economy.
Strict credit controls (for example restrictions on bank lending) might be introduced to reduce lending and so reduce demand in the economy.
Alternatively, monetary policy might be given prominence over fiscal policy as the most effective approach by a government to achieving its main economic policy objectives. This might not however be possible: from 1990 to 1992, for example, monetary policy in the UK was heavily constrained by the need to set interest rates at levels which maintained sterling's position in the European exchange rate mechanism (ERM). From 1997, the Government has given the Bank of England the role of setting interest rates, although it is still the government which sets an inflation target. If the UK joined a single European currency, interest rates would be largely determined at the European level.
The effectiveness of monetary policy in influencing aggregate demand and unemployment is limited in the longrun.
Having discussed the way fiscal and monetary policies operate on aggregate demand, here we review their role in controlling inflation and affecting the level on unemployment.
348
Cause of inflation
Cost push factors (higher wage costs and other costs working through to higher prices)
Take steps to reduce the quantities or the price of imports. Such a policy might involve trying to achieve either an appreciation or depreciation of the domestic currency Take steps to try to reduce the rate of money supply growth
Reduced government borrowing and borrow from the non-bank private sector Try to control or reduce bank lending Try to achieve a balance of trade surplus Maintain interest rates at a level that might deter money supply growth
Expectations of inflation
Pursue clear policies which indicate the government's determination to reduce the rate of inflation
349
In the long run, unemployment will revert towards its natural level. The rate of inflation, however, will be determined by the short-run Phillips curve, which will shift upwards as inflationary expectations increase. The distinction between short and long-run Phillips curves can help explain the observation that, in the UK and other countries, unemployment and inflation have often both risen at the same time.
Key term
The expectations augmented Phillips curve shows that the expansion of aggregate demand to reduce unemployment below its natural rate will only produce inflation. There is a non-accelerating rate of unemployment (NAIRU) at which the rate of inflation is stable.
Question
10 % inflation N Long run Phillips curve
PC1
PC2
Unemployment level %
Suppose that the short-run Phillips curve is currently at PC2, with unemployment at 5% and annual inflation at 4%. What would happen if the government now took measures to reduce unemployment to 3%?
Answer
Inflation would rise to about 10%, which is the rate of inflation on PC2 associated with 3% unemployment. (Inflation and unemployment levels still follow PC2, rather than shifting inwards to PC1.) However, according to the natural rate hypothesis, in the longer run, unemployment would move back to 5%. A new short-run Phillips curve would be established, according to which an unemployment rate of 5% would be associated with 10% inflation.
350
Monetarist economists argue that the only way to reduce the rate of inflation is to get inflationary expectations out of the system. In doing so, excessive demands for wage rises should be resisted by employers. However a firm approach to reducing the rate of inflation could mean having to accept high levels of unemployment for a while.
Supply Side policies provide a method of managing aggregate supply in the economy.
Key term
Supply side economics can be defined as an approach to economic policymaking which advocates measures to improve the supply of goods and services (eg through deregulation) rather than measures to affect aggregate demand.
Supply side economics is characterised by the following propositions. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) The predominant long-term influences upon output, prices, and employment are the conditions of aggregate supply. Left to itself, the free market will automatically generate the highest level of national income and employment available to the economy.
Inflexibility in the labour market through the existence of trade unions and other restrictive practices retain wages at uncompetitively high levels. This creates unemployment and restricts aggregate supply.
The rates of direct taxation have a major influence upon aggregate supply through their effects upon the incentive to work. There is only a limited role for government in the economic system. Demand management can only influence output and employment 'artificially' in the short run, whilst in the long run creating inflation and hampering growth. Similarly state owned industries are likely to be uncompetitive and accordingly restrict aggregate supply.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 14: Macroeconomic policy
351
Macroeconomic intervention by government is regarded by supply side economists as harmful for several reasons.
High taxes will act as a disincentive to work. The possibility of politically motivated policy changes will create damaging uncertainty in the economy. This will discourage long-term investment.
Although most would accept the need for expansion of the money stock by government to accommodate increases in aggregate demand, some supply-siders have denied even this role to the government. The main supply side policies are: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
Reduction in government expenditure and greater involvement of the private sector in the provision of services. Reduction in taxes in order to increase incentives. Increasing flexibility in the labour market by curbing the power of trade unions. Increasing competition through deregulation and privatisation of utilities. Abolition of exchange controls and allowing the free movement of capital.
(b)
Prices AS AS1
Figure 6(a) shows the effect of a rise in aggregate demand, perhaps as the result of expansionary demand management policies. The aggregate demand schedule shifts from AD to AD1, but in the long run national income remains at Y0. ASS is the short run supply schedule, so in the short run there will be a degree of expansion in national income. However, in the long run, aggregate supply is inelastic, represented by AS. The effect of the rise in aggregate demand will be to increase prices from P1 to P2. While supply side theorists accept that in the short run, national income may rise along the short-run aggregate supply curve ASs, they contend that ultimately national income will fall to its long-run level of Y0 because supply cannot be maintained above its long run level. Consequently aggregate demand by itself is powerless to increase long-run output or employment. Figure 6(b) illustrates a rise in aggregate supply from AS to AS1. The income generated from the higher employment causes aggregate demand to extend and consequently national income rises from Y0 to Y1. This demonstrates the supply side view that only changes in the conditions of aggregate supply can lead to a sustained increase in output and employment. The vertical aggregate supply curve suggests that changes in aggregate demand do not affect output but rather only influence prices. The economy will self-regulate through the action of the price mechanism in each market. Flexible prices in goods and factor markets will ensure that at the microeconomic level each market tends towards a market-clearing equilibrium. At the macroeconomic level, the maximum attainable level of national income is at the level of full employment. Advocates of supply side economics argue that flexible wages will ensure the economy reaches this point.
W0
W1 D
Qd
Q1
Qs
Employment
353
Caused by excess aggregate demand when economy is already at maximum output (full employment). Unemployment is involuntary and caused by weaknesses in the labour market, for example structural unemployment. Government should intervene to bolster aggregate demand and reduce unemployment. Government should play an active role through fiscal policy.
Caused by increases in the money supply, or excess money in the economy. Manage through measures to control the money supply for example, interest rates. Unemployment is voluntary and caused by supply side weaknesses, for example workers not being prepared to work at the wage rates on offer. Should be minimised to avoid 'crowding out' of private sector spending. Best promoted by supply side policies to stimulate markets
Unemployment
However, although the two schools approaches on how to achieve the objectives vary, the underlying fact remains that the main objectives which most governments try to achieve through their domestic economic policies relate back to the objectives the Keynesians and monetarists discussed. They are: (a) (b) (c) (d) Price stability and low inflation Low unemployment Sustainable economic growth Balancing the balance of payments current account.
354
Chapter roundup
Macroeconomic policy objectives relate to economic growth, inflation, unemployment and the balance of payments. Fiscal policy provides a method of managing aggregate demand in the economy via taxation and government spending. Direct taxes have the quality of being progressive or proportional. Income tax is usually progressive, with high rates of tax charged on higher bands of taxable income. Indirect taxes can be regressive, when the taxes are placed on essential commodities or commodities consumed by poorer people in greater quantities.
A government must decide how it intends to raise tax revenues, from direct or indirect taxes, and in what proportions tax revenues will be raised from each source. If the government kept its own spending at the same level, but reduced levels of taxation, it would also stimulate demand in the economy because firms and households would have more of their own money after tax for consumption or saving/investing.
Monetary theory deals with the way changes in monetary variables affect the aggregate demand in the economy and its ultimate impact on prices and output. There are three theories of how the changes in the money supply are transmitted to the real economy: the quantity theory, the Keynesian theory, and the monetarist theory. Monetary policy focuses on the relationship between interest rates and the supply of money in an economy, and how the two of them together can influence aggregate demand. The effectiveness of monetary policy in influencing aggregate demand and unemployment is limited in the longrun. Supply Side policies provide a method of managing aggregate supply in the economy.
355
Quick quiz
1 2 3 What is the difference between fiscal policy and monetary policy? Outline how the government may use fiscal policy to influence aggregate demand. What is: (a) (b) (c) 4 5 A regressive tax? A proportional tax? A progressive tax?
Distinguish between direct taxation and indirect taxation. The government of a certain country decides to introduce a poll tax, which will involve a flat rate levy of $200 on every adult member of the population. This new tax could be described as: A B C D Regressive Proportional Progressive Ad valorem
High rates of personal income tax are thought to have a disincentive effect. This refers to the likelihood that the high rates of tax will: A B C D Encourage illegal tax evasion by individuals Lead to a reduction in the supply of labour Lead to a reduction in savings by individuals Discourage consumer spending and company investments
The total yield from an indirect tax levied on a good is likely to be greatest when: A B C D Demand is inelastic, supply is elastic Demand is inelastic, supply is inelastic Demand in elastic, supply is elastic Demand is elastic, supply is inelastic
Which of the following will not be the immediate purpose of a tax measure by the government? A B C D To discourage an activity regarded as socially undesirable. To influence interest rates. To influence the level of aggregate demand To raise revenue to spend on public or merit goods
Which of the following government aims might be achieved by means of fiscal policy? 1. 2. 3. A B C D A redistribution of income between firms and households. A reduction in aggregate monetary demand. A change in the pattern of consumer demand. Objectives 1 and 2 only Objectives 1 and 3 only Objectives 2 and 3 only Objectives 1, 2 and 3
10
356
11 12 13
According to Keynes, what are the three motives for wanting to hold money? What will be the consequence for bond prices of an increase in interest rates? Which one of the following will be most likely to lead to a rise in aggregate demand in the economy? A B C D An increase in the level of income tax A decrease in government expenditure A decrease in interest rates An increase in the marginal propensity to save
14 15 16
What effect does an increase in interest rates have on the exchange rate? What is the crowding-out effect? According to Keynes, which one of the following is very sensitive to changes in interest rates? A B C D The money supply The speculative demand for money The precautionary demand for money Transactions demand for money
17
Other things remaining the same, according to Keynes, an increase in the money supply will tend to reduce: A B C D Interest rates Liquidity preference The volume of bank overdrafts Prices and incomes
18
According to monetarist economists, which of the following consequences will result from an increase in the money supply? 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A B C D Households will have excess money. Households will use this money to buy more bonds, equities and physical goods. Interest rates will rise. The demand for money will respond to the change in interest rates. Expenditure in the economy will increase. 1, 2 and 5 only will happen 3 and 5 only will happen 1, 2, 4 and 5 only will happen 3, 4 and 5 will all happen
19
How do supply side policies affect inflation and unemployment? Answer in terms of the effect on the aggregate supply curve.
20
According to supply side theories, which of the following will be most likely to reduce unemployment in an economy? A B C D Increasing the money supply in the economy Increasing the levels of unemployment benefit Reducing the level of income tax Increasing vocational training and work skills for the unemployed
357
2 3
4 5 6 7
10 11 12 13
PSNCR (public sector net cash requirement) is the net amount borrowed by government when public sector spending is greater than tax revenues. The transactions, precautionary and speculative motives. Bond prices will fall until the fixed income they provide equates to the rate of interest. C If interest rates fall, people are more likely to spend rather than save. An increase in the level of income tax will mean people have less disposable income to spend. Government expenditure is an injection into the economy and a component of aggregate demand, so reducing government expenditure will deflate demand. An increase in the marginal propensity to save will mean increased levels of saving rather than demand (spending).
14 15 16
A rise in interest rates attracts foreign investment, thus increasing the demand for the currency. The currency typically strengthens as a result. The crowding-out effect is the monetarist argument that public (government) expenditure merely displaces private sector spending in an economy rather than adding to it and boosting output. B According to Keynes, the money supply would be fixed by the authorities. The demand for money depends on three motives (transactions, precautionary and speculative) but it is the speculative demand for money that is sensitive to changes in interest rates, and this explains the liquidity preference schedule. Lower interest rates should be a consequence of an increase in the money supply, with a movement along the liquidity preference curve rather than a shift in the liquidity preference curve.
17
358
18
The question describes the transmission mechanism, which is the link between an excess of money supply over demand (or money demand over supply) and changes in expenditure in the economy. According to monetarists, an increase in the money supply creates excess supply over demand. Households use the excess money to buy bonds (and so interest rates fall), equities and physical goods (and so expenditure in the economy rises). The demand for money is interest-rate inelastic, according to monetarists (but not according to Keynesians) and so this does not increase in response to any interest rate fall.
19 20
By shifting the supply curve to the right, a new equilibrium between aggregate supply and aggregate demand will be reached with levels of lower inflation and higher output (lower unemployment). D Supply side theories argue that unemployment results from problems with the supply of labour in an economy (rather the level of aggregate demand in an economy). Options A and C are measured designed to boost aggregate demand and so are not supply side policies. The availability of employment benefits (Option B) can be seen as encouraging unemployment rather than encouraging people to find work. On the other hand, providing unemployed people with new skills (Option D) should help them get jobs and boost the supply of labour in the economy.
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
6167
439
359
360
Topic list 1 Exchange rates 2 Foreign exchange markets 3 Influences on exchange rates 4 Government policy 5 Risks of international trade
361
1 Exchange rates
FAST FORWARD
The spot rate is the rate at which currencies are currently quoted on the foreign exchange markets. The forward rate is the rate at which currencies will be exchanged on a set future date.
Solution
The key rule to remember is that Dan will always get the worse rate for the transaction and the foreign exchange dealers will always get the better rate. (a) The machinery Dan needs to pay in dollars, so needs to obtain or buy dollars with pounds. The rates quoted are how many dollars can be exchanged for each pound. Since Dan gets the worst of it, for each pound he pays to buy dollars, he will only obtain $1.8700, the lower rate. Therefore to obtain $500,000, he needs to pay 500,000/1.8700 = 267,380
362
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
(b)
The contract payment Here Dan has received euros and wishes to sell the euros he has received in exchange for . As Dan again gets the worse bargain, he has to sell more euros to obtain each pound, and so will have to hand over 1.4800 (the higher rate) to obtain each . Therefore, he will receive 100,000/1.4800 = 67,568
Question
Sterling receipts
Calculate how much sterling the exporter would receive, and how much sterling the importer would pay, in the following situations. (a) (b) A UK exporter receives a payment from a Danish customer of 150,000 kroners. A UK importer buys goods from a Japanese supplier and pays 1 million yen. Bank sells 8.1340 143.65 Bank buys 8.2380 145.78
Answer
(a) The exporter is selling Danish kroners. The bank will buy Danish kroners and give
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
363
MR/
Key term
If a currency is quoted at $1.50:, the $ is the term currency (the reference currency), and the pound sterling is the base currency.
The assessment will not be confined to the activities of UK companies. Exchange rates given in the examination could be as quoted in foreign countries. Because of these complications you should always double-check which rate you are using. One sure method is to recognise that the bank makes money out of the transaction and will therefore offer you the worse of the two possible rates.
A discount is therefore added to the spot rate, and a premium is therefore subtracted from the spot rate. (The mnemonic ADDIS may help you to remember that we ADD Discounts and so subtract premiums.) The longer the duration of a forward contract, the larger the quoted premium or discount will be.
364
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
Solution
Because the forward rate is quoted at a discount, that means that more dollars can be obtained for each pound. The rate is therefore 1.5906 1.6110.
Question
Forward rate
The /$ spot rate is currently quoted at 0.9000 0.9200 and the 3 month forward rate at 0.0012 0.0008 premium.
Required
Answer
Because the forward rate is quoted at a premium, that means that fewer euros can be obtained for each dollar. The rate is therefore 0.8988 0.9192.
Activity in foreign exchange markets partly depends on currency demands arising from international trade, but much dealing is done between banks. If firms want to develop by doing business abroad, they will have to use foreign currency. However, their cash flows may be threatened by adverse exchange rate movements on the foreign currency markets. Longer-term adverse exchange rate movements can threaten a firms competitiveness in world markets.
Banks buy currency from customers and sell currency to customers Banks may buy currency from the government or sell currency to governments this is how governments build up their official reserves Banks also buy or sell currencies between themselves
The foreign exchange markets are worldwide, and average daily turnover in global foreign exchange markets is thought to be close to $4 trillion. The largest currency dealing centre is London, which accounts for over 30% of daily turnover.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
365
In its simplest form, an exchange rate can be measured as the value of one currency expressed in terms of another currency; for example, 1 = $1.60. However, the value can also be expressed as a weighted average of exchange rates with a countrys main trading partners, with the weightings being determined by the relative importance of the country as a competitor in export markets. The weighted average of exchange rates is shown as an index number, and the weighted average is known as the effective exchange rate. A fall in the index shows an overall relative depreciation in a currency.
(b)
366
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
only earn 15,000,000/1.6500 = 9,090,909 and the actual value of sales will be under-budget, even though the quantities sold have been as budgeted. These examples illustrate how using foreign currencies in business can introduce a significant element of uncertainty into planning. We shall discuss how firms counter exchange risk later in this Chapter.
Question
Foreign trading
If a firm makes a lot of sales in one particular overseas countries, why might using suppliers within that country reduce its foreign exchange risk?
Answer
Because the firm is receiving monies and making payments in the same foreign currency, any adverse effect of an exchange rate movement on receipts will be countered by a beneficial effect on payments. This is the technique known as matching. (There may well be other arguments for using suppliers in the same country that sales are made, and locating manufacturing facilities there as well: for example reduced transport and distribution costs.)
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
367
Supply and demand for foreign currency are subject to a number of influences.
The rate of inflation, compared with the rate of inflation in other countries Interest rates, compared with interest rates in other countries The balance of payments Speculation Government policy on intervention to influence the exchange rate
(b)
(c)
The growth in the money supply influences interest rates and domestic inflation. This is monetarist theory. The monetarist argument is that if a government restricts the growth of the money supply, it will be accompanied by high interest rates and consequently also a high exchange rate. A country's economic prospects can also affect its exchange rate. If the economic forecasts for the country are bullish, this might attract speculators' funds, thereby raising demand for the country's currency and increasing its exchange rate. Moreover, since the 1980s, exchange rates have tended to reflect capital movements (driven by financiers buying and selling currencies) rather than the trading of goods and services between countries. Therefore, it could be argued that exchange rates do not accurately reflect real changes in an economy's competitiveness.
(d)
As a simple example, suppose that there is only one commodity, which costs 100 in the UK and 120 Euros in France. The purchasing power parity exchange rate would be 1 = 1.2 (100 = 120). If, as a result of inflation, the cost of the commodity in the UK rises to 120 but the cost in France remains unchanged, purchasing power parity theory would predict that the exchange rate would adjust to 1 = 1, because the same commodity now costs either 120 or 120.
368
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
If the exchange rate remained at 1 = 1.2, it would be cheaper in the UK to import more of the commodity from France rather than to produce it in the UK. If the commodity were bought in France for 120, at an exchange rate of 1 = 1.2 the equivalent cost in would be 100, whereas the cost of producing the commodity in the UK is now 120. As a result, the UK would have a balance of trade deficit in that commodity. This would only be corrected by an alteration in the exchange rate, with the pound weakening against the euro. Purchasing power parity theory states that an exchange rate varies according to relative price changes, so that:
'Old' exchange rate
100 = 1. 120
Unfortunately, the theory is not usually adequate in explaining movements in exchange rates in the short term, mainly because it ignores payments between countries (ie demand and supply transactions) and the influence of supply and demand for currency on exchange rates.
In addition, there are problems involved with measuring and comparing inflation across different countries: for example, that inflation figures include the price of some goods and services which are not traded internationally (eg housing), or that inflation figures include indirect taxes which only affect domestic prices. These issues can limit the validity of purchasing power parity theory.
The interest parity condition can also be expressed more generally as: Forward rate = Spot rate 1 + domestic interest rate 1 + foreign interest rate
This means that if domestic interest rates are greater than foreign interest rates, the forward price of the foreign currency will exceed its spot price. Conversely, if domestic interest rates are below foreign interest rates, the forward price of foreign currency will be below the spot price.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
369
Question
The spot rate between Japan and the Eurozone is currently 130.000 /. Assume the central bank lending rate in Japan is currently 1% and is 1% in the Eurozone. What is the one-year forward exchange rate, using the interest rate parity condition?
Answer
Here we are dealing with two currencies that are not the dollar and the pound, but the logic of the formula remains the same. The exchange rate is quoted as the price in Yen of one Euro, which means the Yen is the domestic currency so the Japanese interest rate goes on top of the interest rate parity equation. Forward rate / = 130.000 (1 + 0.01)/(1 + 0.015) = 129.360
4 Government policy
FAST FORWARD
Government policies on exchange rates might be to set fixed exchange rates or to allow floating exchange rates. Alternatively, governments may look for a policy somewhere between the two. In practice, 'in-between' schemes have included:
Fixed rates, but with provision for devaluations or revaluations of currencies from time to time ('adjustable pegs') and also some fluctuations ('margins') around the fixed exchange value permitted Managed floating within a desired range of values
Currency blocs and exchange rate systems enhance currency stability, but limit the ability of governments to pursue independent economic policies.
If several currencies adopt a single currency, then transactions between firms in different countries within the currency zone will become cheaper (no commission costs on currency dealings), and financial markets across the zone will become more flexible.
D1
Q1
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
371
It is important to remember that the demand for currency is a derived demand, reflecting the demand for exports from a country rather than simply the currency itself. For example, the demand for pounds sterling reflects the demand for British exports. Therefore a fall in the demand for British exports would lead to an inward shift in the demand for GBP (D to D1 on Figure 1). Consequently, the exchange rate for GBP would fall to P1. Equally, the supply of pounds is derived from the demand for imports into Britain. Pounds are needed to buy the foreign currency will which be required to pay for the imports. Following the assumption that currency is only bought and sold for imports and exports, it follows that the exchange rate equilibrium also produces the balance of payments equilibrium; that is supply and demand for currency are equal at the point where imports are equal to exports. It follows from this that a country with a balance of payments deficit (imports > exports) is likely to experience a fall in the exchange rate for its currency, because supply of it will exceed demand for it. Vice versa, a country with a balance of trade surplus (exports > imports) is likely to see an increase in its exchange rate because demand for its currency will exceed supply. However, in practice, supply and demand of currency is not solely for imports and exports, and so exchange rates are subject to influences other than just trade. As we have already mentioned, exchange rates are also affected by interest rates, inflation, and speculative motives.
Driver Interest rates Motive
As interest is the reward for capital, it follows that capital will tend to move towards the nation with the highest interest rate. This will increase the demand for that nation's currency, in turn pushing up its exchange rate. Currencies which suffer relatively high levels of inflation will be less attractive to depositors because their real value is depreciating against currencies with low inflation. So demand for a currency suffering high inflation will be relatively low, leading to a fall in its exchange rate. Sometimes investors may buy a currency simply to make a short-term capital gain, based on the appreciation of that currency. This will cause the currency to be overvalued relative to the equilibrium price which market forces would have generated.
Inflation
Speculative
These effects are also part of the logic which Keynesian economists use when they argue that exchange rates are not automatically adjusting. They believe that the 'real' exchange rate as determined by pure market forces can be in disequilibrium for a long time, precisely because of the distorting impact of external influences such as interest rates, and speculation. Nonetheless, floating exchange rates are the only option available to governments when other systems break down and fail.
Governments do not have to spend or even hold foreign currency reserves Balance of payments deficits or surpluses are automatically corrected. A deficit will result in the exchange rate falling; this will improve competitiveness, raise exports and restore equilibrium. Governments need not adopt economic policies that may be undesirable for other reasons to maintain exchange rates. Encourage efficient allocation of resources since exchange rates will reflect economic conditions.
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
The freedom afforded governments by (c) in the advantages above may mean governments do not pursue domestic policies which they should.
The government can also intervene indirectly, by changing domestic interest rates, and so either attracting or discouraging investors in financial investments which are denominated in the domestic currency. By managing the exchange rate for its currency, a government does not stop all fluctuations in the exchange rate, but it tries to keep the fluctuations within certain limits. (a)
Unofficial limits: a government might intervene in the foreign exchange markets and sell foreign currency from its official reserves to buy the domestic currency, and so support its exchange rate, even though there is no officially declared exchange rate that it is trying to support. Official limits: the country may be part of a system that allows its currency to fluctuate against the other currencies within the system only within specified limits.
(b)
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
373
(b)
The European Monetary System helped reduce exchange rate variability in Europe, and so acted as an important pre-cursor to the adoption of a single currency (the euro) in 1999.
374
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
(b)
(b)
(c)
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
375
(c) (d)
Question
A B C D Floating may result in currency appreciation and a fall in competitiveness. Floating may result in currency depreciation and a rise in inflation. Floating will result in firms facing increased foreign exchange risk. Floating will mean that government economic policy becomes more restricted.
Which of the following is not a disadvantage of a government allowing a countrys exchange rate to float freely?
376
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
Answer
D Floating removes the restrictions on economic policy that are necessary to maintain exchange rates at fixed levels.
Basic methods of hedging risk include matching receipts and payments, invoicing in own currency, and leading and lagging the times that cash is received and paid. A forward contract specifies in advance the rate at which a specified quantity of currency will be bought and sold.
Money market hedging involves borrowing in one currency, converting the money borrowed into another currency and putting the money on deposit until the time the transaction is completed, hoping to take advantage of favourable interest rate movements.
More complex methods of hedging include use of derivatives such as futures, options and swaps.
Key terms
Foreign exchange or currency risk is the risk that the value of a transaction will fluctuate due to changes in foreign exchange rates.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
377
Suppose a UK company has sold a product to a customer in the US, and the price the customer has agreed to pay was $1,600. At the time the sale was made, the exchange rate was 1 : $1.50. However, the company's payment terms meant the customer only had to pay one month later. By this time, the exchange rate has risen to 1 : $1.60. This means the company will only receive 1,000 (1,600/1.6) for the sale rather than the 1,067 (1,600/1.5) it would have received if the rate had remained at 1 : $1.50.
Receipts occur before payments, and The time difference between receipts and payments in the currency is not too long
in order to take advantage of foreign exchange rate movements. With a lead payment, paying in advance of the due date, there is a finance cost to consider. This is the interest cost on the money used to make the payment.
378
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
Question
A German exporter is proposing to sell machinery to a UK customer worth 500,000 and is concerned about a change in the value of the Euro against the . The Finance Director therefore decides to take out a forward contract. The forward rates quoted are / 1.0500 1.0550. How much in Euros will the exporter receive under the contract?
Answer
The exporter in Germany will wish to sell the pounds sterling it anticipates that it will receive. The Finance Director takes out a forward contract maturing at the date of sale. The Euro here is the term currency (X units) in the exchange rate quoted, therefore we have to multiply by the exchange rate. Receipts = 500,000 1.0500 = 525,000.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
379
Borrow the appropriate amount in pounds now Convert the pounds to francs immediately Put the francs on deposit in a Swiss franc bank account When the time comes to pay the company: (a) (b) Pay the supplier out of the franc bank account Repay the pound loan account
Borrow an appropriate amount in the foreign currency today Convert it immediately to home currency Place it on deposit in the home currency When the customer's cash is received: (a) (b) Repay the foreign currency loan Take the cash from the home currency deposit account
5.5 Derivatives
Derivatives are more complex methods of hedging foreign exchange risk. You only need a basic idea of how these work.
5.5.1 Futures
Futures are similar to forward exchange rate contracts in that they represent an obligation to buy or sell currency at a predetermined price at the end of the contract. However, unlike forward contracts, futures are traded on organised exchanges in contracts of standard size carrying standard terms and conditions. They are only available for a limited number of major currencies. Futures are often closed out before they are due to be settled by undertaking a second transaction that reverses the effect of the original commitment. The profit or loss on closing out is set against the companys original requirement to buy or sell currency at whatever the spot rate is on the day that the contract is settled.
380
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
5.5.2 Options
Options allow businesses to benefit from favourable movements in exchange rates whilst allowing them protection if rates move adversely. Currency options give the holder the right but not the obligation to buy or sell foreign currency on or before a specified date at a particular price (the exercise price). (a) (b) If exchange rates move adversely over time, so that buying or selling at the new spot rate is a worse deal than using the option, then the option will be exercised, and the company will deal at the exercise price. On the other hand if exchange rates have moved favourably, so that using the new spot rate is better for the business than using the option, then the option can be allowed to lapse.
The main disadvantage with options is that the premium that has to be paid to purchase them can be quite expensive. This means that if exchange rates move adversely, it will often be cheaper to have used an alternative method of hedging.
5.5.3 Swaps
In a currency swap arrangement, parties agree to swap equivalent amounts of currency for a period, effectively swapping debt between currencies. At the end of the swap, the original amounts are swapped back at an exchange rate agreed at the start of the swap. Currency swaps can provide a hedge against exchange rate movements for longer periods than the forward market. If A Ltd gives 1 million to B Inc in return for $1.5 million, and the amounts are repaid after five years, then the effective exchange rate both at the beginning and at the end of the period is $1.50 = 1. Currency swaps can be similarly useful when using currencies for which no forward market is available. Currency swaps can also be used to restructure the currency base of the company's liabilities. This may be important where the company is trading overseas and receiving revenues in foreign currencies, but its borrowings are denominated in the currency of its home country. Currency swaps therefore provide a means of reducing exchange risk exposure.
Management of credit risk is of particular importance to exporters and various instruments and other arrangements are available to assist in this, such as letters of credit, export credit insurance and export credit guarantees.
Credit risk is the possibility that a loss may occur from the failure of another party to perform according to the terms of a contract.
Key term
Credit means allowing customers to pay for their purchases in the future rather than immediately. Most often therefore credit risk means the failure of customers who have been allowed credit to pay for goods within a reasonable time, or even to pay at all.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
381
(f)
At the same time, letters of credit are a method of obtaining short-term finance from a bank, for working capital. This is because a bank might agree to discount or negotiate a letter of credit. (a) (b) The exporter receives immediate payment of the amount due to him, less the discount, instead of having to wait for payment until the end of the credit period allowed to the buyer. The buyer is able to get a period of credit before having to pay for the imports.
The buyer and the seller first of all agree a contract for the sale of the goods, which provides for payment through a documentary credit. The buyer then requests a bank in his country to issue a letter of credit in favour of the exporter. The issuing bank, by issuing its letter of credit, guarantees payment to the exporter. The buyer does not have to pay for the goods until the end of the period specified in the documentary credit. Letters of credit are slow to arrange, and are administratively cumbersome. However, they might be considered essential where the risk of non-payment is high, or when dealing for the first time with an unknown buyer.
382
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
You might be wondering why export credit insurance should be necessary, when exporters can pursue non-paying customers through the courts in order to obtain payment. The answer is that: (a) (b) If a credit customer defaults on payment, the task of pursuing the case through the courts will be lengthy, and it might be a long time before payment is eventually obtained. There are various reasons why non-payment might happen, for example, the foreign customer could go out of business, or file for bankruptcy. (Export credit insurance provides insurance against non-payment for a variety of risks in addition to the buyer's failure to pay on time.)
Not all exporters take out export credit insurance because premiums are very high and the benefits are sometimes not fully appreciated.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
383
Chapter roundup
The spot rate is the rate at which currencies are currently quoted on the foreign exchange markets. The forward rate is the rate at which currencies will be exchange on a set future date. Activity in foreign exchange markets partly depends on currency demands arising from international trade, but much dealing is done between banks. If firms want to develop by doing business abroad, they will have to use foreign currency. However, their cash flows may be threatened by adverse movements on the foreign currency markets. Longer-term adverse exchange rate movements can threaten a firms competitiveness in world markets. Supply and demand for foreign currency are subject to a number of influences. The rate of inflation, compared with the rate of inflation in other countries Interest rates, compared with interest rates in other countries The balance of payments Speculation Government policy on intervention to influence the exchange rate
Government policies on exchange rates might be to set fixed exchange rates or to allow floating exchange rates. Alternatively, governments may look for a policy somewhere between the two. In practice, 'in-between' schemes have included:
Fixed rates, but with provision for devaluations or revaluations of currencies from time to time ('adjustable pegs') and also some fluctuations ('margins') around the fixed exchange value permitted Managed floating within a desired range of values
Currency blocs and exchange rate systems enhances currency stability, but limit the ability of governments to pursue independent economic policies.
If several currencies adopt a single currency, then transactions between firms in different countries within the currency zone will become cheaper (no commission costs on currency dealings), and financial markets across the zone will become more flexible. Basic methods of hedging risk include matching receipts and payments, invoicing in own currency, and leading and lagging the times that cash is received and paid. A forward contract specifies in advance the rate at which a specified quantity of currency will be bought and sold.
Money market hedging involves borrowing in one currency, converting the money borrowed into another currency and putting the money on deposit until the time the transaction is completed, hoping to take advantage of favourable interest rate movements.
More complex methods of hedging include use of derivatives such as futures, options and swaps. Management of credit risk is of particular importance to exporters and various instruments and other arrangements are available to assist in this, such as letters of credit, export credit insurance and export credit guarantees.
384
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
Quick quiz
1 A UK trader is due to receive today a sum of $750,000 in settlement of a contract. The $/ spot rate is 1.500 1.5200. How much in will the UK trader receive? 2 A German firm is due to receive 25,000 from a UK customer. The / exchange rate is 1.0650 1.0700. How much in will the German firm receive? A B C D 3 4 5 23,364 23,474 26,625 26,750
The current mid market spot rate for $/ is 1.5500. Over the next year inflation is expected to be 2% in the UK, 4% in the US. Assuming that purchasing power parities hold, what would be the $/ rate in one year's time? The current mid market spot rate for / 0.9100. Over the next year interest rates in the Euro bloc are expected to be 2%, in the UK 1%. If the interest rate parity condition holds, what is the / one-year forward rate? It is 1 May and Growler, a UK company, has undertaken to pay for a major consignment of supplies costing $80,000 from a US supplier on 1 August. Growler has considered ways of reducing its foreign exchange risk and has decided to use a forward contract. The current $/ spot rate is 1.5200 1.5400 and the three month forward rate is quoted at 0.0060 00.0050 premium. How much in will Growler pay using the forward contract? A B C D 52,840 52,424 52,151 51,746
What is the main advantage of a system of free floating exchange rates? A B C D Currency risk will be minimised Imposes policy discipline on governments Balance of payments deficits or surpluses are automatically corrected Consumers can compare prices across borders more easily
If a country has a freely floating exchange rate, which one of the following would lead to a rise (appreciation) in the rate of exchange for its currency? A B C D A decrease in the level of exports A decrease in the country's interest rates A decrease in the country's inflation rate A decrease in the level of capital inflows into the country
What is foreign currency hedging by means of borrowing the foreign currency converting it to the home currency, and placing the home currency on deposit known as? A B C D Forward rate hedging Money market hedging Matching Leading and lagging
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
385
Which of the following would normally result from a fall (depreciation) in a country's exchange rate? A B C D A fall in the country's rate of inflation A rise in the volume of exports A worsening in its balance of payments A rise in the volume of imports
Using the purchasing power parity formula Future US$/ = Spot US$/ 1 + US inflation rate 1 + UK inflation rate
= 1.5500 1.04/1.02 = 1.5803 4 The interest rate parity formula for the currencies given in the question is: Forward rate / = Spot / 1 + nominal UK interest rate 1 + nominal Euro interest rate
= 0.9100 1.01/1.02 = 0.90101 Note that the spot price expresses the prices of 1 euro in terms of . So is the domestic currency and is the foreign currency. This means that the UK interest rate goes on top of the interest rate parity equation. 5 A 80,000/(1.5200 0.0060) = 44,101 If you chose B you added the premium. If you chose C you used the more favourable rate. If you chose D you added the premium and used the more favourable rate. 6 C Free floating exchange rates mean that market forces restore equilibrium in the market. A balance of payments deficit will mean that supply > demand for a country's currency, and so its exchange rate will fall. This will improve competitiveness of the country's exports so exports will increase and restore equilibrium in the balance of payments. (Answers A and D are benefits of a single cross-border currency such as the euro).
A decrease in a country's inflation will make its exports cheaper, and therefore more attractive. The increase in demand for exports will lead to an increase in demand for the country's currency (for customers to pay for the exports) and this will lead to its exchange rate rising. Conversely, a decrease in the level of exports (A) will lead to a fall in demand for a country's currency, so this will lead to its exchange rates falling.
386
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
Likewise if interest rates fall (B) it will be less attractive to invest money in a country's banks, so again there will be less demand for the country's money, from foreign investors looking to invest in it. A decrease in the level of capital inflows will also mean demand for the currency falls, and so, again, the exchange rate will fall. 8 9 B B Money market hedging The fall in the exchange rate will make a country's exports cheaper, therefore the volume of exports will increase. Conversely, the currency depreciation will make imports more expensive, so demand for imports will fall. The net of these two will lead to an improvement in the country's balance of payments. The rising price of imports will increase domestic inflation.
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
6869
441
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 15: International trade the foreign exchange market
387
388
15: International trade the foreign exchange market Part D The macroeconomic context of business
The balance of payments and the economic policies affecting it Arguments for and against free trade Globalisation
The balance of payments is a statistical 'accounting' record of a country's international trade transactions (the purchase and sale of goods and services) and capital transactions (the acquisition and disposal of assets and liabilities) with other countries during a period of time. Considering economics looks at how we use scarce resources, we need to consider how resources and trade are managed at an international level, rather than just within a single country. Internationalisation and globalisation can have important consequences for businesses and national economies.
Topic list 1 The balance of payments 2 The terms of trade 3 International trade and its economic advantages 4 Free trade agreements 5 Globalisation of markets 6 Global institutions
Syllabus references D (6), D (11) D (12) D (13) D(13) D(14) & D(15) D (16)
389
The balance of payments accounts consist of a current account with visibles and invisibles sections and transactions in capital (external assets and liabilities including official financing). The sum of the balances on these accounts must be zero, although in practice there is a balancing figure for measurement errors.
In the UK, before 1996, the term visibles was used in official statistics for trade in goods and the term invisibles was used for the rest: services, transfers and repatriated interest, profits and dividends. These terms have now been dropped in order to give more emphasis to the balances for trade in goods and services, although you may still find them mentioned. Trade in goods relates to exports and imports of tangible goods, such as oil, machinery, transport equipment, electrical goods, clothing etc. Trade in services relates to exports and imports of services, and includes such things as international transport, travel, financial services and business services. Income is divided into two parts. (a) (b) Income from employment of UK residents by overseas firms Income from capital investment overseas (such as dividends and interest earned)
Transfers are also divided into two parts: (a) (b) 390 Public sector payments to, and receipts from, overseas bodies such as the EU. Typically these are interest payments Non-government sector payments to and receipts from bodies such as the EU
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
391
UK balance of payments accounts (2008) Current account Trade in goods Trade in services Income Transfers Current balance Capital account Financial account Net errors and omissions
m Exports 251,102 170,399 263,703 15,422 700,626 5,590 (637,083) 69,133 3,554 72,687
m Imports 343,979 115,920 236,763 29,032 725,694 2,197 (655,204) 72,687 72,687
m Net (92,877) 54,479 26,940 (13,610) (25,068) 3,393 18,121 (3,554) 3,554 0
[Source: United Kingdom Balance of Payments: The Pink Book (2009)] Given that the balance of payments in principle sums to zero, you may wonder what is meant by a surplus or deficit on the balance of payments. When journalists or economists speak of the balance of payments they are usually referring to the deficit or surplus on the current account, or possibly to the surplus or deficit on trade in goods only (this is also known as the balance of trade). A surplus on the current account is generally regarded as desirable, because the current account affects national income. If a country has a current account deficit this represents a net withdrawal from the circular flow of income, and so a deficit on a country's current account will be deflationary.
Question Answer
Balance of payments
'If the balance of payments always balances why do we hear about deficits and surpluses?'
The sum of the three balance of payments accounts must always be zero, because every transaction in international trade has a double aspect. Just as accounting transactions are recorded by matching debit and credit entries, so too are international trade and financing transactions recorded by means of matching plus and minus transactions. If a UK exporter sells goods to a foreign buyer: (a) (b) The value of the export is a plus in the current account of the balance of payments The payment for the export results in a reduction in the deposits held by foreigners in UK banks (a minus in the assets and liabilities section)
When we use the phrases 'deficit' or 'surplus on the balance of payments' what we actually mean is a deficit or surplus on the current account. If there is a surplus (+) on the current account we would expect this to be matched by a similar negative amount on the assets and liabilities section. This will take the form of: (a) (b) Additional claims on non-residents (for example, overseas loans) Decreased liabilities to non-residents (paying off our loans abroad)
This will involve not only banks and other firms but it may also involve the government too, since it is responsible for the 'reserves'. If there is a deficit (-) on the current account the result will be a similar positive amount on the assets and liabilities section. This will consist of inward investment and/or increased overseas indebtedness, representing how the
392
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
deficit has been 'financed'. This means that banks and other firms will owe more money abroad and the government may also be borrowing from abroad.
Do not equate a trade surplus or deficit with a 'profit' or 'loss' for the country. A country is not like a company and the trade balance has nothing to do with profits and losses as such.
(b)
(c)
Thus capital outflows, such as investing overseas, not just payments for imports, cause a demand to sell the domestic currency and buy foreign currencies. On the other hand, exports and capital inflows to a country cause a demand to buy the domestic currency in exchange for foreign currencies. Exporters might want to sell foreign currency earnings to a bank in exchange for domestic currency, and importers may want to buy foreign currency from a bank in order to pay a foreign supplier.
When newspapers and the press talk about a surplus or deficit on the balance of payments, they usually mean a surplus or deficit on the current account. A problem arises for a country's balance of payments when the country has a deficit on its current account year after year, although there can also be problems for a country which enjoys a continual current account surplus.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
393
The problems of a deficit on the current account are probably the more obvious though. When a country is continually in deficit, it is importing more goods and services that it is exporting. The table below summarises the main reasons why a country might be suffering a current account deficit. Increased import penetration Lower production costs mean overseas competitors can produce goods more cheaply than domestic producers. Over-valuation of domestic currency makes imports relatively cheaper than domestic products. High income elasticity of demand for imports increases demand for imports as national income grows. Poor export performance Exports are not competitively priced and so overseas demand will fall. Over-valuation of domestic currency makes exports relatively more expensive. Low income elasticity of demand in foreign markets, so demand for exports only grows slowly despite foreign national incomes growing. Equally a country might have low exports because its own domestic market is growing, hence its producers will concentrate on domestic sales rather than looking to export. Non-price features of imported goods (eg performance, service care) better than domestic goods. Non-price features of exported goods (eg performance, service care) worse than those of home-produced goods in target markets.
Many of these situations characterise British industry in recent years, and explain why Britain has been experiencing a structural deficit in its balance of payments current account, with a high demand for imports alongside a weak performance in manufacturing exports. Productivity in Britain languishes a long way behind other developed countries, while a consumer boom and a strong currency have increased demand for imports. A current account deficit leads to three possible consequences. (a) A country may borrow more and more from abroad, to build up external liabilities which match the deficit on its current account, for example encouraging foreign investors to lend more by purchasing the government's gilt-edged securities. A country may sell more and more of its assets. This has been happening in the USA in the early 2000s, for example, where a large deficit on the US current account has resulted in large purchases of shares in US companies by foreign firms. Reserves of foreign currency held by the central bank may be run down.
(b)
(c)
Note, however, that none of these three can continue indefinitely, for example because reserves and assets will eventually run out and if liabilities increase too far foreigners will become unwilling to lend fearing their loans will be irrecoverable. A current account deficit will also mean the demand to buy the country's currency in the foreign exchange markets will be weaker than the supply of the country's currency for sale. As a consequence, there will be pressure on the exchange rate to depreciate in value. If a country has a surplus on current account year after year, it might invest the surplus abroad or add it to official reserves. The balance of payments position would be strong. There is the problem, however, that if one country which is a major trading nation (such as Japan) has a continuous surplus on its balance of payments current account, other countries must be in continual deficit. These other countries can run down their official reserves, perhaps to nothing, and borrow as much as they can to meet the payments overseas, but eventually, they will run
394
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
out of money entirely and be unable even to pay their debts. Political pressure might therefore build up within the importing countries to impose tariffs or import quotas.
(b) (c)
The first two are expenditure switching policies, which transfer resources and expenditure away from imports and towards domestic products, while the last is an expenditure reducing policy.
(Appreciation of a currency will have converse effects to those of a depreciation.) The cost of imports would rise as a result of currency depreciation because more domestic currency would be needed to obtain the foreign currency to pay for imported goods. The volume of imports would fall, although whether or not the total value of imports fell too would depend on the elasticity of demand for imports. (a) (b) If demand for imports is inelastic, the volume of demand would fall by less than their cost goes up, so that the total value of imports would rise. If demand for imports is elastic, the total value of imports would fall since the fall in volume would outweigh the increase in unit costs.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
395
If a country imports raw materials and exports manufactured goods which are made with those materials, the cost of imported raw materials will rise, and so producers will have to put up their prices to cover their higher costs. There will be a net fall in export prices, as explained above, but perhaps not by much.
Key term
J curve effect: the effect on the balance of payments of a falling exchange rate. Inelasticity of both supply and demand means that the current account will deteriorate at first but then improve.
Figure 1 J curve The upside in the J curve is based on the Marshall-Lerner conditions being met. These state that provided the sum of the price elasticity of demand coefficients for exports and imports is greater than one, then a fall in the exchange rate will reduce a balance of payments deficit. If demand for both imports and exports is inelastic (which it will be in the short run) then a currency depreciation will lead to a worsening of the balance of payments position. This is why the J curve falls initially.
396
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
These reductions in the level of economic activity would have negative multiplier effects. A strong currency means that imports become cheaper. Therefore costs of imported raw materials and foodstuffs fall. Input costs for industry therefore fall and any rises in retail prices are restrained. Inflationary pressures in the system are thus lessened. This may be used to advantage on exports to offset partially the effect of the rising currency: firms may be able to hold down their ex-factory price and so enable the net price overseas to rise very little. Any advantage on the import side of a stronger currency would depend on the relative importance of imports: a country having to import much of its raw materials and fuel could find this a useful advantage. With a strong currency, there will also be an increased attraction for buying foreign consumer goods. Invisible imports may begin to rise: more Japanese residents might venture abroad on holiday, so increasing the supply of yen in currency markets and raising the demand for other currencies. This would exert some downward pressure on the yen. Any recessionary effects on industry would, of course, tend to lessen these import pressures. The overall effect would depend on the balance between export and import effects some unfavourable, some favourable. Any significant decline in the net inflow of capital as economic expansion slows could have a destabilising effect. The overall effect would also depend upon the ability of the economy to adjust to the changed conditions, for example through improved efficiency, so enabling ex-factory prices to be reduced. The overall effect would also depend upon economic conditions in the rest of the world.
397
Import restrictions and export subsidies give rise to counter-measures by other countries. They are therefore potentially dangerous measures for a country whose economy relies heavily on external trade. For example, in September 2009, China started imposing tariffs on American exports of automotive products in retaliation to the US's decision to levy tariffs on tyres imported from China. Exchange control regulations might be essential, however, for a country with a balance of payments deficit, low official reserves and one which has great difficulty in borrowing capital from abroad.
Sometimes, a government's domestic economic policies are not deflationary, despite a balance of payments deficit, and on the contrary, the government's economic policies might encourage increasing demand, which will both boost demand for imports, and cause more inflation and a falling exchange rate. Economic policies which boost demand in the economy in spite of a balance of payments deficit will worsen, rather than improve, the deficit.
(b)
398
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
(b)
Indirectly, through the exchange rate. Foreign investment creates a demand for the currency and keeps the exchange rate at a high level.
Is a high interest rate policy a good solution to the problem of a deficit on the balance of payments current account? (a) If a country relies on inflows of capital to finance a continuing balance of trade deficit, the country's balance of payments will never get into equilibrium. High interest rates will keep the exchange rate high for the country's currency, and this will make it more difficult to export (high export prices to foreign buyers) and encourage imports (cheaper prices). The country might therefore be unable to rectify its balance of trade deficit if it maintains a high interest rate. If there is a continuing balance of trade deficit, there will always be a threat that the country's currency will eventually depreciate in value. This will deter investors. This has been a problem for the UK in recent years. The sterling () exchange rate has been falling, and anticipation that the will continue to fall in value has led to low demand for sterling. Investors will only put money into capital investments abroad if they have satisfactory expectations about what the exchange rate for the foreign currency will be. Interest rates alone are not the only factor on which to base an investment decision. After all, what is the value to an investor of high interest rates from investments in a foreign currency when the exchange value of the currency is falling?
(b)
Question
External debt
See if you can think through what the effect of a balance of payments current account deficit will be on a country's external debt.
Answer
A country's external debt increases whenever it has a balance of payments deficit on current account. (a) A deficit on current account must be balanced (that is, equalled) by a matching surplus in transactions in external assets and liabilities, in other words, by: (i) (ii) (b) Borrowing from abroad Selling assets that are owned abroad
If a country's balance of trade deficit is very high, it must borrow heavily from abroad. Borrowing could be: (i) (ii) Borrowing by the government Borrowing by the private sector
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
399
(iii) (c)
Increasing investments in the country's private sector by foreign firms, eg takeovers of domestic companies by foreign companies
There would be fears of a depreciation in the exchange rate of the country's currency, as a consequence of the balance of trade deficit. How can a country succeed in attracting foreign investors if they fear that the value of their investment might fall because of a currency depreciation? Interest rates will probably have to remain high to compensate foreign investors for this risk.
(d)
If the country's external debt becomes very high, the cost of servicing the debt by meeting interest payment schedules could become a severe burden on the country's economy.
The balance of trade depends not only on the volumes of goods traded, but on the relative prices of exports and imports (ie on the terms of trade).
Key term
Terms of trade: a measure of the relative prices of a country's exports to its imports. In effect, the terms of trade are an 'export:import' price ratio, which measures the relative prices of a country's exports and imports. The terms of trade for a country continually change as export prices and import prices change. The terms of trade determine the volume of exports necessary to pay for a given volume of imports or, meaning the same thing, the volume of imports that can be purchased with the proceeds of a given volume of exports. Other things being equal, if the price of exports falls relative to that of imports (a fall in the terms of trade) the trade balance will deteriorate, or vice versa. Note that trade balance depends not just on the physical volume of exports and imports, but on the prices at which they are traded.
Note that the terms of trade and the balance of trade are two distinct measures. Make sure you know what each is, and do not confuse the two.
Question
Trade effects
A country's electronics industry, which is its major export industry, switches from the production of mass low cost, low profit margin microchips to the production of more high powered, high cost, high profit margin custombuilt microchips. Which one of the following effects would you expect to occur?
400
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
A B C D
An improvement in the balance of trade A deterioration in the balance of trade An improvement in the terms of trade A worsening in the terms of trade
Answer
The answer is C. This is one example of how a country's terms of trade might improve. By switching from low priced to high priced products in a major export industry, unit export prices will go up and the terms of trade will improve. The change in the balance of trade depends on changes in the volume of exports and imports as well as changes in export and import prices. The question doesn't give any indication about the expected volume of exports, so we cannot tell what the likely effect of this change in the balance of trade will be.
Unit value of exports Unit value of imports In practice, economists are usually concerned not with a measurable value for the terms of trade but with a measure of changes in the terms of trade, (eg from one year to the next). Using indices for the average prices of imports and exports, the movement in the terms of trade between 2008 and 2009 would be computed as:
Price of exports 2009/price of exports 2008 Price of imports 2009/price of imports 2008
A government has limited powers to influence its country's terms of trade, since it cannot directly influence the composition nor the prices of imports and exports although it can affect the terms of trade through a revaluation or devaluation of the currency which would alter relative import/export prices. (a) If a country's terms of trade worsen, the unit value of its imports will rise by a bigger percentage than the unit value of its exports. The terms of trade will worsen when the exchange rate of the currency depreciates in value against other currencies. If a country's terms of trade improve, the unit value of its exports will rise by a bigger percentage than the unit value of its imports. The terms of trade will improve when the exchange rate of the country's currency appreciates in value against other currencies.
(b)
It would seem logical to assume that an improving terms of trade is good for a country and a worsening terms of trade is bad for it. But this is not necessarily the case.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
401
Question
From your knowledge of the theory of elasticity of demand, analyse what will happen to the current balance of trade when the terms of trade improve, on the assumptions that: (a) (b) Demand for exported goods and demand for imported goods are both inelastic Both demands are elastic
Answer
(a) (b) If the demand for exported goods is inelastic the total value of exports will rise if their price goes up. If the demand for imported goods is inelastic the total value of imports will fall if their price falls.
Provided that price elasticity of demand for both exports and imports is inelastic, an improvement in the terms of trade will result in an improvement in the current balance of trade. On the other hand if the price elasticity of demand for both exports and imports is elastic, an improvement in the terms of trade will lead to a worsening current balance of trade, because: (a) (b) A rise in export prices would reduce total export revenue A fall in import prices would increase total payments for imports
An improvement in the terms of trade might therefore result in a better or a worse balance of payments position. The same applies to worsening terms of trade.
402
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
World output of goods and services will increase if countries specialise in the production of goods or services in which they have a comparative advantage. Just how this total wealth is shared out between countries depends on circumstances.
There are only two countries, country X and country Y Only two goods are produced (in our example, these are lorries and wheat) There are no transport costs and no barriers to trade Resources within each country are easily transferred from one industry to another
20 10 30
The relative cost of lorry production is lower in country X than in country Y, because X gives up 5 tons of wheat for every lorry produced, while Y forgoes 15. The situation is reversed in the case of wheat production, however. For every lorry Y foregoes it can produce an extra 15 tons of wheat, but X can only produce an extra 5. Country X has an absolute advantage in lorry production and country Y has an absolute advantage in wheat production. Greater specialisation will, however, also increase total output.
Question
Absolute advantage
Suppose that each country devotes its entire production resources to the product for which it enjoys an absolute advantage. What will be the total output of lorries and wheat?
Answer
Total world output will be 40 lorries (produced by country X) and 300 tons of wheat (produced by country Y).
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
403
By specialising, total world output is now greater. In the simple example we have just looked at, there are ten more lorries and 50 tons more wheat now available for consumption. In order to obtain the benefits of specialisation countries X and Y in our example can exchange some part of their individual outputs. It is not possible to specify the exact rate of exchange but the limits of the exchange rate must be somewhere between the domestic opportunity cost ratios of the two countries. These are: for country X, 5 tons of wheat per lorry and for country Y, 15 tons of wheat per lorry. One country will not benefit from international trade if the 'exchange rate' is not between these ratios.
20 10 30
In terms of resources used, the costs of production in both industries are lower in country X. If we consider the opportunity costs, however, the picture is rather different. In country X the cost of one lorry is ten tons of wheat, which means that devoting resources to the production of one lorry in country X there is a sacrifice in terms of ten tons of wheat forgone. The opportunity cost of one lorry in country Y is fifteen tons of wheat. Country X therefore has a comparative advantage in the production of lorries. In country X the opportunity cost of a ton of wheat is now 1/10 of a lorry, while in country Y the opportunity cost is 1 /15 of a lorry. In terms of the output of lorries forgone, wheat is cheaper in country Y than in country X. Country Y has a comparative advantage in wheat. It would now be possible for country Y to buy 10 lorries from country X in exchange for 200 tons of wheat. Country X would transfer some of its resources from the production of wheat to the production of lorries, while country Y would put all of its resources into the production of wheat. Total production would now look like this.
Daily production Lorries Wheat Tons 100 300 400
30 0 30
404
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
There is an increase in the world output of wheat. Alternatively, country X might buy 150 tons of wheat form country Y in exchange for 15 lorries. Country X would transfer even more resources to the production of lorries and the total production figures would change again.
Daily production Lorries Wheat Tons 50 300 350
Country X Country Y There has now been an increase in the world output of lorries.
35 0 35
Clearly, the two countries could adjust their trade between these extremes, achieving overall increases in both types of good. However, the key point is that total production is increased if each country specialises in producing the good for which it has a comparative advantage.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Make sure that you are clear about the concept of comparative advantage. Fundamentally, the comparative advantage model explains trade in terms of the benefits of international specialisation. Note that it is trade that leads to specialisation and not the other way round.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
405
(b)
Some countries (including the UK, since the abolition of exchange controls in 1979) have allowed a fairly free flow of capital into and out of the country. Other countries have been more cautious, mainly for one of the following two reasons. (a) The free inflow of foreign capital will make it easier for foreign companies to take over domestic companies. There is often a belief that certain key industries should be owned by residents of the country. Even in the UK, for example, there have been restrictions on the total foreign ownership of shares in companies, such as British Aerospace. Countries are reluctant to allow the free flow of capital out of the country. This applies particularly to less developed countries, but some more advanced economies have similar views. After all, they need capital to come into the country to develop the domestic economy.
(b)
For countries with a large and continuing balance of trade deficit, such as the UK and the USA, it is essential that capital should flow into the country to finance the deficit. The deficit country's currency may need to decline in value to attract funds in.
Tariffs or customs duties Import quotas Embargoes Hidden subsidies for exporters and domestic producers Import restrictions Public procurement (government departments deliberately buying from domestic firms in preference to overseas ones)
406
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
Both domestic and foreign suppliers enjoy a higher price, while consumers buy less at the higher price. Domestic producers supply more. There are fewer imports (in volume). The government collects no revenue.
An embargo on imports from one particular country is a total ban, ie effectively a zero quota. In recent years, Voluntary export restrictions or Voluntary export restraint agreements (VERAs) have been introduced as an alternative to formal quota agreements. VERAs are an arrangement whereby an exporting country agrees to restrict exports without the importing country having to enact import controls. These agreements avoid the friction between the two countries which tariffs and quotas can create.
(b)
When a government gives grants to its domestic producers (for example regional development grants for new investments in certain areas of the country or grants to investments in new industries) the effect of these grants is to make unit production costs lower. These give the domestic producer a cost advantage over foreign producers in export markets as well as domestic markets.
(b)
407
country that does not take protectionist measures when other countries are doing so is likely to find that it suffers all of the disadvantages and none of the advantages of protection. (c) There is an argument that protectionism is necessary, at least in the short term, to protect a country's infant industries that have not yet developed to the size where they can compete in international markets. Less developed countries in particular might need to protect industries against competition from advanced or developing countries. Protection might also help a country in the short term to deal with the problems of a declining industry. Without protection, the industry might quickly collapse and there would be severe problems of sudden mass unemployment. By imposing some protectionist measures, the decline in the industry might be slowed down, and the task of switching resources to new industries could be undertaken over a longer period of time. Protection is often seen as a means for a country to reduce its balance of trade deficit, by imposing tariffs or quotas on imports. However, because of retaliation by other countries, the success of such measures by one country would depend on the demand by other countries for its exports being inelastic with regard to price and its demand for imports being fairly elastic. Protective tariffs can also raise revenue for the government if they are imposed on goods with an inelastic demand.
(d)
(e)
(f)
Imports of raw materials, components, fuel and so on will be more expensive. Domestic producers of inputs will take advantage of the reduction in competition to raise their prices. Rising prices of both imports and domestic goods will lead to increased wage demands.
Reduced demand. Domestic producers will face reduced demand for two reasons.
(a) (b)
Foreign trading partners are likely to retaliate with protective measures of their own, thus reducing export demand. Home consumers will find their real income declines as costs rise (see above) and thus domestic demand will decline.
As well as these direct effects on domestic businesses, we can also argue that protectionism has undesirable impacts on the overall economy. (a) (b) (c) (d) The theory of comparative advantage shows that international free trade achieves the optimal use of resources. By definition, protectionism prevents this from happening. Because firms are protected from competition they will not strive for innovation and cost reduction. In this way, protectionism will encourage inefficiency. Factors of production will remain in 'declining' industries, whereas under free market economics they would move to other industries. Therefore, protectionism leads to a misallocation of resources. If protection is achieved through imposing taxes on imported goods, then consumers will suffer through higher prices.
408
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
(e)
Protection by one country preventing imports may lead to retaliation by the other country. This may provoke a trade war. In this context, when the USA imposed a 35% tariff on imports of Chinese tyres in September 2009, China responded by threatening to retaliate against US automobile parts, leading to concerns that these actions could escalate into a trade war.
Free trade agreements include free trade areas, customs unions and common markets.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
409
The European Union extends these features into an economic and monetary union by harmonising national economic policies, such as financial regulations, and by introducing its own central bank and currency (euro). The European Central Bank (ECB) is the central bank for Europe's single currency (the Euro). Its main task is to maintain price stability in the euro area. However, this means the ECB has to balance the two potentially conflicting objectives in Article 2 of the Treaty on European Union: a high level of employment, and sustainable and non-inflationary growth. In addition, as prescribed by Article 105.2 of the Treaty, the ECB's tasks are to:
Define and implement monetary policy for the eurozone area Conduct foreign exchange operations Manage the official foreign reserves of the eurozone countries Promote the smooth operation of payment systems within the eurozone countries
Governments should not discriminate between EU companies in awarding public works contracts.
Telecommunications should be subject to greater competition.
It should be possible to provide financial services in any country. There should be free movement of capital within the community.
Professional qualifications awarded in one member state should be recognised in the others.
At the same time, you should not assume that there will be a completely 'level playing field'. There are many areas where harmonisation is a long way from being achieved. Here are some examples. (a) (b) (c) (d)
Company taxation. Tax rates, which can affect the viability of investment plans, vary from country to country within the EU. Indirect taxation (eg sales tax, like VAT). Whilst there have been moves to harmonisation, there are still differences between rates imposed by member states. Differences in prosperity. There are considerable differences in prosperity between the wealthiest EU economy (Germany), and the poorest (eg some of the newly enrolled Eastern European members). Differences in workforce skills. Again, this can have a significant effect on investment decisions. The workforce in Germany is perhaps the most highly trained, but also the most highly paid, and so might be suitable for products of a high added value.
410
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
(e)
Infrastructure. Some countries are better provided with road and rail than others. Where accessibility to a market is an important issue, infrastructure can mean significant variations in distribution costs.
5 Globalisation of markets
FAST FORWARD
The growth of multinational enterprises has taken place in an environment of increasing globalisation of markets.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
411
To give access to markets protected by tariffs To reduce transport costs To exploit national or regional differences in demand for goods, and thereby expand sales To take advantage of low labour costs, and thereby reduce production costs To secure supply through backward vertical integration
Centralisation of manufacturing can bring important economies of scale. These must be balanced against transport costs and barriers to trade. And the companies must have a suitably developed organisational structure to control their operations overall.
The environmental variables within which an organisation operates make planning difficult even in local terms. But a multinational faces problems of forecasting environmental variables over many countries, for example, the political environment or how fast the economy is growing. Plans which look promising in the local environment may founder abroad. The possible structures of an organisation have been discussed in earlier chapters (in relation to perfect competition, monopoly etc). Multinationals face the problem that no one structure can meet the needs of the many different environments in which they operate. The basic problem here is whether managers should be chosen from the home country or selected locally. Home-grown managers may be familiar with headquarters philosophy, but may find it difficult to get on with local staff from a different background. On the other hand, using locally selected managers may lead to a lack of homogeneity in the multinational's trading efforts. In some countries a participative style of management is practised. But this may be difficult to transfer to other countries where there is a tradition of autocratic rule.
Organising
Staffing
Leading
412
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
Problem Controlling
Comment
Effective control depends on accurate measurement of performance. When many aspects of performance are measured in monetary terms this means that currency differences are a serious obstacle to control. In addition, accounting practices, financial reporting and taxation may all vary from country to country. Inflation rates may be different, and exchange rates will exacerbate the problem. The sheer size and geographical dispersion of multinationals mean that delays elapse between the measurement of performance and the taking of corrective action.
Inward investment may not create new investment, but displace existing domestic investment. Technology transfer may only be at a low level. May not be new employment; may displace existing employment if MNCs displace existing firms.
Introduce new technologies (technology transfer). MNCs will provide direct employment, and may also create additional indirect employment through supplier firms. Possible multiplier effect resulting from new investment. Local producers establish direct linkages with MNCs and supply to them. Improve productivity of local producers.
Balance of payments gains from inflows of FDI.
Profits from the investment are repatriated to the host country of the MNC. MNCs likely to minimise tax liability through transfer pricing. Government offer grants and subsidies to attract MNC investment so may end up worse off.
6 Global institutions
FAST FORWARD
The principal institutions of the global economy include the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund.
6.1 Globalisation
Globalisation may be defined as the interdependence and integration of different national economies. It reflects the tendency of markets to become global rather than national and for it to be difficult to view any national economy as a stand-alone entity.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
413
Improved communications, for example the speed of access to the internet Reduction of transport costs Political realignments, for example the collapse of the Soviet block Growth of global industries and institutions Break down of some trade barriers by free trade organisations and treaties
Emergence of new growth markets, for example in the less developed countries Enhanced competitiveness as more producers and customers make up the global marketplace Growth of previously poor economies, such as China Cross-national business alliance and mergers International support for poorer nations and assistance provided in development of their economies World economic equalisation The main institutions of globalisation follow the collective will of the G8 countries (USA, Japan, Germany, Canada, Italy, France, the UK and Russia) and are more concerned therefore in aiding the economic wealth of these countries. IMF, WB and ECB along with powerful multinational organisations dictate economic policy in countries but do not include real representation of these countries within their organisations. This lack of accountability has been called global governance without global government (Joseph Stiglitz, Globalisation and its Discontents). World poverty is still an issue and many fear that the policies adopted by WB, IMF and others, for example in restricting subsidy in Africa and opening up their markets for Western imports that are produced under subsidy, actually makes some nations poorer. There is no enduring political and economic stability in the world and the collapse of one part of the economy, for example in South America, could have disastrous knock on effects for the rest of the world.
Criticisms of globalisation
(b)
(c)
(d)
414
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
(e)
Not all countries are included in global activity. Instead there is an increasing tendency for groups of counties, usually located in the same region to become involved in each others economies, for example the countries in the Eurozone.
Chapter roundup
The balance of payments accounts consist of a current account with visibles and invisibles sections and transactions in capital (external assets and liabilities including official financing). The sum of the balances on these accounts must be zero, although in practice there is a balancing figure for measurement errors. When newspapers and the press talk about a surplus or deficit on the balance of payments, they usually mean a surplus or deficit on the current account. The balance of trade depends not only on the volumes of goods traded, but on the relative prices of exports and imports (ie on the terms of trade). World output of goods and services will increase if countries specialise in the production of goods or services in which they have a comparative advantage. Just how this total wealth is shared out between countries depends on circumstances.
Free trade agreements include free trade areas, customs unions and common markets.
The growth of multinational enterprises has taken place in an environment of increasing globalisation of markets. The principal institutions of the global economy include the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund.
Quick quiz
1 2 3 4 5 What does the J curve describe? How do deflationary measures help to eliminate a balance of payments deficit? According to the theory of purchasing power parity, how are inflation rates and exchange rates related? How may the government intervene in the foreign exchange markets? What is the balance of trade? A B C D 6 The balance of payments on current account Net visible trade Net visible and invisible trade The theory of gains from trade
Which of the following statements concerning international trade are true? (1) (2) (3) The J curve effect will work in reverse if there is a depreciation when the current account is in deficit. Protectionism could reduce exports. Devaluation of the domestic currency could reverse a current account deficit.
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
415
A B C D 7
(1) and (3) only (1), (2) and (3) (1) and (2) only (2) and (3) only
From a given base year, a country's export prices rise by 8% and import prices rise by 20%. During this period, the terms of trade will have: A B C D Risen from 100 to 111.1 Risen from 100 to 112 Fallen from 100 to 90 Fallen from 100 to 88
A devaluation will only benefit the UK balance of payments if: A B C D The sum of the price elasticities of demand for imports and exports is less than 1 The sum of the price elasticities of demand for imports and exports is greater than 1 The sum of the price elasticities of demand for imports and exports is less than 0 The sum of the price elasticities of demand for imports and exports is greater than 0
Which one of the following best describes the theory of comparative advantage in relation to the production of cars? A B C D A country can produce cars at a lower opportunity cost than any of its trading partners A country can produce cars more cheaply than any other country can A country can produce more cars than any other country can A country has a higher opportunity cost of producing cars than any of its trading partners
10
What is meant by: (a) (b) (c) A free trade area A customs union A common market?
11
Assume that two small countries, X and Y, produce two commodities P and Q, and that there are no transport costs. One unit of resource in Country X produces 4 units of P or 8 units of Q. One unit of resource in Country Y produces 1 unit of P or 3 units of Q. Which one of the following statements is true? A B C D Country X has an absolute advantage over Country Y in producing P and Q, and so will not trade. Country X has a comparative advantage over Country Y in producing Q. Country Y has a comparative advantage over Country X in producing Q. Country X has a comparative advantage over Country Y in producing both P and Q.
12
The balance of payments current account will include which of the following items? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D Expenditure in a country by overseas visitors The inflow of capital investment by multinational companies Exports of manufactured goods (iii) only (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii) (i), (ii) and (iii)
13 14
Outline the main problems encountered in managing international business operations. What are the main factors driving globalisation?
416
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
15
Which of the following is not an argument in favour of protection? A B C D Protect employment in domestic industries Prevent unfair competition from surplus production in other countries Reduce balance of trade deficit Promote innovation and cost reduction
2 3
5 6
7 8 9
C B A
10
A free trade area exists when there is no restriction on trade between countries. This is extended into a customs union when common external tariffs are levied on imports from non-member countries. A common market adds free movement of the factors of production, including labour and may harmonise economic policy. C Country X has an absolute advantage over Country Y in making both P and Q, because 1 unit of resource in Country X will make more of either P or Q than one unit of resource in Country Y. However, international trade should still take place because of comparative advantage in producing P and Q. The opportunity costs of producing a unit of P is 2 units of Q in Country X and 3 units of Q in Country Y. Similarly, the opportunity cost of producing a unit of Q is 1/2 a unit of P in Country X and 1/3 of a unit of P in Country Y. Country X has a comparative advantage in producing P and Country Y has a comparative advantage in the production of Q. International trade should be beneficial for both countries, with country X exporting P and Country Y exporting Q.
11
Part D The macroeconomic context of business 16: International trade the international economy
417
12
Exports of manufactured goods are part of the balance of trade element of the current account. Expenditure by tourists is part of the trade in services in the 'invisibles' part of the current account. Foreign investment by multi-national companies is part of the financial account. Planning is complicated by the wide variation in conditions between countries. It is difficult to structure an organisation to meet the demands of operations in different countries. Multinationals have to achieve a balance between local and expatriate staff Successful management styles vary from country to country. Control by reference to monetary measures is complicated by varying inflation rates, exchange rates, taxation rates and financial reporting practices.
13
14
The main factors affecting globalisation are: (a) (b) (c) (d) Reduced transport costs Improved communications Emergence of multinational organisations Breakdown of barriers to trade One of the arguments against protectionism is that it removes the incentive for firms to innovate and reduce costs. Critics argue protectionism encourages inefficiency, and does not promote innovation or cost reduction.
15
Now try the questions below from the Exam Question Bank
Question numbers
Page
7075
441
418
16: International trade the international economy Part D The macroeconomic context of business
419
420
0.339
0.317 0.296 0.277 0.258
Interest rates (r) 15% 0.870 0.756 0.658 0.572 0.497 0.432 0.376 0.327 0.284 0.247 0.215 0.187 0.163 0.141 0.123 0.107 0.093 0.081 0.070 0.061 16% 0.862 0.743 0.641 0.552 0.476 0.410 0.354 0.305 0.263 0.227 0.195 0.168 0.145 0.125 0.108 0.093 0.080 0.069 0.060 0.051 17% 0.855 0.731 0.624 0.534 0.456 0.390 0.333 0.285 0.243 0.208 0.178 0.152 0.130 0.111 0.095 0.081 0.069 0.059 0.051 0.043 18% 0.847 0.718 0.609 0.516 0.437 0.370 0.314 0.266 0.225 0.191 0.162 0.137 0.116 0.099 0.084 0.071 0.060 0.051 0.043 0.037 19% 0.840 0.706 0.593 0.499 0.419 0.352 0.296 0.249 0.209 0.176 0.148 0.124 0.104 0.088 0.074 0.062 0.052 0.044 0.037 0.031 20% 0.833 0.694 0.579 0.482 0.402 0.335 0.279 0.233 0.194 0.162 0.135 0.112 0.093 0.078 0.065 0.054 0.045 0.038 0.031 0.026
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
421
1 (1+ r ) n r
Periods (n) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Periods (n) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
.
Interest rates (r) 1% 2% 0.980 1.942 2.884 3.808 4.713 5.601 6.472 7.325 8.162 8.983 9.787 10.575 11.348 12.106 12.849 13.578 14.292 14.992 15.679 16.351 3% 0.971 1.913 2.829 3.717 4.580 5.417 6.230 7.020 7.786 8.530 9.253 9.954 10.635 11.296 11.938 12.561 13.166 13.754 14.324 14.878 4% 0.962 1.886 2.775 3.630 4.452 5.242 6.002 6.733 7.435 8.111 8.760 9.385 9.986 10.563 11.118 11.652 12.166 12.659 13.134 13.590 5% 0.952 1.859 2.723 3.546 4.329 5.076 5.786 6.463 7.108 7.722 8.306 8.863 9.394 9.899 10.380 10.838 11.274 11.690 12.085 12.462 6% 0.943 1.833 2.673 3.465 4.212 4.917 5.582 6.210 6.802 7.360 7.887 8.384 8.853 9.295 9.712 10.106 10.477 10.828 11.158 11.470 7% 0.935 1.808 2.624 3.387 4.100 4.767 5.389 5.971 6.515 7.024 7.499 7.943 8.358 8.745 9.108 9.447 9.763 10.059 10.336 10.594 8% 0.926 1.783 2.577 3.312 3.993 4.623 5.206 5.747 6.247 6.710 7.139 7.536 7.904 8.244 8.559 8.851 9.122 9.372 9.604 9.818 9% 0.917 1.759 2.531 3.240 3.890 4.486 5.033 5.535 5.995 6.418 6.805 7.161 7.487 7.786 8.061 8.313 8.544 8.756 8.950 9.129 10% 0.909 1.736 2.487 3.170 3.791 4.355 4.868 5.335 5.759 6.145 6.495 6.814 7.103 7.367 7.606 7.824 8.022 8.201 8.365 8.514
0.990 1.970 2.941 3.902 4.853 5.795 6.728 7.652 8.566 9.471 10.368 11.255 12.134 13.004 13.865 14.718 15.562 16.398 17.226 18.046
Interest rates (r) 11% 0.901 1.713 2.444 3.102 3.696 4.231 4.712 5.146 5.537 5.889 6.207 6.492 6.750 6.982 7.191 7.379 7.549 7.702 7.839 7.963 12% 0.893 1.690 2.402 3.037 3.605 4.111 4.564 4.968 5.328 5.650 5.938 6.194 6.424 6.628 6.811 6.974 7.120 7.250 7.366 7.469 13% 0.885 1.668 2.361 2.974 3.517 3.998 4.423 4.799 5.132 5.426 5.687 5.918 6.122 6.302 6.462 6.604 6.729 6.840 6.938 7.025 14% 0.877 1.647 2.322 2.914 3.433 3.889 4.288 4.639 4.946 5.216 5.453 5.660 5.842 6.002 6.142 6.265 6.373 6.467 6.550 6.623 15% 0.870 1.626 2.283 2.855 3.352 3.784 4.160 4.487 4.772 5.019 5.234 5.421 5.583 5.724 5.847 5.954 6.047 6.128 6.198 6.259 16% 0.862 1.605 2.246 2.798 3.274 3.685 4.039 4.344 4.607 4.833 5.029 5.197 5.342 5.468 5.575 5.668 5.749 5.818 5.877 5.929 17% 0.855 1.585 2.210 2.743 3.199 3.589 3.922 4.207 4.451 4.659 4.836 4.988 5.118 5.229 5.324 5.405 5.475 5.534 5.584 5.628 18% 0.847 1.566 2.174 2.690 3.127 3.498 3.812 4.078 4.303 4.494 4.656 4.793 4.910 5.008 5.092 5.162 5.222 5.273 5.316 5.353 19% 0.840 1.547 2.140 2.639 3.058 3.410 3.706 3.954 4.163 4.339 4.486 4.611 4.715 4.802 4.876 4.938 4.990 5.033 5.070 5.101 20% 0.833 1.528 2.106 2.589 2.991 3.326 3.605 3.837 4.031 4.192 4.327 4.439 4.533 4.611 4.675 4.730 4.775 4.812 4.843 4.870
422
Question bank
423
424
In economics, the central economic problem means: A B C D Consumers do not have as much money as they would wish There will always be a certain level of unemployment Resources are not always allocated in an optimum way Output is restricted by the limited availability of resources
Which of the following would cause the production possibility frontier for an economy to shift outwards? (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) A B C D A reduction in the level of unemployment A rise in the rate of investment A fall in the price of one factor of production A rise in output per worker (i) and (ii) only (i), (ii) and (iii) only (i), (iii) and (iv) only (ii) and (iv) only
The following are summary financial data for a company for the year ending 31.12.20X9 Profit before interest and tax Interest payments Tax payments Capital employed at 31.12.20X9 was $990m Capital employed at 31.12.20X8 was $930m What was the companys return on capital employed (ROCE)? A B C D 7.9% 8.1% 12.1% 12.5% $m 120 15 27
Which of the following are the key features of a market economy? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D Allocation of resources through the price mechanism Existence of a large public sector Prices determined through the interaction of supply and demand All of them (i) and (ii) (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii)
The 'divorce of ownership from control' in a modern economy describes: A B C D The growth of government regulation Management of companies by salaried personnel who do not have significant shareholding in their company Enhancement of employee rights over conditions of work Expansion of share ownership through privatisation
Question bank
425
The cost of a good or service measured in terms of the alternatives that must be sacrificed in order to produce that good or service is called: A B C D Accounting cost Capital cost Opportunity cost Social cost
BLX Co is planning to invest in a new project, for which the expected costs and income streams are as follows: Capital cost of new equipment required at the start of the project Expected net income streams: Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 $200,000 $50,000 $75,000 $90,000
The equipment is only expected to have a useful working life of 3 years, but at the end of the project BLX expects to be able to sell the equipment for a scrap value of $10,000. BLX uses a discount rate of 10% for evaluating potential projects. What is the net present value of this project? A B C D 8 $25,000 $17,500 +$15,000 +$25,000
The table below shows a firm's total cost (TC), average cost (AC) and marginal cost (MC) for certain levels of output. Which is which? Units of output 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D 1 = AC, 2 = TC, 3 = MC 1 = AC, 2 = MC, 3 = TC 1 = MC, 2 = AC, 3 = TC 1 = TC, 2 = AC, 3 = MC 1 $ 1.10 0.80 0.58 0.50 0.50 0.52 2 $ 1.10 0.50 0.15 0.25 0.50 0.62 3 $ 1.10 1.60 1.75 2.00 2.50 3.12
426
Question bank
Put the correct labels in the boxes on this diagram of short run costs.
Costs 2 3
Output
A B C D E 10
Marginal cost Average fixed cost at this output Average total cost Average fixed cost curve Average variable cost
Which of the following statements is true when constant returns to scale apply? A B C D Marginal cost remains constant but average cost falls Average cost remains constant but marginal cost falls Average fixed cost falls Average cost and marginal cost remain constant
11
Cheapway Co manages its production activities so that it produces at the lowest point on its average cost curve. Which of the following statements must be true? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D Cheapway is achieving technical efficiency Cheapway is achieving allocative efficiency Cheapway is earning normal profits (i) only (i) and (ii) (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii)
12
Which one of the following statements is NOT true? A B C D A firms short run cost curve is always U-shaped, but its long run cost curve may not always be Ushaped Economies of scale act as barriers to entry to potential new entrants into an industry The law of diminishing returns shows long run average costs tend to rise if too many units of variable resource are added to a fixed factor of production A firm will still incur fixed costs in the short run even if it stops producing any output
Question bank
427
13
A horizontal merger combines two firms: A B C D At different stages in the production chain In the same country Working in different industries Producing the same goods or services
14
In the diagram below, point 5 represents equilibrium. If the government starts to pay a cash subsidy to producers of the commodity, what will the new equilibrium be?
A B C D 15
Surpluses will be enjoyed by some suppliers and some consumers even when the market clears under perfect competition. Match the correct labels to the boxes on this diagram.
Price
2 3
4 5
Quantity
428
Question bank
Labels: A B C D E 16 Equilibrium price Consumer surplus Market supply Market demand Producer surplus
If the cost of milk rises, and milk is a major ingredient in yoghurt, then the: A B C D Demand curve for yoghurt shifts to the left Supply for yoghurt curve shifts to the left Supply curve for yoghurt shifts to the right Demand and supply curves for yoghurt both shift to the right
17
Which of the following is not one of the roles performed by prices in a market economy? A B C D A signal to consumers A signal to producers A way of allocating resources between competing uses A way of ensuring a fair distribution of incomes
18
If all other factors remain unchanged, which one of the following would lead to a fall in share prices? A B C D A reduction in the rate of tax which companies have to pay Forecasts predicting a rise in company profits A rise in interest rates A reduction in the number of shares issued
19
Indicate whether the following will cause a shift in the demand curve for a normal good, a shift in its supply curve, or neither: Shift in demand (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) An increase in household incomes A rise in wage costs A fall in the price of raw materials A fall in the price of the good Shift in supply Neither
20
The price elasticity of demand (PED) of good A is negative, its income elasticity of demand (IED) is positive and its cross elasticity of demand (XED) with respect to good X is negative. What is the nature of good A? A B C D A good bought for purposes of ostentation, complementary to X An inferior good, substitute for X A normal good, complementary to X A Giffen good, substitute for X
Question bank
429
21
There are three special cases of elasticity of supply. Put correct labels in the boxes on this diagram.
1 2 3
A B C 22
The income elasticity of demand for a product is high. This means that: A B C D Sales will increase sharply if the price is reduced Sales will fall only slightly when incomes of households fall Sales will rise sharply when incomes of households rise The good is inferior good
23
Sales of Good X have fallen from 120,000 per year to 108,000 per year following an increase in the price of Good Y from $1 to $2. Which of the following statements most accurately describes the relationship between Goods X and Y? A B C D They are complements, and the relationship between them is very strong They are substitutes, and the relationship between them is very strong They are complements, but the relationship between them is relatively weak They are substitutes, but the relationship between them is relatively weak
430
Question bank
24
A selective indirect tax will have predictable effects. In this diagram, an indirect tax has been imposed and supply has shifted from S0 to S1. Put the correct labels in the boxes on the diagram.
Price Z0 S 1 S0 1 P1 P0 P2 2 A C B D 0 X1 X0 Quantity T Z1 4
A B C D E 25
Fall in output Tax borne by supplier Tax borne by customer Supernormal profit Tax imposed per unit
The table below shows a market demand schedule and a market supply schedule for beans. Price per tonne $ 280 260 240 220 200 180 160 Quantity demanded per month ('000 tonnes) 4,000 5,000 6,400 7,400 8,200 9,000 9,800 Quantity supplied per month ('000 tonnes) 9,200 8,800 8,200 7,400 6,600 5,800 4,800
What would be the consequences of the introduction by the government of a maximum price for beans of $200 per tonne? Assume that supply quantities can be readily adjusted to any new market conditions. 1 2 3 4 5 There would be a need for rationing of beans There would be a 'bean mountain' There would be a shortage of 1,600,000 tonnes per month There would be a surplus of 1,600,000 tonnes per month The price for beans would be unchanged
Question bank
431
A B C D 26
Consequences 1 and 3 only Consequences 2 and 4 only Consequence 5 only Consequence 4 only
Which of the following are public goods in economic terms? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D Health service Public transport Street lighting (i) and (ii) (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii) (iii) only
27
Recent government legislation in County T has meant that car manufacturers there now have to install antipollution devices in all their cars. Which of the following outcomes is a result of this action? A B C D An increase in private costs and a reduction in negative externalities An increase in private costs and an increase in negative externalities An increase in social costs and a reduction in negative externalities An increase in social costs and an increase in negative externalities
28
Which of the following statements about externalities is true? (i) (ii) (iii) Externalities are the differences between the private and social costs or benefits of a transaction Externalities are the benefits provided by merit goods Monopolistic market transactions are characterised by the absence of positive externalities
A (i) and (iii) only B (ii) only C (i), (ii) and (iii) D (i) only 29 Which diagram shows marginal cost and marginal revenue under perfect competition?
432
Question bank
30
MC P1 1 X Y Z
O 4
Q1 2
Output
A B C D E F 31
Supernormal profit Marginal revenue Transfer earnings Profit maximising output Average revenue Most efficient level of output
Discounts are offered on the price of standby tickets on scheduled air flights because: A B C D Marginal revenue is increased by price discrimination Marginal cost exceeds average cost for standby seats Up to full occupancy, the marginal cost of seats is low Demand for seats is always price elastic
32
Which of the following are true? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D For a profit-maximising monopolist, price will be higher than marginal cost A monopolist's profit-maximising position occurs at the technically efficient level of output The level of output in a monopoly is likely to be lower than under perfect competition (i) and (ii) (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii) All of them
Question bank
433
33
In what way does monopolistic competition differ from monopoly? Under monopolistic competition: A B C D There is no possibility of supernormal profit There are no significant barriers to entry The excess capacity theorem does not apply The average revenue curve slopes downwards
34
Which one of the following will tend to increase the number of firms in an industry? A B C D Significant barriers to entry Economies of scale High transport costs High advertising costs
35
Oligopoly markets usually show little price competition. Label the diagram.
Price
D P
MC
1
3
5
Output
A B C D 36
Average cost Very inelastic demand Marginal revenue Very elastic demand
Which one of the following would not justify government regulation of markets? A B C D Imperfect competition Externalities Regulatory capture Imperfect information
434
Question bank
37
Which one of the following statements is incorrect? A B C D If the effect of privatisation is to increase competition, the effect might be to reduce or eliminate allocative inefficiency Privatisation means selling off nationalised industries by the government to the private sector The effect of denationalisation could be to make firms more cost-conscious, because they will be under the scrutiny of stock market investors The government may appoint consumer watchdogs to regulate privatised industries
38
A money market is most closely described as: A B C D The market for short-term capital, enabling businesses and government to maintain liquidity The market for trading unquoted company shares The market for mortgages, enabling individuals to buy their own homes A government agency for raising finance
39
Which one of the following is NOT necessarily a function of money? A B C D Acts as a store of value Is legal tender Is a unit of account Acts as a medium of exchange
40
Highfly Co is looking to raise finance to fund the construction of a new airport terminal, which is a major long-term investment project it expects to take approximately 10 years to complete. Which one of the following is the most suitable source of finance for Highfly Co to use? A B C D Renegotiating its bank overdraft Issuing new shares Taking out a new, five year, bank loan Issuing a bill of exchange
41
What is maturity transformation? A B C D The rolling-over of government debt at its maturity date into new long-term bonds The packaging up of small investor deposits into large loans The conversion of short-term capital into long-term capital The banking practice of allowing depositors to withdraw funds at short notice while making longterm loans
42
Which one of the following statements is true? A B C D An insurer will not insure against events they know will occur An insurance broker accepts risk in exchange for a premium Re-insurance involves an insurer sharing risk with another insurer in exchange for part of the premium Insurance underwriters act as intermediaries
Question bank
435
43
The slope of a normal yield curve is: A B C D Upwards because of government monetary policy Upwards because of uncertainty about the future Downwards because of price inflation Downwards because of reducing demand
44
Foxy Bank is the only bank in Foxland and it maintains a cash reserve ratio of 20%. The bank has recently received a new cash deposit of $5 million. What will be the subsequent, additional increase in bank deposits in Foxland as a result of this? A B C D $25 million $20 million $5 million $1 million
45
Which one of the following is NOT a function of a central bank? A B C D Act as lender of the last resort to the banking system Issue notes and coin in an economy Ensure banks have sufficient capital to meet problems arising from business losses Advise companies on money management and share issues
46
Which of the following is the most liquid asset of a commercial bank? A B C D Customers deposits Government Bonds Cash Operational balances with the Bank of England
47
Fixed interest securities that pay $1.50 every six months are trading at a price of $40 each, though their face value is $50 each. What is the current rate of annual interest available on investments of this type? A B C D 6% 3% 7% 3%
48
Here are some entries from the national accounts of Utopia. All entries are in millions of Utopian groats. 'Firms' includes public corporations. Income of individuals before tax Output of firms at sales value Government expenditure Firms' pre-tax profit Firms' investment Consumers' expenditure Exports 9,000 20,000 2,000 7,000 3,000 11,000 4,000
Using the principles of Keynesian economics, what is the value of imports? A B C D 2,000 8,000 4,000 9,000
436
Question bank
49
There is a circular flow of value around the macroeconomy Label the diagram.
Factor incomes
2 Firms 3 4
A B C D 50
Households Expenditure on goods and services Factors of production Goods and services produced and sold
The country of Rosen has a GDP at market prices of $475 million. The net income earned by Rosen companies and individuals abroad, and remitted back to Rosen, is $28 million. The value of indirect taxes in Rosen total $43 million, while subsidies total $19m. What is Rosens GDP at factor cost? A B C D $451 million $479 million $499 million $527 million
51
In the country of Petrovia, the nominal gross domestic product grew by 9% and real gross domestic product grew by 4%. Inflation for the year is: A B C D 5% 5% 9% 13%
52
Withdrawals from the circular flow of income in an economy are: A B C D Savings, investments and exports Investment, taxation and imports Investment, government spending and exports minus imports Savings, taxation and imports
Question bank
437
53
A recent increase in investment expenditure of $150 million in Country Z has resulted in the equilibrium level of national income increasing by $375 million. What is the value of the marginal propensity to consume in Country Z? A B C D 0.4 0.6 1.67 2.5
54
A 55
The government of Autoland is considering different ways of increasing the rate of economic growth in its country. Which one of the following would NOT be a suitable policy for it to introduce? A B C D Reducing rates of direct tax Reducing interest rates Reducing the level of government spending Increasing investment in training to help reduce unemployment
56
The level of unemployment in Jobland is currently at its natural rate. However, recent government policies have prompted an increase in aggregate demand in Jobland. What will be the initial impact of this increase in aggregate demand in Jobland? A B C D An increase in prices and a decrease in the level of unemployment An increase in prices, but no change in the level of unemployment No change in prices but a decrease in the level of unemployment A decrease in prices and a decrease in unemployment
57
Which of the following would lead to cost push inflation: (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D An increase in indirect taxation An increase in consumer expenditure resulting in aggregate demand exceeding aggregate supply An increase in wages and salaries (i) and (ii) (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii) (iii) only
438
Question bank
58
Which of the following is an example of structural unemployment? A B C D A computer programmer leaves his job and moves abroad A construction worker is always unemployed during the winter months A worker loses her job during a recession A car worker is replaced by a robot
59
Recent increases in tax rates in Messiland have led to a number of skilled workers leaving the country to work in neighbouring countries. Assuming other factors remain unchanged, what is the most likely consequence of the resulting decrease in the supply of skilled labour in Messiland? A B C D The quantity of skilled labour employed will fall, but wage levels will remain unchanged A decrease in the quantity of skilled labour employed, but an increase in the equilibrium wage level in Messiland An increase in structural unemployment in Messiland, and a fall in wage rates A decrease in the quantity of skilled labour employed and a decrease in the equilibrium wage level in Messiland
60
The relationship between money supply and prices can be expressed in the quantity theory of money. What is the correct formula? A B C D MV = PT M/V = P/T MP = VT MT = VP
61
Keynes applied the idea of supply and demand to the macroeconomy. Label the diagram.
Prices
P 1 PF AD1 AD 2
A B C D
Full employment level of output National income Inflationary gap Aggregate supply 439
Question bank
62
A government wishes to continue to combine an expansionary fiscal stance with anti-inflationary monetary policy. What combination of policy instruments should it choose? A B C D Taxation up, borrowing down, interest rates up Spending down, taxation down, interest rates down Interest rates stable, taxation greater than spending Spending greater than taxation, interest rates up
63
The government of Country X has adopted a restrictive monetary policy to try to control the rate of economic growth in its country. Which one of the following is NOT likely to occur as a result of this policy? A B C D Demand for goods in Country X, especially consumer durables, is likely to decline Business investment in new capital projects is likely to decline The exchange rate for Country Xs currency on the foreign exchange markets is likely to depreciate The level of savings in Country X is likely to increase
64
If a government is trying to achieve economic growth in its country by pursuing a supply side policy, which one of the following will its policy be designed to achieve: A B C D An increase in the money supply in the economy A reduction in the supply of labour in order to reduce unemployment levels Introducing measures (such as education and training) to improve the supply of goods and services in the economy A reduction in the level of government borrowing in the economy
65
The most likely effect of a cut in the basic rate of UK income tax (direct tax) is: A B C D A rise in the value of the pound A fall in the value of the pound A fall in the PSBR A fall in the amount of VAT receipts
66
The economy of Fastland is currently experiencing high levels of demand pull inflation, and the government is keen to reduce this. What would be the most appropriate macroeconomic policy to try to achieve this goal? A B C D Increased government expenditure, increased taxation and increased interest rates Decreased government expenditure, increased taxation and decreased interest rates Decreased government expenditure, increased taxation and increased interest rates Increased government expenditure, decreased taxation and decreased interest rates $m 325 375 240 $m 300 450 215
67
Here is some summary economic data for a country Savings Taxation Imports Investment Government expenditure Exports
Which one of the following statements about the economy is true? A B C D 440
Question bank
Economic activity is increasing, and the country has a budget surplus Economic activity is increasing, but the country has a budget deficit Economic activity is decreasing, and the country has a budget deficit Economic activity is decreasing, but the country has a budget surplus
68
Which of the following statements about exchange rates is correct? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D If Country A has 8% inflation and Country B has 12% inflation, Country A's currency will tend to weaken against that of Country B. A country that has a persistent large deficit on its balance of trade cannot have a stable exchange rate in the short-term. Foreign currency reserves are necessary when the exchange rate is fixed. (i) and (iii) (ii) only (ii) and (iii) (iii) only
69
Which one of the following would be the most likely to occur if the Euravian dollar depreciates significantly against the currencies of its major trading partners? A B C D There will be an increase in demand for goods imported into Euravia There will be an increase in imported inflation in Euravia There will be a decrease in the cost of travelling overseas from Euravia There will be a decrease in the demand for exports from Euravia
70
With reference to the law of comparative advantage, the consequences of protectionism in international trade are that protectionist measures will prevent: A B C D Each country of the world from maximising its economic wealth Each country of the world from maximising the value of its exports The countries of the world from maximising their total output with their economic resources Each country of the world from achieving equilibrium in its balance of payments
71
MM and BB represent production possibility boundaries of two countries, Mula and Burra respectively. Each country produces just two goods, corn and clothing. From the diagram, it can be seen that: A B C D Mula has a comparative advantage in the production of clothing Burra has an absolute advantage in the production of both corn and clothing In the absence of international trade, Burra has a higher national income per head of the population than Mula Burra has a comparative advantage in the production of clothing
Question bank
441
72
Which one of the following statements is not true? A B C D The balance of payments accounts always balance to zero Current account deficits have to be financed by surpluses on the capital or financial accounts The J curve shows that the short term effect of a depreciation in currency is the reduction in a current account deficit A rise in the exchange rate is likely to reduce domestic inflation $m 325 260 125 100 80 75 5
73
The trade accounts for Exland for 20X9 show the following figures: Trade in goods (net position of exports minus imports) Trade in services (net position of exports minus imports) Income from capital investments overseas Capital flows Transfers to overseas bodies Investment flows on the financial account Net errors and omissions
What is the balance on Exlands balance of payments' current account for 20X9? A B C D 74 $80m $60m Zero $-20m
Which one of the following options would a government attempting to reduce the deficit on its countrys balance of payments current account deficit be most likely to employ? A B C D An expansionary fiscal policy A depreciation of its currency An reduction in interest rates Provide incentives for foreign companies to invest in its country
75
Which of the following describe functions of the World Trade Organisation (WTO)? (i) (ii) (iii) A B C D Settling trade disputes between member countries Monitoring developments in world trade and reviewing barriers to international trade Providing financial assistance to developing countries to help them develop international trade (i) and (ii) (i) and (iii) (ii) and (iii) All of them
442
Question bank
Answer bank
443
444
1 2
D D
Scarce resources are the fundamental problem of economics These items will increase the economy's productive potential. A fall in employment does not increase productive potential, it merely makes better use of existing potential. Similarly, a fall in the price of a factor of production does not increase the amount of the factor that is available overall, though it may lead to the utilisation of a greater quantity of it. Note because you are given capital employed for both 20X9 and 20X8 you must use an average of the two figures when calculating the ROCE. ROCE =
Profit before interest and tax 120 = 12.5% = Average capital employed 960
4 5 6
C B C
The existence of a large public sector is likely to be a characteristic of a command economy rather than a market economy. Smaller companies are often 'owner-managed', but larger public companies generally use hired managers to serve shareholders. This can also be expressed as the principal-agent problem. In economics, cost represents the total value which must be given up to acquire or achieve something, and this includes the alternative uses to which resources could be put. The value of these alternative uses foregone is the opportunity cost of an activity. $ (200,000) 45,450 61,950 67,590 7,510 (17,500)
B Initial cash outflows Discounted cash inflows: Year 1: $50,000 0.909 Year 2: $75,000 0.826 Year 3: $90,000 0.751 Scrap value $10,000 0.751 Net present value
3 must be TC as it is the largest of any level of output greater than one unit. 2 is MC since it shows the increase in TC for each extra unit of production. Therefore 1 must be AC. Also 1 is equal to 3 divided by the units of output. B A C E D Fixed costs plus variable costs equals total costs. Marginal cost crosses the average cost lines at their lowest points. Average total cost equals average fixed cost plus average variable cost. Average costs fall while marginal costs are lower and rise when they are higher. Fixed costs are spread over more units as output increases.
1 2 3 4 5 D A
10 11
The essence of constant returns to scale is that costs per unit do not change Cheapway is achieving technical efficiency because it is producing at the lowest point on its average cost curve. Allocative efficiency would be achieved if the price of Cheapway's products was equal to their marginal cost, but we are not told anything about their price so we do not know this. Equally, because we do not know anything about price or revenues, we do cannot tell what level of profit Cheapway earns.
Answer bank
445
12
The law of diminishing marginal returns shows how short run average variable costs tend to rise if too many units of variable resources are added to a fixed factor of production. By definition, if there are fixed factors of production we must be dealing with the short run rather than the long run. While firms always experience diminishing returns to scale if they grow too large in the short run, they may not necessarily suffer diseconomies of scale as they grow in the long run. Therefore, long run cost curves may not always be U-shaped.
13
A horizontal merger involves two firms producing similar goods at the same stage of production. A is vertical integration; C would be conglomerate diversification; B may be any kind of merger: there is no enough information to tell.
14
The effect of a cash subsidy is to shift the supply curve to the right. Producers are willing to supply bigger quantities at the same market price, because they will get a cash subsidy from the government in addition to the market price. The new supply curve goes through points 7, 8 and 9, and so the new equilibrium, given no shift in the demand curve, is at point 8. A B C D E The market clears at the equilibrium price there is neither surplus nor shortage. Some consumers would have paid a higher price. The higher the price, the more attractive it is to suppliers. The demand curve usually slopes downwards. Some suppliers would have sold at lower price.
15
1 2 3 4 5 B D C
16 17 18
Demand conditions, and therefore the demand curve, are unchanged. However, less will be supplied at any given price and so the supply curve will move to the left. A government may intervene, for example through progressive taxation, to make the distribution of income fairer. A reduction in corporation tax, and expectations of increased profits, will both increase the demand for shares. A reduction in the number of shares issued reduces the supply of shares. As the price of shares is determined by demand and supply (for shares) these options will cause the price of shares to rise. However, a rise in interest rates will lead to other investments becoming relatively more attractive instead of shares, so demand (and therefore price) for shares will fall.
19
An increase in household incomes A rise in wage costs A fall in the price of raw materials A fall in the price of the good
Shift in demand X
Shift in supply
Neither
X X X
An increase in household incomes will lead to an increase in the quantity demanded at all prices, and so will lead to an outward shift in the demand curve. A rise in wage costs will lead to an inward shift (contraction) of the supply curve, while a fall in the price of raw materials will lead to an outward shift (expansion) of the supply curve. A fall in the price of the good will lead to a movement along both the demand and supply curves, but will not lead to a shift in either of them.
20
Goods of ostentation and Giffen goods have positive PED. Inferior goods have negative IED. Substitutes have positive XED.
446
Answer bank
21
1 2 3 C
C A B
Quantity available to purchase remains the same no matter what price is offered. Any straight line passing through the origin shows unit elasticity. Any desired quantity is available at the prevailing price, none at a lower price.
22
The income elasticity of demand measures the responsiveness of demand to changes in consumers' incomes. An 'inferior' good has a negative income elasticity: as incomes fall, more is bought. % change in demand for Good X 10% = = 0.2 + 50% % change in price of Good Y The cross elasticity is negative, meaning the goods must be complements. But the value is nearer 0 than 1, meaning the strength of the relationship between the two goods is relatively weak.
23
24
1 2 3 4
C B E A
Customer now pays P1 instead of P0 Supplier receives P2 net of tax instead of P0 The supply curve shifts vertically by the amount of the tax Demand is lower at the higher price
Before the maximum price regulations were introduced, the equilibrium price was $220, with 7,400,000 tonnes demanded and supplied each month. With a maximum price of $200, demand will be 8,200,000 tonnes per month and supply only 6,600,000 tonnes per month. With demand exceeding supply, there will be a bean shortage and a need for rationing - since prices cannot be raised to eliminate the excess demand. Public goods are indivisible and non-diminishable, meaning that the benefits from them cannot be restricted solely to those people who have paid for them, and consequently that they would not be provided by a private company. It would be possible to restrict the provision of health services or transport systems to those people who have paid for them, but everybody benefits from street lighting.
26
27
The cost of installing the devices is a private cost to the manufacturer. However, the reduction in pollution which results benefits society as a whole, and therefore is a reduction in negative externalities.
28
This is a point of definition. It is true to say that merit goods have merit because of the extensive positive externalities their provision creates, but this is not a definition of externalities. Monopolies are just as likely to generate externalities, both positive and negative, as any other market form. A shows total cost and total revenue and C shows marginal cost and marginal revenue where perfect competition does not exist. D shows marginal cost and average cost for a typical firm. A firm under perfect competition is a price taker, so marginal revenue = average revenue = price, being a horizontal line. A B E F Profits are maximised at output Q1; revenues exceed opportunity costs. Marginal and average revenue must both fall if sales are to increase. The gradient of AR = half that of MR. Efficiency is highest when average costs are lowest, which is where MC cuts AC.
29
30
1 2 3 4
The profit maximising output (D) occurs at Q1 but there is no label to fill in for this. Transfer earnings do not appear on the diagram.
31
The marginal cost of vacant seats is low. Only a little more fuel and food cost is incurred, plus taxes.
Answer bank
447
32
As the diagram illustrates, PM is greater than marginal cost (MC) at the profit maximising level of output: QM. In turn, QM is less than QPC. However, the level of output QM is not at the lowest point on the average cost curve, which is the indicator of the technically efficient level of output.
33
Under monopolistic competition, although firms attempt to differentiate their products, for example by advertising and brand image, there are no significant barriers to entry. Supernormal profits can be made in the short run, but they are likely to be competed away in the longer term. The excess capacity theorem applies. The AR curve slopes downwards in all market models except perfect competition. Barriers to entry will restrict the number of firms which can join the industry. High advertising costs are a barrier to entry and so will tend to restrict numbers. Economies of scale will mean that the industry is likely to contain a few large firms rather than lots of smaller ones. However, if transport costs are high we would expect to see lots of small, local firms because being local will allow them to minimise the transport costs involved in distributing goods or services to their customers.
34
35
C 2 3 D B Customers will desert an oligopolist who increases prices A price cut will be matched by the other oligopolists, with little eventual change in market share.
The others are types of market failure. Regulatory capture occurs when the regulator becomes unduly influenced by the regulated firms.
448
Answer bank
37
Privatisation could mean selling off nationalised industries, but it can also refer to deregulation of industries to allow private firms to compete with state-run business (eg private bus companies) and contracting out work previously done by government employees to private firms (eg refuse collection). Statement C is correct, and refers to the influence of stock market competition on newly-privatised monopolies. Statement D is correct: an example in the UK is the regulatory body Oftel for BT (formerly British Telecom).
38 39
A B
The money market meets short term capital requirements of companies and government. The four main functions of money are that it acts as a: store of value, unit of account, medium of exchange and standard of deferred payment. However, there is no requirement for money to be legal tender. The project is a long-term project and so it must be financed with a long-term financial instrument. Maturity transformation is undertaken by banks. They can borrow short and lend long because they are confident that new depositors will continue to provide funds as time goes by. Reinsurance occurs when an insurer shares their risk and their premium with another insurer. A broker is an intermediary, while the underwriter accepts risk in exchange for a premium (B and D). Insurance on a known event is called assurance (A).
40 41 42
B D C
43
The interest charged on a long term loan is likely, ceteris paribus, to be higher than that charged on a short term loan because of the greater risk involved in committing money for the longer term. As the bank maintains a 20% cash ratio, the credit multiplier is 1 = 5 times. 20%
44
This means the total increase in bank deposits is $5 million x 5 = $25 million. However, this $25 million includes the initial deposit of $5 million, so the additional increase is only $25 million - $5 million = $20 million.
45 46 47 48
D C C C
Advising companies on money management, and advising / underwriting new share issues are functions of a merchant bank not of a central bank. Cash is the most liquid asset of all. (Note: customers' deposits (option A) are a liability for the bank). A $40 investment produces an annual return of $3. This is equivalent to 7%. Note: rate is calculated using trading price not face value. National income Also, national income 16,000 imports = Income of individuals and profit of firms (income approach) = 9,000 + 7,000 = 16,000. = Total expenditure + exports imports (expenditure approach) = 3,000 + 2,000 + 11,000 + 4,000 imports = 5,000 + 11,000 + 4,000 16,000 = 4,000
49
1 2 3 4
B D C A
Expenditure is financed by factor incomes Goods and services are produced by firms and consumed by households Productive resources are land, labour, capital and enterprise Households supply factors of production to firms
Answer bank
449
50
To adjust GDP at market price to GDP at factor cost, taxes must be deducted and subsidies added. Income earned by domestic companies and individuals abroad and remitted back to the home country is added to the GDP figures to calculate GNP, but is not relevant here. So: $475m $43m + $19m = $451m.
51
Nominal gross domestic product is a measure of national output using current prices. Real gross domestic product measures national output using a constant set of prices. Real gross domestic product thus takes account of the changes in the price level and measures only the changes in real output. The difference in the growth rates of the two measures is attributable to changes in the price level. Inflation for the year must be 9% 4% = 5%. This is a point of definition. The multiplier in Country Z is 2.5 (375/150 = 2.5) The multiplier is
52 53
D A
1 1 MPC
If
54 55
B C
A and D show a deflationary gap. C shows an economy at ideal equilibrium. Government spending is a component of aggregate demand in the economy (C + I + G + X). Reducing government expenditure will therefore reduce the level of aggregate demand, which will lead to a reduction in the rate of economic growth rather than the desired increase. Although the economy was already at its natural rate of unemployment, the increase in demand will initially lead to a reduction in unemployment. It is only later that the short run Phillips curve will shift outwards returning the level of unemployment to its natural rate, as illustrated below.
56
450
Answer bank
57
Option (ii) will result in demand pull inflation, but options (i) and (iii) will both result in cost push inflation. A rise in indirect taxation (eg sales tax) will lead to the cost of goods and services increasing, which could, in turn, increase workers' demands for higher wages.
58 59
D B
Structural unemployment is where long-term changes such as automation occur. As workers leave Messiland to work in other countries, the labour supply curve in Messiland shifts to the left. Given the assumption that demand for labour remains unchanged, this shift in the supply curve means that the equilibrium between the supply and demand for labour will now be at a higher price (higher wage level) but lower quantity than before.
60 61
A 1 2 3 4
The quantity theory of money identity states that MV = PT. C D B A With the economy at full employment, there is no spare capacity so an increase in aggregate demand produces inflation. Aggregate supply cannot increase once full employment is reached. National income and national output are the same thing. Full employment places an upper limit on output.
62
B would reduce the size of the state sector, which would be contractionary; the reduction in interest rates might lead to sufficient private sector demand for the economy to expand overall, or it may not. The effect of such a policy combination on inflation is impossible to say. A would control inflation by making a public sector debt repayment possible, as well as via interest rate control. However, this is not an expansionary fiscal stance. C is a contractionary fiscal stance and a neutral policy on inflation.
63
A restrictive monetary policy will mean that interest rates in Country X are being raised. This is likely to lead to a fall in aggregate demand, and in particular, a fall in demand for larger, more expensive goods, such as consumer durables, which are likely to be bought on credit. By contrast, a rise in interest rates will make saving more attractive, and so the level of savings is likely to increase. Higher interest rates will lead to a reduction in investment in new capital projects, because the rise in interest rates will lead to a reduction in the NPV of these projects. Higher interest rates will lead to an increase in a country's exchange rate. Rising interest rates provide investors with a higher return for holding a country's currency, and so will mean demand for that currency increases thereby increasing its exchange rate.
64
Supply side policies seek to improve the ability to produce goods and services, either by improving training or by deregulating markets and making them more flexible. In effect, supply side policies seek to increase the supply of labour rather than decreasing it. A policy which seeks to manage economic growth by controlling money supply is a monetary policy.
65
Consumption of all goods will increase, including imports. This will increase the supply of sterling on the currency markets and the price of sterling will therefore fall.
Answer bank
451
66
Government expenditure acts as an injection into the economy, so decreasing government expenditure will help reduce aggregate demand in the economy. Increasing taxation (fiscal policy) and increasing interest rates (monetary policy) will also help reduce aggregate demand.
67
Government expenditure is greater than government receipts from taxation, so the country has a budget deficit. Injections into the economy (I + G + X) = $965m Withdrawals from the economy (S + T + M) = $940m Because injections are greater than withdrawals, economic activity will be increasing.
68
If Country A has 8% inflation and Country B has 12% inflation, Country A's currency will tend to strengthen against Country B's. A large deficit on the balance of trade can persist for many years if there are adequate inward capital flows. A fixed exchange rate makes foreign currency reserves essential. The depreciation in Euravia's currency means that imports into Euravia will become more expensive, leading to imported inflation. However, as a result of imported goods becoming more expensive demand for imports is likely to decrease rather than to increase. In effect, the cost of travelling overseas is like an import, and so it also becomes more expensive. By contrast, exports from Euravia are likely to become cheaper, so we would expect demand for exports from Euravia to increase.
69
70
A conclusion from the law of comparative advantage is that if free trade is allowed, countries will specialise in the production of goods and services in which they have a comparative advantage over other countries. As a result, the world's economic resources will be put to their most productive uses, and total output will be maximised. It does not follow that each country of the world will maximise its own national income or economic wealth (statement A), because the distribution of wealth between the individual countries in the world could be uneven, with some countries earning much more than others from their output and their exports. A production possibility boundary shows the possible combinations of two goods that a country can produce with its resources. The slope of the line for each country indicates the opportunity cost of producing corn in terms of lost production of clothing, and the opportunity cost of producing clothing in terms of lost production of corn. In Burra, the opportunity cost of producing corn is a lot less than it is in Mula. (If it were the same in both countries, the slopes of the production possibility boundaries would be parallel to each other.) This means that Burra has a comparative advantage in the production of corn. By the same analysis, we can conclude that Mula has a comparative advantage in the production of clothing. Statement B cannot be proved or disproved. Absolute advantage cannot be ascertained from the diagram. Burra might be a country with many more resources than Mula, and absolute advantage refers to the production capabilities of each country per unit of resource. Statement C cannot be proved or disproved either, because although Burra can produce more output in total than Mula, its national income per head of population depends on population size, for which we do not have any information.
71
452
Answer bank
72
In the short run the depreciation will increase the deficit. It only reduces it in the long run. A is true by definition, because of B; D is true because a risk in the exchange rate will reduce the price of imports.
73
The balance on the current account is made up of: Trade in goods (net position of exports minus imports) Trade in services (net position of exports minus imports) Income from capital investments overseas Transfers to overseas bodies Total
Capital flows are recorded in the capital account, and investment flows in the financial account.
74
Reducing the country's exchange rate will make its exports cheaper in other countries (increasing demand for its exports) and will make imports into it more expensive (reducing demand for exports). An expansionary fiscal policy and a reduction in interest rates will both increase aggregate demand in the country, and in doing so are likely to increase the demand for imports. If a foreign company invests in the country, this will be recorded in the financial account, not the current account.
75
The WTO's main functions are to promote free trade, resolve trade disputes and provide a framework of rules for international trade to operate within. However, it has no financing or banking functions.
Answer bank
453
454
Answer bank
455
456
Budget surplus, 319, 320 Buffer stocks, 114 Building societies, 216 Business confidence, 336 Business cycles, 295 Business expansion, 57
Cadbury report, 21
Capital, 5 Capital account, 390 Capital adequacy, 230 Capital markets, 209, 214 Capital-output ratio, 291 Cartels, 167 Cash reserve ratio, 346 Causes of unemployment, 307 Central bank, 234, 235 Centrally planned economy, 4 Certificates of Deposit, 211 Ceteris paribus, 71 Charities, 10 Circular flow of income, 257 Clearing banks, 226 Clearing system, 226 Cobweb effect, 111 Coincident indicator, 345 Collusion, 167 Collusive oligopoly, 170 Command economy, 4, 120 Commercial banks, 226 Commercial Paper, 202, 203 Common Agricultural Policy (CAP), 114 Common market, 409 Comparative advantage, 403, 404 Competition Commission, 191 Competition Policy, 190 Complements, 71 Compromise, 19 Compulsory competitive tendering, 184 Conditions of demand, 74 Conglomerate diversification, 56 Constant returns to scale, 50 Consumer Prices Index (CPI), 199, 303 Consumer surplus, 83 Consumer watchdog bodies, 189 Consumption, 276 Consumption function, 278 Contestable markets, 172
Index
457
Corporate governance, 15 Cost accounting, 43 Cost-plus pricing, 77 Cost of capital, 28 Commercial Paper, 202, 203 Cost push inflation, 304 Credit agreements, 202 Credit controls, 348 Credit creation, 228 Credit multiplier, 228, 229 Credit risk, 381 Cross elasticity of demand, 106 Crowding out, 281, 329 Cum div, 29 Currency blocs, 374 Currency of invoice, 379 Currency risk, 366 Current account, 390, 392 Current account deficit, 395 Customs duties, 406 Customs union, 409 Cyclical or demand-deficient unemployment, 308
Diseconomies of scale, 50, 51, 54 Disincentive effect, 326 Distribution of income, 73 Diversification, 413 Dividend valuation model, 28 Documentary credits, 382 Domestic deflation, 398 Dominance, 19 Dumping, 88, 407 Duopoly, 171
Expectations augmented Phillips curve, 312, 350 Expenditure approach to measuring national income, 261 Expenditure reducing, 395 Expenditure switching, 395 Explicit costs, 44 Export credit guarantees, 407 Export credit insurance, 383 Export multiplier, 285 Export subsidies, 407 Exports, 259 External balance, 318 External debt, 399 External economies of scale, 53 Externalities, 121, 123
8 Group, 409 Game theory, 170, 171 GDP deflator, 267, 270 GDP price deflator, 199 Giffen goods, 102 Gini coefficient, 174 Globalisation, 411, 412 of capital markets, 214 Gold, 374 Government bond, 244 Government intervention in foreign exchange markets, 373 Government payments, 205 Government receipts, 205 Government spending, 259 multiplier, 285 Greenbury report, 22 Gross domestic product (GDP), 254, 255 Gross national product (GNP), 255 Gross value added, 256 ampel report, 22 Herfindahl index, 174 Higgs report, 22 Hog cycle, 110 Horizontal integration, 56, 413 Households, 66 Hyperinflation, 302
Index
459
Inflation, 267, 302, 310, 318, 337, 348 and the exchange rate, 368 and the value of money, 199 Inflationary expectations, 350 Inflationary gap, 293, 310 Injections, 258 into the circular flow of income, 258 Institutional investors, 216 Insurance, 217 Insurance broker, 219 Insurance contract, 217 Insurance policy, 217 Insurance underwriter, 219 Integration/collaboration, 19 Interest, 5 Interest rate parity, 369 Interest rates, 237, 342, 346, 349 and the balance of payments, 398 and the exchange rate, 369 Internal economies of scale, 53 International Monetary Fund (IMF), 399 International trade, 403 Investment, 259, 280 Investment banks, 226 Investment multiplier, 285 Investment trust, 216 Issued share capital, 203
Loanable funds theory of interest rates, 339 London Inter-Bank Offered Rate, 235 Long run, 40, 109 Long run costs, 49 Long run supply curve, 78 Lorenz curve, 174
M , 233
0
J curve, 396
J curve effect, 396 Japan, 394
M4, 233 Macroeconomics, 5 Management buy-outs, 216 Management discretion model, 14 Managerial economies, 53 Managerial model of the firm, 14 Managerial objectives, 14 Marginal costs, 41 Marginal efficiency of capital, 283 Marginal propensity to consume (MPC), 277 Marginal propensity to save (MPS), 277, 285 Marginal revenue, 136 Marginal taxation rates, 325 Marginal utility, 67 Market, 66 Market clearing price, 82 Market concentration, 58, 173 Market demand, 73 Market demand curve, 70 Market economy, 4 Market failure, 120, 182, 193 Market period, 109 Market supply curve, 79 Marshall-Lerner conditions, 396 Matching receipts and payments, 378 Maximum prices, 86 Mergers, 56 Merit goods, 124 Mezzanine finance, 203 Microeconomics, 5 Minimum efficient scale, 54 Minimum price legislation, 87 Minimum prices, 87 Minimum wages, 89 Mixed economy, 4 Monetarists, 305, 338 Monetary policy, 318, 342, 345, 348 Monetary theory, 333 Money market, 209, 211 hedges, 380 Money supply, 337 342 Monopolies, 121
460
Index
Monopolistic competition, 164 Monopoly, 147 Monopsony/monopsonists, 121 Moral suasion, 347 Multinational enterprises, 411 Multiplier, 284-289 Mutual organisations, 10
Objectives of firms, 13
Oligopoly, 167 OPEC, 168 Open market operations, 235 Opportunity cost, 7, 44, 404 Options, 214 Ordinary shares, 245 Organisational coalition, 15 Ostentation, goods of, 103 Output approach to measuring national income, 260 Over the counter (OTC) markets, 210 /E ratio, 27 Parallel markets, 212 Pension funds, 216 Perfect competition, 120, 141 Phillips curve, 311 Point elasticity of demand, 94
Pollution, 122, 125 policies, 126 Precautionary motive, 333 Price ceiling, 86 Price discrimination, 151 Price earnings (P/E) ratio, 27 Price elasticity of demand, 94 Price elasticity of supply, 107 Price leadership, 170 Price legislation, 125 Price mechanism, 66, 82, 121 Price regulation, 85 Price theory, 66 Primary markets, 110 Primary sector, 12 Principal sources of long-term capital, 203 Principal sources of short-term capital, 202 Private benefit, 122 Private cost, 122 Private costs, 121 Private sector, 11 Privatisation, 184 Producer surplus, 83 Product differentiation, 164, 167 Production possibility curve, 6 Production quotas, 88 Productive inefficiency, 186 Profit, 5, 40, 43 Profit maximisation, 13, 136 Profit maximising position, 138, 139 Profit seeking organisations, 11 Profitability, 231 Progressive tax, 322 Proportional tax, 322 Protectionism, 406 Protectionist measures, 397 Public goods, 124 Public Sector Borrowing Requirement (PSBR), 319 Public sector net cash requirement (PSNCR), 281, 319 Public sector organisations, 11 Purchasing power parity theory, 368 ualitative controls, 347 Qualities of money, 198 Quantitative controls, 346 Quantity theory of money, 305, 333
Index
461
Social benefit, 122 Social cost, 122 Specialisation, 404 Specific tax, 324 Speculation, 368, 384 Speculative motive, 334 Spot rate, 364 Stagflation, 295 Stakeholder conflicts, 19 Stakeholder influence, 18 Stakeholders, 17 Statutory minimum wage, 89 Stock Exchange, 184 Combined Code, 22 Structural unemployment, 307 Subsidies, 125, 130 Substitute goods, 71, 103 Substitution effect, 102 Sunk costs, 44 Supernormal profits, 150 Supply, 75 Supply curve, 76 Supply schedule, 76 Supply side policies, 318 Supply side economic policies, 351, 352 Suppression, 19 Surplus on current account, 394 Surplus units, 200 Swaps, 214
Takeovers, 56
Tariffs, 395, 406 Taxation, 258, 320, 321 Technical efficiency, 143 Technical inefficiency, 157, 186 Technological changes, 336 Technological developments, 79 Technological progress, 155 Technological unemployment, 307 Term currency, 364 Term life, 220 Term structure of interest rates, 241 Terms of trade, 400 Tertiary sector, 12 Time horizon, 103 Total costs, 41 Total revenue, 136 Trade cycles, 275, 295 Transactions motive, 333 Transfer payments, 205, 258
Transformation curve, 6 Translation exposure, 378 Transmission mechanism, 339 Treasury bill, 244 Types of unemployment, 307 nderlying rate of inflation, 303 Unemployment, 306, 307 Unit elasticity of demand, 98 Unit trusts, 216 Universal Life Contract, 220 Utility, 67
X-Inefficiency, 157
ield curve, 242 Yield on Commercial paper, 238 Yield on equities (dividend yield), 243 Yield on financial instruments, 237 Yield on Treasury bills, 239 Yields on bonds, 240
Index
463
464
Index
Review Form & Free Prize Draw Paper C4 Fundamentals Of Business Economics (02/10)
All original review forms from the entire BPP range, completed with genuine comments, will be entered into one of three draws on 31 July 2010, 31 January 2011 and 31 July 2011. The names on the first four forms picked out on each occasion will be sent a cheque for 50.
Name: Address:
How have you used this Interactive Text? (Tick one box only) Home study (book only) On a course: college With 'correspondence' package Other Why did you decide to purchase this Interactive Text? (Tick one box only) Have used BPP Texts in the past Recommendation by friend/colleague Recommendation by a lecturer at college Saw information on BPP website Saw advertising Other Which BPP products have you used? Text Kit Passcard MCQ cards
During the past six months do you recall seeing/receiving any of the following? (Tick as many boxes as are relevant) Our advertisement in Financial Management Our advertisement in Pass Our advertisement in PQ Our brochure with a letter through the post Our website www.bpp.com Which (if any) aspects of our advertising do you find useful? (Tick as many boxes as are relevant) Prices and publication dates of new editions Information on Text content Facility to order books off-the-page None of the above
Your ratings, comments and suggestions would be appreciated on the following areas. Very useful Introductory section (Key study steps, personal study) Chapter introductions Key terms Quality of explanations Case studies and other examples Assessment focus points Questions and answers in each chapter Fast forwards and chapter roundups Quick quizzes Question Bank Answer Bank Index Icons Overall opinion of this Study Text Excellent Good Adequate Poor Yes No Do you intend to continue using BPP products? On the reverse of this page are noted particular areas of the text about which we would welcome your feedback. The BPP author of this edition can be e-mailed at: adrianthomas@bpp.com Please return this form to: Janice Ross, CIMA Certificate Publishing Manager, BPP Professional Education, FREEPOST, London, W12 8BR Useful Not useful